JP2020028760A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing necessary driving force when displacing a body member relative to a base member.SOLUTION: When a decorative member 450 is displaced to a first position, a contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and rollers 492a of a regulation unit 490 are brought into contact with each other. In the rollers 492a of the regulation unit 490, rotation shafts 492b are disposed in a direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the decorative member 450. In this way, if the decorative member 450 is displaced in the displacement direction, the rollers 492a can rotate following the displacement of the decorative member 450. Therefore, a necessary driving force when the decorative member 450 is displaced can be suppressed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 22

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a main body member that is displaced between a first position and a second position with respect to the base member, and a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member. There is known a gaming machine provided with a main body member disposed at a first position and a displacement member formed to be displaceable (Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-162990 A

  However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that a driving force required for displacing the main body member with respect to the base member increases.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a driving force required when displacing a main body member with respect to a base member. And

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 has a base member, a main body member displaced between a first position and a second position with respect to the base member, and a displaceable main body member. A displacement member to be disposed, wherein the displacement member is displaced in a state where the main body member is disposed at least in the first position, and is rotatably supported by one of the base member or the main body member. A rotating member to be brought into contact with an outer peripheral surface of the rotating member in a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position, and an abutment disposed on the other of the base member or the main body member. And a direction of displacement when the main body member is arranged at the first position and a direction of rotation of the rotating member are set substantially parallel to each other.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, at least the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that can be elastically deformed.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 3, in the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the rotating member is formed so as to be displaceable in a radial direction, and one of the base member or the main body member is configured such that the main body member is the main body member. In a state where the rotary member is arranged at the first position, the rotary member includes an opposite member that is opposed to the contact member with the rotary member interposed therebetween, and that is opposed to the outer peripheral surface of the rotary member so as to be able to contact the outer peripheral surface.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the driving force required when the main body member is displaced with respect to the base member can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to suppress rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, it is possible to suppress the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a regulation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a roller member. (A) is a side view of the regulation unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the regulation unit along line XXc-XXc in FIG. 20 (b). It is a front view of the up-down displacement unit in the 1st position. (A) is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit in the XXII section of FIG. 21, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along the line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. (A) to (c) are partial enlarged front views of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 23A is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 23A, and FIG. 23B is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. FIG. 23C is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line XXIVc-XXIVc in FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a decoration member. It is an exploded back perspective view of a decoration member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotation unit. (A) is a top view of the rotation unit, (b) is a front view of the rotation unit as viewed in the XXIXb direction of FIG. 29 (a), and (c) is a XXIXc-XXIXc of FIG. 29 (a). It is sectional drawing of the rotation unit in a line. (A) is a top view of an intermediate member, (b) is sectional drawing of the intermediate member in the XXXb-XXXb line of FIG. 30 (a). (A) is a front view of a front cover, and (b) is a partial enlarged sectional view of the front cover taken along the line XXXXb-XXXXIb in FIG. 31 (a). 32A is a top view of the reflector, and FIG. 32B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the reflector taken along line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. (A) is a top view of the rotating unit, and (b) of FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view of the rotating unit taken along line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb of (a). (A) and (b) are the elements on larger scale sectional drawing of the rotation unit in XXXIV part of FIG.33 (b). (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation unit. (A) And (b) is a top view of a rotation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a center frame. (A) is a front view of a center frame, (b) is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line of FIG. 39 (a). 39A is a cross-sectional view of the center frame taken along line XLa-XLa in FIG. 39A, and FIG. 39B is a cross-sectional view of the center frame taken along line XLb-XLb in FIG. 39A. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a rotation unit and a center frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a distribution device. It is a partial enlarged front view of a distribution device. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device along the line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 43. (A) is a sectional view of the sorting device along the line XLVa-XLVa in FIG. 43, (b) is a sectional view of the sorting device along the line XLVb-XLVb in (a) of FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device along the line XLVc-XLVc of FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device along the line XLVd-XLVd of FIG. (A) is a sectional view of the sorting device, and (b) is a sectional view of the sorting device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a light emitting decoration unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a regulation unit in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a side view of the regulation unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the regulation unit taken along line XLIXc-XLIXc in FIG. 49 (b). (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of a vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a distribution device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front view of a distribution device. (A) is a sectional view of the sorting device along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 52, and (b) is a sectional view of the sorting device along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 52 (b). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a distribution apparatus. (A) is a front view of the sorting device in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device along the line LVb-LVb in (a) of FIG. 55, and (c) is a diagram of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the LVc-LVc line of b). It is sectional drawing of the center frame 600 as a modification.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 4 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front door. 5 and a lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front door 5 incorporates a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and is provided with a window part 5c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front of the game board 13 is visible through the glass unit 16 on the front side of the pachinko machine 1.

  On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an upper surface open, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  The front door 5 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. At the periphery of the window 5c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 incorporating light-emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by the lighting or blinking of a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. At the upper left of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 5c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is regenerated according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to (i), whereby the ball is hit on the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 76 and 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gates 66 and 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled. See) on the back side. The base plate 60 is made of wood laminated with a thin plate material, and is formed so that various structures provided on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof cannot be seen by a player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed with a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

  The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 77 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is provided inside the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear sides. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening and the like are provided and fired) on the front surface of the game board 13. The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 76 to prevent a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and vibrates. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate in a lighting state whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of probable change, in a time saving operation, or in normal operation, or to indicate in a lighting state whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is changing. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and the combination of the emission colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when one of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 has a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the big hit type when it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 being in the normal state is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is in effect (the state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable changes or during working hours, not only is the probability of hitting the second symbol increased, but also the time during which the first motor-operated accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, so that it is longer than normal. The time is set. When the first motor-operated accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the first electric auditors specialty 640a is directed to the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the first electric auditors-care article 640a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is ready to win. Therefore, during a probability change or during a shortened working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  It is to be noted that, during probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit Thus, a change may be made to increase the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened from the normal operation. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the first electric accessory is opened once. At least one of the number of times the 640a opens may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened, and the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82 are opened each time. The number of hits may not be performed, and only the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal pattern.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning (starting winning) of one of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 as a trigger to synchronize with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for performing symbol variation display, and a variation symbol display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the spheres of the first through gates 66 and 67 as triggers. And a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that emits light.

  A center frame 600 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from an opening opening at the center of the center frame 600.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large-sized 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  Each time the ball passes through the first through gates 66 and 67, the second symbol display device displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as display symbols (second symbols (not shown)) for a predetermined time. The variable display for alternately lighting is performed. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gates 66 and 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, the number of chances of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the first motor-driven accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during probable change and during working hours.

  In addition, the second winning opening during the probable change or during the working hours, such as increasing the probability of winning during the probable change or during the working hours, or by increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the first electric accessory 640a per hit. In the case where the ball is likely to win the 640 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. May be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gates 66 and 67 are mounted on the game board in the regions on both sides of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gates 66 and 67 are configured so that, of the balls fired on the game board, some of the balls flowing down the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gates 66 and 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gates 66 and 67 is retained up to a total of four times, the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and a second symbol retaining lamp (FIG. (Not shown). Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls through the first through gates 66 and 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less or five or more (for example, eight). Is also good. The number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, but may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in front view, a second winning opening 640 where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 ( (See FIG. 4), a jackpot lottery is performed, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports where five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are the same. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first winning opening 64. May be configured such that the number of award balls to be paid out when the player wins is three, and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640.

  The first winning combination 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and the ball is difficult to enter the second winning opening 640. I have. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gates 66 and 67, the first electric accessory is displayed. 640a is in an open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric auditors product 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Further, during the probable change or during the shortened working hours, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during the normal working hours. Therefore, a state in which a ball can be more easily won in the second winning opening 640 can be created during probable change or during working hours, as compared with normal times.

  Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first motor-operated accessory 640a as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where it can win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, a person who shoots a ball so that the ball passes on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, obtains a lot of jackpot lottery opportunities by winning in the first winning opening 64, and aims to become a jackpot, This is advantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, by passing the ball through the first through gates 66 and 67, the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state. Since the winning is easy, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device unit 80, passes through the first through gates 66 and 67, and passes through the first through gate 66, 67. It is more advantageous for the player to set the electric accessory 640a in the open state and to aim for a 15R certain-change big hit by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether the pachinko machine 1 is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to one of the first prize port 64 and the second prize port 640 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. It may be on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided a sticking space K 1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label, and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K 1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 82 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. You. The first out port 71 is provided below the first winning port 64.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 441 and 457.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, power outage signal SG1 is output to main controller 110 and payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  Note that FIG. 7 shows a state in which the displacement members 430 disposed on both left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 are respectively displaced to the retracted positions. In FIG. 8, displacement members disposed on both left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 are shown. The state in which the members 430 have been respectively displaced to the overhang positions is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the rear case 300, a vertical displacement unit 400 is provided above and a light emitting decoration is provided below. Units 800 are provided, respectively.

  The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from four outer edges of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. One side (front side) is formed in an open box shape. A rectangular opening 301a as viewed from the front is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

  The vertical displacement unit 400 includes a rear base 420 formed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 and having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, a displacement member 430 and a decorative member disposed displaceably on the rear base 420. 450, and a projecting position in which the displacement member 430 and the decorative member 450 are retracted above the rear case 300 and a projecting portion that projects to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case (that is, the third symbol display device 81). Position (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the rotation unit 500 is provided on the decoration member 450, and the rotation unit 500 is rotated, and the LED of the irradiation unit 530 provided on the rotation unit 500 emits light. And symbols can be displayed. Details of such a structure will be described later.

  The light-emitting decoration unit 800 mainly includes a base body 810 and a light-emitting device 820 disposed on the front side of the base body 810, and emits light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 821 disposed inside the light-emitting device 820. By changing the mode (for example, the number of LEDs 821 to be illuminated), an effect by light emission is performed. The details will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 47, the detailed configurations of the vertical displacement unit 400, the rotation unit 500, the center frame 600, the sorting device 700, and the light emitting decoration unit 800 will be described. First, the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 9 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400. 11 and 13 are front perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 12 and 14 are rear perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 to 14, the vertical displacement unit 400 includes a front base 410 having a substantially L shape in a front view, a rear base 420 overlapped on the rear side of the front base 410, and a front side of the front base 410. , A displacement member 430 that is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441, and connected to one end of the displacement member 430 in the up and down direction (up and down in FIG. 9) with the displacement of the displacement member 430. Direction), a front cover 460 disposed in front of one end of the front base 410, and a decoration member disposed in a gap between the front cover 460 and the front base 410 facing each other. A guide rod P1 for guiding the sliding of the decorative member 450, a side wall member 470 provided at the left and right ends of the decorative member 450 to regulate the displacement of the decorative member 450, and a front surface of the front base 410. A rotation regulating member 480 which is disposed are formed mainly includes.

  In the vertical displacement unit 400, all members except for the decorative member 450 are arranged in a symmetrical pair, and the decorative member 450 is interposed between the pair of opposed members. Further, the detailed description of the members arranged in a pair describes only the members arranged on the left side when viewed from the front (the left side in FIG. 9), and the members arranged on the right side (the right side in FIG. 9) when viewed from the front include The same reference numerals are given to the members on the left side as viewed from the front, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The front base 410 is formed of a substantially L-shaped plate-like body as viewed from the front, and has a first piece 410X forming a long side of the substantially L shape and a first piece 410X forming a short side of the substantially L shape. It is mainly provided with two pieces 410Y.

  The first piece 410X is arranged so that its extending direction is parallel to the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 9). Further, the first piece 410X has a standing portion 412 erected on the front side of an outer end portion (left end portion) in the left-right direction, an upper concave groove 413 recessed in an arcuate cross section at an upper portion, and a cross section at a lower portion. And a lower concave groove 414 formed in an arc shape.

  The upright portion 412 is a wall that abuts on a sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 to be described later and regulates the rearward displacement of the decorative member 450, and extends from an upper portion to a lower portion of the left edge of the first piece 410X. It is formed.

  The upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 are grooves into which a guide rod P1 described later is internally fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. The upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 are formed such that axes formed in a semi-circular cross section are located on the same straight line, and the lower concave groove 414 extends from the upper end of the upper concave groove 413. Is set to be larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. Thereby, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be fitted in the upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414.

  The second piece 410Y is formed in a vertically long rectangle in a front view, and has an opening 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center thereof, an engaging portion 415 projecting to the rear side, and a shaft supporting portion 416 projecting in a cylindrical shape to the rear side. It is formed mainly in preparation.

  The opening 411 is an opening through which the shaft of the drive motor 441 attached to the front side of the front base 410 is inserted into the back side of the front base 410, and a transmission gear fitted to the shaft of the drive motor 441. The inner diameter is formed larger than the outer shape of 442. Thus, when the drive motor 441 fails due to deterioration or the like, the drive motor 441 can be removed from the front base 410, and the transmission gear 442 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 400 through the opening 411. As a result, after the transmission gear 442 is attached to the shaft of the new drive motor 441, the transmission gear 442 can be disposed by inserting the opening 411, so that the shaft of the drive motor 441 can be This can be performed more easily than when the drive motor 441 is arranged on the front base 410 while being inserted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 arranged between the opposed sides of the transmission gear 443, and the number of steps for replacing parts is reduced. be able to. Further, in this case, since the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 can be securely fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441, the reliability at the time of component replacement can be improved.

  The engaging portion 415 is a protrusion for locking one end of a torsion spring SP1 described later, and protrudes from the back side of the second piece 410Y, and its protruding tip is bent to the center in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400. It is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section. Accordingly, the rotation of the torsion spring SP1 around the axis can be restricted by the protruding portion toward the rear side, and the displacement of the torsion spring SP1 toward the rear side can be restricted by the bent portion at the tip.

  The shaft support portion 416 is a cylindrical rod member made of a metal material, and has one end fitted to the back side of the front base 410.

  The drive motor 441 is a motor that applies a driving force to the vertical displacement unit 400, and is disposed on the front base 410 as described above, and is a transmission gear 442 disposed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420. , 443.

  As described above, the transmission gear 442 is a gear whose shaft hole is externally fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 and is connected to the drive motor 441, and is provided in mesh with the transmission gear 443.

  The transmission gear 443 is a gear that is rotatably disposed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 with its shaft hole fitted inside the projection 417 of the front base 410, and as described above, The gear 442 is arranged in mesh with the gear 442. Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor 441 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 443 via the transmission gear 442.

  In addition, the transmission gear 443 includes a protrusion 443a that protrudes from a rear side surface. The protrusion 443a is a rod member formed of a metal material and formed in a columnar shape, and is disposed on the outer peripheral edge of the transmission gear 443. Therefore, when the driving force is applied to the driving motor 441 to rotate the transmission gear 443 as described above, the projection 443a is displaced in an arc shape about the axis of the transmission gear 443.

  The rear base 420 is a plate member formed to have substantially the same external shape as the front view shape of the second piece 410Y of the front base 410, and includes an upright portion 421 that stands upright on the outer edge.

  The erected portion 421 is a wall for forming a gap between the front base 410 and the back base 420 facing each other, and the erected distance is larger than the longitudinal dimension of the combined displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443. It is set to have a large size, and is disposed in a state where the front end face is in contact with the rear side of the front base 410. As a result, a gap for disposing the transmission gears 442 and 443 and the later-described displacement member 430 can be formed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 facing each other.

  The displacement member 430 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially box shape whose outer edge portion protrudes rearward. Further, the displacement member 430 has a through hole 433 formed in the bent portion in a circular shape in the front-rear direction, a decoration-side sliding hole 432 formed in one side of the long side in the front-rear direction, and a short side side. It mainly includes a drive-side sliding hole 431 formed through the other side in the front-rear direction, and a displacement-side engaging portion 434 protruding from a protruding portion of the outer edge portion on one side of the long side.

  The through hole 433 is a hole into which the shaft support 416 of the front base 410 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support 416. Therefore, after the through-hole 433 is inserted into the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410, the front base 410 and the rear base 420 are combined, so that the displacement member 430 can be displaced with respect to the front base 410. Can be arranged.

  The drive-side sliding hole 431 is a long hole into which the projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 is inserted, and the width in the short direction is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection 443a. The drive-side sliding hole 431 has a longitudinal direction formed in the same direction as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) on the short side of the displacement member 430, and as described above, the transmission gear 443 causes the driving force of the drive motor 441 to move. When the rotation of the transmission gear 443 is performed, the projection 443 a of the transmission gear 443 slides inside the driving-side sliding hole 431 with the displacement, thereby rotating the displacement member 430 about the through hole 433. That is, by driving the drive motor 441, the displacement member 430 can be displaced around the through hole 433.

  The decoration-side sliding hole 432 is a long hole that is provided in a decoration member 450 to be described later and through which a columnar supporting portion 452a is inserted, and whose width in the short direction is the outer diameter of the supporting portion 452a. It is formed larger than. The decoration-side sliding hole 432 has a longitudinal direction formed in the same direction as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) on the long side of the displacement member 430. As described above, when the displacement member 430 is rotated about the through-hole 433, the decoration-side sliding hole 432 has an arc-shaped displacement locus about the through-hole 433.

  The displacement-side engaging portion 434 is a protrusion that engages the other end of the torsion spring SP1 described later, and is formed to protrude from an inner peripheral surface of an outer edge portion provided on the rear side of the displacement member 430. In addition, the displacement-side engaging portion 434 is formed on a side surface inside the bend of the displacement member 430 that is bent into a substantially L shape in a front view. Accordingly, the other end of the torsion spring SP1 can be engaged with the displacement side engaging portion 434 inside the displacement member 430 on the back side.

  The torsion spring SP1 has its torsion portion disposed around the through hole 433 (the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410) of the displacement member 430, and rotates counterclockwise around the rotation axis of the displacement member 430 (vertical displacement unit). One end of the displacement member 430 that constitutes the right side of the front view 400 is applied to the engaging portion 415 of the front base 410, and the other end is a displacement member. 430 are engaged with the displacement side engagement portions 434, respectively. As a result, the displacement member 430 rotates counterclockwise around the axis of the through hole 433 (the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410) with respect to the front base 410 (the displacement member 430 configuring the right side of the vertical displacement unit 400 in front view rotates clockwise). )).

  As described above, the decorative member 450 is a member interposed between a pair of opposing vertical displacement units 400 configured as a pair of left and right sides, and has a front base whose size in the left-right direction is symmetrically disposed. It is set to be the same as the distance between the outer ends in the left-right direction of 410.

  The decorative member 450 is formed in a U-shape as viewed from the front with its lower side open, and includes a front base 452 constituting a central portion thereof, a sliding portion 451 connected to both left and right ends of the front base 452, and a front base. It is formed mainly including a back base 453 that covers the back of the 452 and a rotation unit 500 that is rotatably arranged on the front side of the front base 452.

  The front base 452 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body as viewed from the front, and has a U-shaped cross section in which upper and lower end faces are bent to the back side. The front base 452 includes a support portion 452a protruding from the rear side, an engagement portion 452b protruding from both ends in the left-right direction to the front side, and a contact surface 452h formed smoothly on the front side at both ends in the left-right direction. And an inclined surface 452g formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h.

  As described above, the support portion 452a is a rod member inserted into the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430, and is formed in a cylindrical rod-like body. As a result, the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the motor 441, and when the decoration side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 433, the displacement member 430 is inserted into the decoration side sliding hole 432. The support portion 452a is displaced with the displacement of the decoration-side sliding hole 432. As a result, the decorative member 450 can be displaced by displacing the support portion 452a.

  The engagement portion 452b is a projection to which the other end of the urging spring SP2 described later is engaged, and is formed in a hook shape from the front side of both ends of the front base 452.

  The contact surface 452h is a smooth surface that is in contact with a roller 492a of the regulating unit 490 described later, and is formed on a smooth surface on which the roller 492a can roll. The inclined surface 452g is a surface that is inclined downward from the front side to the rear side at the lower end portion of the contact surface 452h. Thereby, it is possible to easily bring a regulation unit 490 described later and the decorative member 450 into contact with each other. The detailed description of the contact between the regulating unit 490 and the decorative member 450 will be described later.

  The sliding portion 451 is a rod-shaped body having a rectangular cross section extending in the up-down direction, and is provided so as to be connected to both left and right ends of the front base 452. In addition, the sliding portion 451 includes a through hole 451a that opens in the vertical direction. The through hole 451a is an opening through which the guide rod P1 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1.

  Accordingly, when the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the drive motor 441 and the decorative member 450 is displaced as described above, the direction of the displacement is changed by the sliding portions 451 provided at both ends of the front base 452. Be regulated. As a result, the decorative member 450 is displaced along the axial direction (vertical direction) of the guide rod P1. That is, the decoration member 450 can be slid in the vertical direction by the application of the driving force from the driving motor 441.

  The rear base 453 is a plate member that is covered on the rear side of the front base 452 at a substantially central position in the left-right direction, and is formed to have substantially the same outer size as the central portion of the front base 452 when viewed from the front. Thus, the gears 454 to 456 can be rotatably disposed in the internal space between the front base 452 and the rear base 453. A drive motor 457 that outputs a driving force for rotation and a control signal to the rotation unit 500 is attached to the back surface of the back base 453. The details of the gears 454 to 456 and the drive motor 457 will be described later.

  The front cover 460 is a member that is disposed to face the front side of the first piece 410X of the front base 410 and covers the front of the first piece 410X, and is substantially similar to the outer shape of the first piece 410X when viewed from the front. It is formed in the same shape. The front cover 460 is provided with an upright wall 461 erected from the outer edge to the back side, and is formed in a box-like body having an open back side.

  The upright wall 461 includes an upper groove forming member 462 protruding upward from a side surface forming the upper side, and a lower groove forming member 463 protruding downward from a side surface forming the lower side.

  The upper groove forming member 462 is formed at a position facing the upper concave groove 413 of the front base 410, and has a concave groove 462a which is formed in a semicircular shape on the back side. On the other hand, the lower groove forming member 463 is formed at a position facing the lower groove 414 of the front base 410, and has a concave groove 463a formed in a semicircular arc on the back side.

  The concave grooves 462a and 463a are grooves in which the guide rod P1 is internally fitted, and are concavely formed in a semicircular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. Also, the grooves 462a and 463a are formed such that the axes provided in the semicircular arc are formed on the same straight line, and the distance between the upper end of the groove 462a and the lower end of the groove 463a is opposite. It is set larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. Thereby, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be fitted in the concave grooves 462a and 463a.

  Therefore, when the front cover 460 is disposed in front of the front base 410, the guide rod P can be sandwiched between the upper concave groove 413 and the concave groove 462a and the lower concave groove 414 and the concave groove 463a. As a result, the guide rod P1 can be disposed on the front base 410 so as not to fall off. As a result, the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 into which the guide rod P1 is inserted can be held so as not to fall off the front base 410.

  Also, the distance between the front wall 461 of the front cover 460 formed on the outer side in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400 and the front-rear facing portion of the standing portion 412 formed on the first piece 410X of the front base 410. Is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the thickness of the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction, and the left and right outer ends of the sliding portion 451 are arranged between the sliding members 451. Thereby, as described above, when the decoration member 450 is displaced in the up-down direction, it is possible to suppress the decoration member 450 from rattling in the front-rear direction.

  The side wall members 470 are members disposed at both ends on the center side in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400, and are formed of a substantially L-shaped plate-like body bent rearward in a side view. Further, a wall surface bent outward in the left-right direction is formed on the front end surface of the side wall member 470, and a regulating unit 490 described later is attached to the wall surface.

  Further, the side wall member 470 is provided with a pattern on the side surface on the center side in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 9) with respect to the vertical displacement unit 400 so that the player can use the center frame 86 ( The pattern of the side wall member 470 is disposed so as to be visible through a central opening of the center member (see FIG. 2). Thereby, the vertical displacement unit 400 (for example, the front cover 460 or the like) disposed outside the side wall member 470 in the left-right direction can be made invisible to the player.

  The rotation restricting member 480 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body as viewed from the front, and has an annular roller 481 provided with a shaft in the front-rear direction on the back side so as to be rotatable. In addition, the rotation restricting member 480 has an outer shape that is substantially half the outer shape of the second piece 410Y of the front base 410 in a front view, and is provided with a predetermined gap in front of the front base 410.

  The rotation restricting member 480 is a member that returns a rotation unit 500 described later to an initial position, and can define an initial position of the rotation unit 500 by abutting the roller 481 and the upper surface base 510.

  The urging spring SP2 is a coil spring that connects the front base 410 and the decorative member 450 and urges the decorative member 450 upward. One end is engaged with the engaging portion 418 of the front base 410, and the other. The end is engaged with the engaging portion 412b of the decorative member 450. Thus, the decorative member 450 is constantly urged upward with respect to the front base 410. Therefore, when the decoration member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position by a displacement described later, the decoration member 450 can be easily displaced to the second position. Further, the biasing spring SP2 is bent along the outer peripheral surface of the roller 419 at the center. Thereby, the length of the urging spring SP2 can be secured, and the urging force can be prevented from being excessively increased.

  Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 15 to 17A are front views of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG. 15A shows a state in which the vertical displacement unit 400 is arranged at the ascending position, and FIG. FIG. 17A corresponds to the state of being disposed at the lowered position.

  15B corresponds to FIG. 15A, FIG. 16B corresponds to FIG. 16A, and FIG. 17B corresponds to the rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in FIG. . 15 (b), 16 (b) and 17 (b) show a state in which the rear base 420 is removed for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in a state where the vertical displacement unit 400 is arranged at the ascending position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as a “second position”), the displacement member 430 is one of them. The side (the long side where the decoration-side sliding hole 432 is formed) is swung up, and the decoration member 450 is positioned at the uppermost position. The support portion 452 a of the decoration member 450 is located inside the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 and close to the radially outer end from the axis of the through hole 433.

  In this state, the rotation direction of one side of the displacement member 430 (the short side where the drive-side sliding hole 431 is formed) is substantially the same as the direction of a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a. Matches. That is, a state in which the extending direction of the drive-side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 is orthogonal to the direction of a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a (the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are at the dead center). Is formed). Accordingly, the displacement member 430 cannot rotate around the through-hole 433, and the displacement member 430 can be prevented from being rotationally displaced by the weight of the decoration member 450 connected to the displacement member 430.

  15A and 15B, the pair of drive motors 441 are respectively driven to rotate, and when each transmission gear 443 is rotated, the projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 causes the displacement member 430 to rotate. The right and left displacement members 430 are respectively pushed down by sliding in the drive side sliding holes 431.

  Accordingly, the left and right displacement members 430 are rotated around the axis of the through hole 433 as the rotation center, and the decoration member 450 is displaced downward as shown in FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b). In this state, when the transmission gears 443 are further rotated by the rotational drive of the pair of drive motors 441, the left and right displacement members 430 are further pushed downward, as shown in FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b). As shown, the decorative member 450 is arranged at a lowered position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as a “first position”).

  As shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, when the vertical displacement unit 400 is located at the first position, the left and right displacement members 430 are formed on one side thereof (the drive side sliding hole 431 is formed). (Short side) is lowered, so that the decorative member 450 is located at the lowest position and protrudes to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). .

  In this case (when the vertical displacement unit 400 is located at the lowered position), the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400, and the through-hole 433 is formed. The side surface of the support portion 452a of the decorative member 450 abuts on the radially outer end side. Thus, the weight of the decorative member 450 can apply a force displacing in the gravitational direction and a force in the direction from the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400 to the center portion on the support portion 452a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decoration member 450 from rattling in the vertical and horizontal directions due to the displacement operation of the rotation unit 500 of the decoration member 450 described later.

  Further, the rotation direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the shorter side on which the drive side sliding hole 431 is formed) substantially coincides with the direction of a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a. That is, a state in which the extending direction of the drive-side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 is orthogonal to the direction of a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a (the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are at the dead center). Is formed). Therefore, the displacement member 430 cannot rotate with the through hole 433 as an axis, and when the decoration member 450 rattles in the vertical direction due to the displacement operation of the rotation unit 500 described later, the displacement member 430 is displaced by the rattling. Displacement of the member 430 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress lptp that the decoration member 450 rattles.

  In addition, regulation units 490 are arranged in front of both ends of decorative member 450. Thereby, the displacement of the decorative member 450 in the front-back direction can be regulated. The detailed description of the regulation unit 490 will be described later.

  Next, the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 18 is an exploded front perspective view of the regulating unit 490, and FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the roller member 492. 20A is a side view of the regulation unit 490, FIG. 20B is a rear view of the regulation unit 490, and FIG. 20C is a view taken along line XXc-XXc in FIG. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the regulation unit 490.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the regulating unit 490 includes a case member 491 formed in a box shape having an open back side, a roller member 492 disposed inside the case member 491, and a case member 491. And an outer edge member 493 disposed on an open (open side) outer edge.

  The case member 491 includes a protruding portion 491a protruding from the front side surface, a notch portion 491b cut out in a semicircular shape on both left and right side surfaces, and a bulging rear surface from the inner side surface facing the opening. Bulging portion 491c.

  The protruding portion 491a is a projection for fastening the case member 491 to the above-described side wall member 470. A fastening hole is formed in the front side, and a screw is fastened to the fastening hole from the front side via the side wall member 470. By doing so, the regulating unit 490 can be disposed on the side wall member 470.

  The cutout portions 491b are formed by vertically cutting two semicircular cutouts on both lateral sides of the case member 491 in the left-right direction. The cutout portion 491b is a cutout for inserting the collar 492c of the roller member 492 therein, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the collar 492c of the roller member 492.

  The bulging portion 491c is formed to bulge from below the center in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 20C) of the side surface (the rear surface of the front wall) facing the open side of the case member 491. The bulging portion 491c has a predetermined gap between the bulging portion 491c and the roller 492a of the roller member 492.

  The roller member 492 includes a roller 492a formed from an elastic member into an annular shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the axis, a shaft 492b inserted into the roller 492a, and both sides of the roller 492a supported by the shaft 492b. And a pair of retaining rings E1 externally fitted to the shaft portion 492b outside the collar 492c.

  The shaft portion 492b is a member that is inserted into the inner periphery of the roller 492a, is formed in a columnar shape substantially the same as the inner diameter of the inner periphery of the roller 492a, and has an axial dimension between the lateral sides of the case member 491 in the left-right direction. Is set to be larger than the width dimension. In addition, concave portions 492b1 that are recessed in the axial direction are formed at both axial ends of the shaft portion 492b. The concave portion 492b1 is formed over the entire circumference of the shaft portion 492b, and has an outer diameter in the axial direction smaller than an inner diameter of a retaining ring E1 described later.

  The collar 492c is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, is formed in a substantially stepped shape in cross section, and includes a small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 and a large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 having an outer diameter larger than the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1. Further, the inner diameter of the collar 492c (the inner diameter of the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2) is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b, and the shaft portion 492b can be inserted therein.

  The small-diameter tube portion 492c1 is a portion that is fitted inside the notch portion 491b of the case member 491, and as described above, the outer diameter of the small-diameter tube portion 492c1 is larger than the inner diameter of the notch portion 491b of the case member 491. Is done.

  The large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 is a member for regulating displacement in the left-right direction when the roller member 492 is disposed on the case member 491, and the outer diameter of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 is a notch of the case member 491. It is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the portion 491b. The distance between the axially outer side surfaces of the pair of large-diameter cylindrical portions 492c2 provided at both axial ends of the roller 492a is larger than the distance between the opposing left and right side surfaces inside the opening of the case member 491. Are also formed smaller.

  The retaining ring E1 is an E-ring (E-shaped retaining ring), and is fitted around the concave portion 492b1 with the opening portion widened in the concave portion 492b1 of the shaft portion 492b. That is, the inner diameter of the inner circumference of the retaining ring E1 is set substantially equal to the outer diameter of the recess 492b1.

  The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, after the retaining ring E1 is externally fitted to the concave portion 492b1 on one end side of the shaft portion 492b, the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is attached to one collar 492c from the other end (the side on which the retaining ring E1 is externally fitted). ) Is inserted through the shaft 492b. Next, after the roller 492a is inserted through the shaft portion 492b from the other end, the shaft portion of the one collar 492c is oriented with the large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 facing one side (the side on which the retaining ring E1 is fitted). 492b. Thereafter, one retaining ring E1 is externally fitted to the concave portion 492b1 on the other side of the shaft portion 492b.

  As a result, the displacement of the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c supported by the shaft portion 492b between the pair of retaining rings E1 is restricted by the retaining ring E1. As a result, the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c can be prevented from coming off the shaft portion 492b.

  The outer edge member 493 is a member that is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front and is disposed on the back side (open side) of the case member 491. The outer edge member 493 has an inner peripheral shape in a front view that is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the opening of the case member 491 in a rear view. On the side surface on the front side (the case member 491 side) of the outer edge member 493, an upright portion 493a that stands upright on the front side is formed around the inner edge portion.

  The upright portion 493a is provided with a recessed portion 493a1 that is recessed on the back side. The recess 493a1 is formed at a position facing the notch 491b of the case member 491. Therefore, the roller member 492 can be disposed on the case member 491 by sandwiching the collar 492c of the roller member 492 between the notch portion 491b and the concave portion 493a1 of the case member 491.

  The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, two collars 492c arranged at both axial ends of the roller member 492 are vertically arranged in the notch portion 491b of the case member 491 so as to pivotally support the collars 492c. Next, the outer edge member 493 is fastened and fixed to the case member 491 from the back side of the case member 491 with the upright portion 493a side facing the front side (facing the case member 491 side). Thus, the roller member 492 is rotatably disposed with respect to the case member 491, and can be prevented from dropping from the case member 491.

  Next, an operation of the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400 at the first position. FIG. 22A is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the XXII section of FIG. 21. FIG. 22B is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 along the line XXIIb-XXIIb in FIG. . In FIG. 22A, the outer shapes of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are illustrated by broken lines.

  FIGS. 23A to 23C are partially enlarged front views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 24A is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 along the line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 24B is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 23B, and FIG. 24C is a sectional view taken along the line XXIVc-XXIVc in FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the displacement unit 400. FIGS. 23A to 23C show the transition state of the vertical displacement unit 400, and the outer shapes of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are shown by broken lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the vertical displacement unit 400 is located at the first position, the decorative member 450 is located below. In this case, as described above, both ends of the decorative member 450 are located on the back side of the regulating unit 490.

  In this case, when the decoration member 450 is arranged at the first position and the rotation unit 500 described later is rotated, the decoration member 450 may rattle with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement. Therefore, there is an arrangement in which an engaging means for engaging the decorative member 450 with the front base 410 is provided to prevent rattling. The engaging means is provided on one of the decorative member 450 or the front base 410 and is urged by the urging means. The engaging member is formed so as to be engageable with the engaging member. An engaging member disposed on the other side of the front base 410, and using the displacement (displacement toward the first position) of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410, the engaging member resists the urging force of the urging means. When the decorative member 450 is located at the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the urging force of the urging means and engaged with the engaged member. Thereby, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the front base 410 is regulated by the engagement of the engaging means, and the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

  However, in such a conventional engaging means, in order to bring the engaging means into the engaged state (position the main body member at the first position), the engaging member is pressed against the urging force of the urging means. Not only does it need to be retracted, but also when the engagement state of the engagement means is released (the decoration member 450 is displaced from the first position to the second position), the urging force of the urging means is opposed. Therefore, there is a problem that the driving force required when the decorative member 450 is displaced with respect to the front base 410 increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 of the decorative member 450 is in contact with the roller 492a of the restricting unit 490, the relative displacement of the front base 410 is restricted. Thus, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotary unit 500 can be suppressed.

  In this case, since the direction of displacement when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position and the direction of rotation of the roller member 492 of the regulating unit 490 are set substantially parallel, the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position. At this time, the roller member 492 of the regulating unit 490 can be rotated with the displacement, so that the driving force required to displace the decoration member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body that can be elastically deformed as described above, when the roller 492a of the regulating unit 490 comes into contact with the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, the outer periphery of the roller 492a By elastically deforming the surface side, the front base 452 can easily hold the roller 492a. This makes it difficult for the roller 492a to rotate, thereby suppressing rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410.

  The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body exemplified by rubber, urethane, and the like. In this case, due to the vibration damping effect, a vibration damping function or a vibration insulating function of attenuating and insulating vibration input from the decorative member 450 to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be performed. This is because it is possible to suppress wear and failure of various devices provided on the 410 side, loosening of the fastening portion, and the like. In particular, when the rotation unit 500 is periodically displaced (for example, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated at a relatively high speed in order to function as a versa lighter), relatively small amplitude and high frequency vibrations are generated from the decorative member 450. Since the input is made to the front base 410, it is particularly effective to employ a viscoelastic body.

  Further, when the decorative member 450 and the regulating unit 490 (the roller 492a) come into contact with each other, the product accuracy and the assembly error of the vertical displacement unit 400 can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the roller 492a. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the precision in molding the part, and the manufacturing cost of the part can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the product can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the collision sound when the decorative member 450 and the regulating unit 490 (the roller 492a) come into contact can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the roller 492a, it is possible to prevent the player from hearing the sound when the decorative member 450 is displaced. It is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being spoiled. Further, since the direction of the rotation axis of the roller 492a is orthogonal to the direction of displacement of the decorative member 450, the roller 492a can be rotated with the displacement of the decorative member 450, and the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a contact each other. When the members are in contact with each other and displaced, it is possible to suppress the sound of rubbing between the members. In other words, when the projection is brought into contact with the displacement member to assist the stop of the displacement member and to prevent rattling, when the displacement member is displaced in the contact state with the projection, the members rub against each other. A sound is generated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are brought into contact with each other, the roller 492a can be rotated along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450. Of the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a can be suppressed.

  Further, since the regulation of the decoration member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be performed by the regulation unit 490 of the side wall member 470 fastened and fixed to the front base 410, the regulation unit 490 which is relatively heavy is disposed on the decoration member 450. Since there is no need, it is possible to reduce the weight of the decorative member 450 and suppress the driving force required for the displacement of the decorative member 450, and to suppress the rattling of the decorative member 450 with the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500. In this case, the weight of the decorative member 450 serving as a vibration source can be reduced, so that rattling can be easily suppressed.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 23 and 24, a description will be given of a contact state between the decoration member 450 and the regulating unit 490 when the decoration member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position.

  As shown in FIGS. 23A and 24A, when the decorative member 450 is located above the regulating unit 490, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a contacts the decorative member 450 and the case member 491. It is arranged without touching.

  The decorative member 450 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 24 (a), and the lower end surface of the decorative member 450 is a case as shown in FIGS. 23 (b) and 24 (b). When the member 491 is displaced to the substantially vertical position substantially the same as the vertical intermediate position, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492 a disposed above the regulating unit 490 and the front surface of the decorative member 450 abut. State. Thereby, it can suppress that the decorative member 450 rattles back and forth and right and left.

  That is, the roller 492a disposed on the upper side is pushed out by the decoration member 450, rotates while being displaced in the radial direction, and comes into contact with the decoration member 450 in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 24B). Therefore, the rattling of the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction is suppressed. Further, since the roller 492a can rotate in one direction around the axis of the shaft portion 492b and cannot rotate in the direction in which the decoration member 450 moves left and right, it is possible to prevent the decoration member 450 from rattling in the left and right direction. be able to.

  On the other hand, since the roller 492a is rotatable around the axis of the shaft portion 492b, even when the roller 492a and the rotating unit 500 are in contact with each other, the decorative member 450 is displaced vertically in the first position. Can be done.

  Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 452g is formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position, the inclined surface 452g is used. Roller 492a can be guided to the front side of the contact surface 452h. Thereby, the driving force required when arranging the decorative member 450 at the first position can be suppressed.

  When the decorative member 450 is displaced further downward and is positioned at the first position from the state shown in FIGS. 23B and 24B, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two rollers 492a provided in the regulating unit 490 And the front surface of the decorative member 450 can be brought into contact.

  Here, if the play of the decoration member 450 that is displaced up and down is suppressed by the rotating body (the roller 492a) that rotates along the displacement direction of the decoration member 450, the rotating body (the roller 492a) is It is difficult to restrict the decoration member 450 from moving along the direction of displacement, and to prevent the decoration member 450 from being displaced against vertical play.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the rotation direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the shorter side on which the drive side slide hole 431 is formed) is the same as the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. Since the direction substantially coincides with the direction of the straight line connecting the symbols, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical direction at the first position. That is, in the present embodiment, the regulating unit 490 can allow only the vertical displacement for displacing the decoration member 450 to the first position, and in the second position, the transmission gear 443 and the displacement member 430 are disengaged from each other. By forming the dead point, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical direction. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be regulated, the play of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

  The rollers 492a disposed below the rollers 492a arranged vertically are in contact with not only the decorative member 450 but also the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491.

  That is, when the roller 492a disposed on the lower side is in contact with the decorative member 450, the rubber component of the roller 492a is pushed out to the front side (the right side in FIG. 24C) (is elastically deformed). Thus, the outer peripheral surface on the front side is brought into contact with the side surface of the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, and the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. be able to. Accordingly, the resistance when the roller 492a rotates around the shaft portion 492b can be increased, and the roller 492a can be hardly rotated. Therefore, resistance when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction can be increased. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be regulated, the play of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

  Here, as a mode of sandwiching the roller 492a between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the shaft 492b of the roller 492a is moved in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 24C). In this case, the roller 492a may be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, but in this case, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a may have a diameter of 492b. A structure that enables displacement in the direction is required.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body, and by utilizing the elastic deformation, the roller 492a is moved between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. The shaft 492b of the roller 492a does not need to be formed so as to be displaceable in the radial direction, and the shaft 492b can be formed as a shaft fixed to the front base 410. Thereby, the structure can be simplified, and the durability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the roller 492a is elastically displaced and is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 of the decorative member 450 accompanying the displacement of the rotary unit 500 is displaced. When the roller 492a is sandwiched between the decoration member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 due to backlash, the elastic recovery force of the roller 492a is used to apply the roller 492a to the decoration member 450 and the case member 491. The swelling portion 491c can more easily hold the roller 492a more firmly. This makes it difficult for the roller 492a to rotate, thereby suppressing the relative rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410. Therefore, the decorative member 450 rattles with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotation unit 500. Can be suppressed.

  Further, as the decoration member 450 is displaced from the upper position to the lower end position, the displacement resistance can be increased. Therefore, when the decoration member 450 is stopped at the first position, other components are damaged by the stopping operation. Can be suppressed.

  That is, in the present embodiment, since the rotation unit is provided at the central portion of the decoration member 450, when being displaced in the direction of gravity and stopped, the kinetic energy at the time of displacement is added to the weight of the decoration member 450 for each component. Because it works, the parts are easily damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when being displaced to the first position, the stop operation can be assisted, so that the stop operation in the direction that is more easily damaged can be assisted. As a result, breakage of components can be effectively suppressed, and the reliability of products can be improved.

  Furthermore, since two rollers 492a are vertically arranged along the direction of displacement of the decorative member 450, the contact surfaces 452h of the decorative member 450 abut at two places with a predetermined interval. Therefore, the inclination of the decorative member 450 can be suppressed, and the rattling of the rotating unit 500 with respect to the upper surface base 510 can be suppressed. As a result, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotary unit 500 can be effectively suppressed.

  The rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 described later is set to be substantially the same as the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (that is, the surface with which the roller 492a contacts). That is, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is disposed in parallel with the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the roller 492a. Thereby, while suppressing the driving force required when disposing the decoration member 450 at the first position and displacing the decoration member 450 from the first position to the second position, the front base of the decoration member 450 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 is suppressed. The rattling with respect to 410 can be effectively suppressed.

  More specifically, since the displacement mode of the rotation unit 500 is rotation, the decoration member 450 rotates due to the precession motion of the rotation unit 500 (the motion in which the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500 swings like a circle). The unit 500 is vibrated in a mode (mode) in which the plane of rotation of the unit 500 is tilted. Therefore, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is substantially parallel to the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, so that the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (that is, the roller 492a is (A surface to be contacted) can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a from a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the roller 492a. As a result, when the decoration member 450 is arranged at the first position and when the decoration member 450 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the driving force required for the displacement of the decoration member 450 is suppressed by rotating the roller 492a. While the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a, the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement (rotation) of the rotating unit 500 can be effectively suppressed. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25 to FIG. 36, the rotating unit 500 provided on the decorative member 450 will be described.

  First, the overall configuration of the decorative member 450 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the decorative member 450, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the decorative member 450.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the decorative member 450 includes gears 454 to 456 disposed between the front base 452 and the rear base 453 and a drive motor mounted on the rear side of the rear base 453. 457 and a signal transmission mechanism 458 attached to the rear side of the front base 452.

  The front base 452 has a concave portion 452c formed on the rear side at the center thereof. The recess 452c is annularly recessed in a front view, and has an insertion hole 452f formed in the shaft portion in the front-rear direction and openings 452d, 452e opened in the left-right direction on both side surfaces in the left-right direction. You.

  The rear base 453 is formed from a plate-like body having a rectangular shape in front view that is smaller than the front view of the front base 452, and has an opening 453b that opens in the center in the front-rear direction, and a circular shape on the right side in front view in the front-rear direction. It is mainly provided with an insertion hole 453a that opens, and shaft support portions 453c and 453d that project in a cylindrical shape on the front side.

  The insertion hole 453a is an opening through which a shaft portion of the drive motor 457 described later is inserted. The insertion hole 453a is opened at a position facing the shaft portion of the drive motor 457, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion of the drive motor 457. The opening is circular. The opening 453b is an opening through which a signal transmission mechanism 458 to be described later is inserted, and is formed in an inner hole shape larger than the shape of the signal transmission mechanism 458 in a front view.

  The shaft support portions 453c and 453d are shaft portions that are inserted into shaft portions of gears 455 and 456, which will be described later, and have a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of each gear 455 and 456.

  The drive motor 457 is a motor in which a position detection encoder is incorporated, and can detect a rotation angle and a rotation speed of the motor. The drive motor 457 is attached to the back surface of the back base 453 as described above, the shaft of the drive motor 457 is inserted into the insertion hole 453a of the back base 453, and screws and bolts from the front side of the back base 453. And fixed.

  The gear 454 is meshed with the gear 455 and is fixed to the shaft of the drive motor 457 inserted through the insertion hole 453a of the rear base 453. The gear 454 is formed to have a smaller thickness in the front-rear direction than the space between the rear base 453 and the front base 452, and when the rear base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are formed. Can rotate without abutting against the side surface. When a rotational driving force is applied from the driving motor 457, the gear 454 is rotated, and the rotational driving force can be transmitted to the gear 455 meshed with the gear 454.

  The gear 455 meshes with a rear base 571 (see FIG. 26) of the rotating unit 500, which will be described later, and rotates around the shaft support 453c through a shaft support 453c whose shaft hole projects forward of the rear base 453. Arranged as possible. The gear 455 is formed to have a smaller thickness in the front-rear direction than the space between the rear base 453 and the front base 452. When the rear base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are formed. Can rotate without abutting against the side surface. When a rotational driving force is applied from the driving motor 457, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the gear 454 to the gear 455, and the rear base 571 is rotated. As a result, the rotation unit 500 is rotated.

  Note that a part of the gear 455 is inserted through the first opening 452 d of the front base 452 and is meshed with the rear base 571 of the rotating unit 500 disposed in front of the front base 452.

  A gear 456 is meshed with the rear base 571 of the rotation unit 500. The gear 456 is a member having a protrusion for detecting an initial position (reference position) protruding from a side surface (axial end surface) of the gear 456. It is arranged on the base 453. A part of the gear 456 is inserted into the second opening 452e and meshes with the rear base 571. Further, the gear 456 is formed to have a smaller thickness in the front-rear direction than the space between the rear base 453 and the front base 452. When the rear base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are formed. Can rotate without abutting against the side surface. When a rotational driving force is applied from the driving motor 457 and the gear 454, the gear 455, and the rotation unit 500 (the rear base 571) are rotated, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the rear base 571 and the gear 456 is rotated. . As a result, the initial position of the rotation unit 500 can be detected.

  In this case, the number of gear teeth carved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear 456 and the number of gear teeth of the gear 571a1 carved on the outer peripheral surface of the rear base 571 of the rotation unit 500 are set to be the same. Thus, the gear 456 can be rotated once per rotation of the rotation unit 500. Thus, initial position detection (reference position) can be easily performed.

  The signal transmission mechanism 458 is a slip ring that transmits electric power and a signal to the irradiation unit 530 of the rotating rotary unit 500, and is configured to rotate a shaft 458a protruding from the front. The shaft portion 458a is formed in a substantially D-shaped cross section, has a passage opened therein, and an electric wiring is inserted into the passage.

  When the signal transmission mechanism 458 is attached to the rear side of the front base 452 by inserting the opening 453b of the rear base 453, the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is inserted through the shaft 458a. At the same time, it is in a state of protruding from the front of the front base 452.

  Next, the overall configuration of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 500. FIG. 29A is a top view of the rotating unit 500, FIG. 29B is a front view of the rotating unit 500 as viewed in the XXIXb direction of FIG. 29A, and FIG. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 500 taken along line XXIXc-XXIXc of FIG. The description of the rotating unit 500 is based on the state at the initial position (reference position).

  As shown in FIGS. 27 to 29, the rotation unit 500 includes an upper surface base 510 forming an upper side surface, a lower surface base 520 forming a lower side surface, and an irradiation unit 530 disposed below the upper surface base 510. An intermediate member 540 disposed below the irradiation unit 530; a reflector 560 disposed below the intermediate member 540; a front cover 550 disposed in front of the reflector 560; A rotation transmission unit 570 disposed on the back side of the base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is mainly formed.

  The rotation transmitting unit 570 is a unit for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 457 to the upper base 510 and the lower base 520, and includes a rear base 571 disposed on the rear side and a front base 572 disposed on the front side. And a bearing BR interposed between the front base 572 and the rear base 571, and a fastening member 573 disposed inside the bearing BR.

  The rear base 571 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a bulging portion 571a that swells in an annular shape when viewed from the rear side from the inner peripheral edge to the back side. A gear 571a1 is engraved on the outer side surface of the bulging portion 571a. The gear 571a1 is meshed with the gear 455 as described above. Thus, by applying a driving force to the driving motor 457, the driving force for rotation is transmitted through the gears 454 and 455, and the rear base 571 (gear 571a1) is transmitted, and the rotating unit 500 is rotated.

  The front base 572 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer erected portion 572a erected from the outer peripheral edge and an inner erected portion 572b erected from the inner circular portion in a U-shape as viewed from the front. And.

  The outer standing portion 572a is a wall for forming a gap between the front surface of the rear base 571 and the rear surface of the front base 572, and sandwiching the bearing BR and the fastening member 573 between the opposing surfaces. The height is set to be approximately the same as the width dimension of the BR in the axial direction, and is set to be the same as the outer diameter of the bearing BR.

  Further, the side surface of the outer standing portion 572a on the standing front end side is in contact with the front surface of the rear base 571, and a screw inserted from the rear side of the rear base 571 is fastened and fixed. As a result, the rear base 571 and the front base 572 are fastened and fixed.

  The inner standing portion 572b is a member that suppresses twisting of the wiring connecting the inside of the rotary unit 500 and the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is rotated. The signal transmission mechanism 458 is formed so as to have a substantially U-shape, and the inner shape is substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when viewed from the front.

  Therefore, when arranging the rotation unit 500 on the front base 452, the inner erected portion 572b can be externally fitted to the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458. Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, the flat portions of the inner standing portion 572b and the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 mesh with each other, and the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be rotated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring connecting the rotation unit 500 and the signal transmission mechanism 458 from being twisted.

  The bearing BR is a member that suppresses transmission of the rotation to the front base 452 when the rotation unit 500 is rotated with respect to the front base 452, and is an annular metal member having different inner and outer diameters. Are formed, and a spherical or cylindrical metal body is fitted between the two members.

  The outer diameter of the bearing BR is set substantially equal to the inner diameter of the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572. Thus, the bearing BR can be fixedly disposed on the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572. In this case, the inner diameter of the back base 571 is set smaller than the outer diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, when the bearing BR is sandwiched between the front base 572 and the rear base 571, the bearing BR is prevented from coming off the rotation transmitting unit 570.

  The fastening member 573 is a member for fastening the rotating unit 500 to the front base 452. The fastening member 573 is formed in an annular shape in a front view, and includes a protruding wall portion 573a protruding from the outer peripheral surface on the front side.

  The outer diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed substantially the same as the inner diameter of the bearing BR. On the other hand, the inner diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed larger than the outer shape of the inner standing portion 572b of the front base 572. As a result, the outer periphery of the fastening member 573 is fitted inside the inner periphery of the bearing BR, and the fastening member 573 is disposed on the rotation transmission unit 570 in such a manner that the inner upright portion 572b of the front base is inserted through the inner periphery. .

  The protruding wall portion 573a is a protruding portion for preventing the fastening member 573 from being detached from the assembled rotation transmitting unit 570, and is formed to protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the fastening member 573 over the entire circumference with a fixed protruding dimension. The outer diameter is set larger than the inner diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, by fastening the fastening member 573 to the bearing BR from the front side of the bearing BR, the removal of the fastening member 573 from the assembled rotation transmitting unit 570 can be suppressed.

  More specifically, by moving the fastening member 573 into the bearing BR from the front of the bearing BR, the movement of the fastening member 573 backward with respect to the bearing BR can be restricted. On the other hand, the movement of the fastening member 573 to the front side is performed by disposing the bearing BR between the front base 572 and the back base 571 so that the front side surface of the fastening member 573 and the back side of the front base 572 are located. And is regulated by being brought into contact with the side of the vehicle. As a result, detachment of the fastening member 573 from the assembled rotation transmitting unit 570 can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the fastening member 573 having the bearing BR externally fitted thereto is fastened to the front base 452, it is possible to suppress transmission of the rotation motion when the rotation unit 500 is rotated to the front base 452.

  That is, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, only the ring-shaped metal body disposed outside the bearing BR is rotated, and the rotation is performed on the ring-shaped metal body disposed inside. By not transmitting, the rotation of the fastening member 573 can be suppressed. As a result, the rotation unit 500 can be rotated with respect to the decoration member 450.

  The upper surface base 510 is formed in an arc shape that curves backward (upward in FIG. 29A) when viewed from above, and has a front edge curved downward (backward in FIG. 29A). It is formed into a curved shape. The upper surface base 510 includes a decorative portion 511 that bulges in a semicircular shape when viewed from the front at the center in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 29B), , And a pressing portion 513 protruding in a cylindrical shape on the lower side.

  The decorative portion 511 is a portion that is fastened to the upper side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 described above, and has a fastening hole that is fastened to the front base 572 on the back side, as well as a front view. The radius of the semicircular shape is formed larger than the radius of the outer diameter of the front base 572. Thereby, it is fastened to the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and the upper side of the front base 572 can be made invisible when viewed from the front.

  The blow hole 512 is a through hole that penetrates in the up-down direction (vertical direction in FIG. 29 (c)), and is formed in a long hole shape that is long opened in the front-back direction (vertical direction in FIG. 29 (a)). Further, a plurality of ventilation holes 512 are formed in the left-right direction along the arc shape of the upper surface base 510.

  When the upper surface base 510 is combined with the lower surface base 520, the pressing portion 513 forms a gap between the irradiation unit 530 sandwiched between the upper surface base 510 and the upper surface base 510, and regulates movement of the irradiation unit 530. The height of the protrusion is set to the height up to the side surface on the upper surface side of the irradiation unit 530 (see FIG. 29C). Further, a plurality of pressing portions 513 are formed so as to protrude from an edge on the back side of the upper surface base 510.

  The lower surface base 520 is formed in substantially the same shape as the upper surface base 510, and is arranged symmetrically with the upper surface base 510 about the axis of the rotation transmission unit 570. Note that the decorative portion 521 and the air holes 522 formed on the lower surface base have the same shape as the decorative portion 511 and the air holes 512 formed on the upper surface base 510, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520 is a portion that is fastened to the lower side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and is fastened to the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, so that the front base The lower side of 572 can be made invisible. Therefore, by matching the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, it is possible to prevent the player from visually observing the mechanism when rotating the rotating unit 500, thereby preventing the interest of the player from being spoiled.

  The irradiation unit 530 is formed mainly including a base member 531 and an LED 532 disposed on the lower surface side of the base member 531.

  The base member 531 is formed of a plate-like body having an outer shape in a top view slightly smaller than the upper surface base 510 in a top view. Thereby, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are disposed in combination in the vertical direction, the base member 531 can be made invisible in the vertical direction.

  The base member 531 has a through-hole 531a that penetrates in a vertical direction at an edge on the front side. The through-hole 531a is a member that suppresses the displacement of the base member 531 and will be described in detail later. The wiring of the shaft portion 458b of the signal transmission mechanism 458 described above is connected to the base member 531. Accordingly, light can be emitted from an LED 532 described later via an IC or a capacitor incorporated in the base member 531.

  The LED 532 is formed as a surface-mounted LED, has a rectangular outer shape (outer shape of a cavity molded from a resin ceramic) in a front view, and has an irradiation surface for irradiating light (epoxy or silicon encapsulated in the cavity). Is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front. Further, the LEDs 532 are arranged on the lower surface side of the base member 531, and a plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged in the left-right direction along the arc shape of the base member 531 when viewed from above. Thereby, the LED 532 can irradiate light to a reflecting plate 560 described later.

  The intermediate member 540 is formed from a plate-like body whose outer shape in a top view is substantially the same as the shape of the upper surface base 510 in a top view. Thus, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are arranged in a vertically combined manner, the intermediate member 540 can be arranged between the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520.

  The front cover 550 is formed of a transparent light-transmitting material, and is formed in an arc shape in a top view. The front cover 550 is disposed on the intermediate member 540 side.

  The reflection plate 560 has a silver decoration (plating) on its outer surface, and is formed of a plate-like body whose outer shape in top view is substantially the same as the shape of the top base 510 in top view. In addition, the reflector 560 includes a concave notch 564 in which a front side surface is cut rearward.

  The concave notch 564 is arranged such that the front surface of the front cover 550 is substantially at the same position as the front surfaces of the upper base 510, the lower base 520, and the intermediate member 540 by inserting the front cover 550 into the cutout portion. Can be set up. That is, the width dimension of the front cover 550 in the front-rear direction is set to the distance dimension from the front surface of the concave portion 564 of the reflection plate 560 to the front surfaces of the upper base 510, the lower base 520, and the intermediate member 540. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the front cover 550 from being disposed so as to protrude from the rotation unit 500. As a result, the rotating unit 500 can be assembled as an integrated unit with less unevenness, and when the rotating unit 500 is visually recognized, it is difficult to understand the external shape of each component, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being spoiled. .

  Next, the intermediate member 540 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 30A is a top view of the intermediate member 540, and FIG. 30B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 540 taken along line XXXb-XXXb in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b), the intermediate member 540 has a first outer edge portion that stands upward from the outer edge portion (in a direction in which the upper surface base 510 is disposed) when viewed from above. 541 and a second outer edge portion 542, an irradiation hole 543 formed to penetrate in the vertical direction, an irradiation regulating portion 544 protruding from the periphery of the irradiation hole 543, and a protruding portion protruding from the front edge. It is mainly provided with a portion 545 and a groove 546 recessed in the outer peripheral edge of the irradiation regulating portion 544.

  The first outer edge 541 is formed at the outer edge of the intermediate member 540 on the front side. The inner diameter of the curved shape of the first outer edge 541 on the front side (the lower side in FIG. 30A) when viewed from above is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the curved shape on the front side of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 when viewed from above. Set identically. In addition, the vertical dimension of the first outer edge portion 541 is set to be larger than the thickness dimension (vertical dimension) of the base member 531. Therefore, when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the irradiation unit 530 can be shielded by the first outer edge portion 541 so that the irradiation unit 530 cannot be seen from the front side.

  The second outer edge 542 is formed on the outer edge on the back side of the intermediate member 540. The shape of the second outer edge portion 542 on the back side (the upper side in FIG. 30A) when viewed from above is substantially the same as the shape on the back side of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 when viewed from above. The standing dimension of the second outer edge 542 is set lower than that of the first outer edge 541. Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is assembled, the lower side surface of the irradiation unit 530 is disposed in a state of being in contact with the standing front end surface of the second outer edge portion 542. Therefore, the introduced outside air can be smoothly discharged to the back.

  The irradiation hole 543 is a hole for individually dividing light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 532 provided in the irradiation unit 530, and is opened at a position facing the LED 532 provided in the irradiation unit 530. . Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the light of the adjacent LED 532 from irradiating another range. The inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, and their axes are coaxially arranged. Thus, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently made incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the reflecting plate 560 described later via the irradiation hole 543.

  The irradiation hole 543 has a larger inner diameter from the upper surface side (the LED 532 side) toward the lower surface side. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently made incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the reflecting plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543.

  The irradiation restricting portion 544 protrudes around the irradiation hole 543 described above. Accordingly, the gap between the LED 532 and the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 can be reduced, so that the light of the LED 532 can be easily incident on the irradiation hole 543, and can be prevented from leaking out of the irradiation hole 543. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

  In addition, the projecting dimension of the irradiation regulating unit 544 is set to be substantially the same as the standing dimension of the second outer edge 542, and when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the projecting distal end surface of the irradiation regulating unit 544 and the irradiation unit 530 are formed. The LED 532 is brought into contact. This can suppress the light of the adjacent LED from being incident on the irradiation hole 543, so that the outer diameter of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified. Further, since the inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, the area of the irradiation control section 544 in contact with the LED 532 can be secured. Leakage to the outside of the irradiation hole 543 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

  Furthermore, since the irradiation regulating portions 544 are connected to the adjacent irradiation regulating portions 544 and the outer peripheral surfaces thereof, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be increased. In this case, the irradiation regulating portion 544 has a circular outer peripheral surface, and the adjacent irradiation regulating portions 544 are connected to each other. That is, since the group in which the plurality of irradiation restricting portions 544 are connected to each other is formed in an irregular shape (a shape in which a plurality of outwardly projecting circular arcs are continuous), a space (surface area) is secured, and the heat radiation effect is enhanced. In addition, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be increased by using the unevenness of the outer shape.

  The protruding portion 545 is a protrusion that restricts the irradiation unit 530 from moving forward, backward, left, and right, and is formed at a position that is inserted into the through hole 531a of the base member 531 when the rotating unit 500 is assembled. Further, the protruding portion 545 is formed in a shape in which columns having different outer diameters are vertically combined, and has a large-diameter portion 545a on the base side and a small-diameter portion 545b on the distal end which is smaller in diameter than the large-diameter portion 545a. Formed from

  The large diameter portion 545a is a projection for forming a predetermined gap between the intermediate member 540 and the base member 531 when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540. The outer diameter is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the hole 531a, and the protrusion dimension is set to be substantially the same as the standing dimension of the second outer edge 542.

  Thus, when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540, the facing distance between the front intermediate member 540 and the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined. On the other hand, the facing distance between the back side intermediate member 540 and the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined by the second outer edge 542. In addition, since the projecting distance of the large diameter portion 545a and the standing distance of the second outer edge portion 542 are set to be substantially the same, the vertical side surface of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is set to the vertical side surface of the intermediate member 540. They can be arranged in parallel to each other.

  The small diameter portion 545b is a projection for positioning the irradiation unit 530 with respect to the intermediate member 540 when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540, and is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the through hole 531a of the base member 531. Set to the same or a slightly smaller outer diameter. Therefore, when disposing the irradiation unit 530 on the intermediate member 540, the through-hole 531 a of the base member 531 is externally fitted to the small-diameter portion 545 b of the intermediate member 540, so that the irradiation unit 530 with respect to the intermediate member 540 is moved in the front-rear and left-right directions. Can be specified.

  The groove portion 546 is a groove that extends along the base of the irradiation control portion 544 and that is concavely formed in a U-shaped cross section. The concave portion of the groove 546 increases the area where the side surface of the intermediate member 540 contacts the outside air, so that the heat radiation of the intermediate member 540 is improved. In addition, the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced while securing the rigidity of the intermediate member 540. That is, by forming the groove-shaped groove portion 546 extending along the base of the irradiation regulating portion 544, the area recessed in the intermediate member 540 is minimized, and the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 is secured. By the operation of the LED 532, a space can be expanded in a portion where generated heat is particularly concentrated, and a heat radiation effect can be enhanced.

  The groove width of the groove 546 is set to be smaller than the distance dimension from the outer peripheral edge of the irradiation regulating portion 544 to the irradiation hole 543, and the depth of the groove 546 is smaller than half the thickness of the intermediate member 540. Set smaller.

  Next, the front cover 550 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 31A is a front view of the front cover 550, and FIG. 31B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front cover 550 along the line XXXIB-XXXXIb in FIG. Note that, in FIG. 31B, the diffusion unit 551 is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the front cover 550 has a diffusion portion 551 on the inner side (upper side in FIG. 31B) on the lower side (left side in FIG. 31B). It is formed in preparation.

  The diffuser 551 is a part having a roughened surface, and can diffuse the light irradiated to the diffuser 551 by irregularly reflecting the light on the roughened surface. Note that the rough surface processing is a processing mode in which irregularities are formed on the surface.

  Next, the reflection plate 560 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 32A is a top view of the reflection plate 560, and FIG. 32B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the reflection plate 560 taken along the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. In FIG. 32B, the reflection unit 563 is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 32A and 32B, the reflection plate 560 is surrounded by a partition wall 561 erected on the upper surface side (the front side in FIG. 32A). It is mainly provided with a reflecting portion 563 formed on the upper surface of the region and an upright wall 562 erected along an edge on the back side.

  The partition wall 561 is erected in a U-shape with the front side (lower side in FIG. 32 (a)) open when viewed from above, and a plurality of partition walls 561 extend in the left-right direction along the front edge of the reflector 560. The pieces are formed side by side. In addition, adjacent standing walls 562 are combined with (also used as) the walls extending in the front direction to form one wall. Thereby, the space in which the partition walls 561 are juxtaposed can be reduced. As a result, the number of partition walls 561 formed can be maximized.

  The reflecting portion 563 is formed by roughening the upper surface of a region surrounded by the front edge of the reflecting plate 560 and the partition wall 561 by laser processing or the like when viewed from above. The reflecting portion 563 has a horizontal portion 563a formed from a side surface parallel to the upper surface and the lower surface of the reflecting plate 560, and the thickness of the reflecting plate 560 increases as the distance from the horizontal portion 563a increases due to the connection with the horizontal portion 563a. And an inclined surface 563b inclined in the direction.

  The horizontal portion 563a is formed on a side surface other than the front edge, of the side surfaces parallel to the upper surface and the lower surface of the reflection plate 560. That is, the horizontal portion 563a (reflection portion 563) is not formed on the front edge, and the rough surface is not processed. Thus, the reflection portion 563 can be formed while holding the front edge of the reflection plate 560. As a result, there is no need to separately form a holding portion for rough surface processing on the reflection plate 560, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  The inclined surface 563b is a portion mainly reflecting light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 disposed on the upper surface side toward the front side, and is inclined 45 degrees toward the front side with respect to the irradiation surface of the LED 532. Formed on the surface.

  The connecting position between the horizontal portion 563a and the inclined surface 563b is set to a position where the connecting straight line passes through the axis of the irradiation surface of the LED 532. Accordingly, of the light emitted from the LED 532, the light emitted toward the back side can be effectively reflected to the front side by the inclined surface 563b. On the other hand, of the light emitted from the LED 532, the light emitted to the front side can be reflected to the front side by the horizontal portion 563a.

  As described above, the standing wall 562 is erected along the rear edge of the reflection plate 560, and the erected height is set to the same height as the erected height of the partition wall 561. . Thus, when the rotation unit 500 is assembled (the intermediate member 540 is disposed above the reflection plate 560), a space can be formed between the upright wall 562 and the partition wall 561. That is, an air layer can be formed between the reflection plate 560 and the intermediate member 540. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat from being stored inside the reflection plate 560 and the intermediate member 540, and the rotation unit 500 stores heat, so that the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 provided in the rotation unit 500 has Damage can be suppressed.

  The rotating unit 500 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, the fastening member 573 is internally fitted to the inner circle portion of the bearing BR from the front side, and the inner circle portion of the fastening member 573 is externally fitted to the inner standing portion 572b of the front base 572. After integrating the front base 572, the bearing BR, and the fastening member 573, the rear base 571 is arranged on the back side, and the front base 572 and the back base 571 are fastened to assemble the rotation transmission unit 570 as a unit.

  A lower surface base 520 is disposed below the reflection plate 560 at a front portion of the rotation unit 500 (a portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570), and the lower surface base 520 and the reflection plate 560 are fastened. After the lower surface base 520 and the reflection plate 560 are fastened and fixed, the intermediate member 540 is overlaid on the upper surface side of the reflection plate 560 with the front cover 550 sandwiched on the front side. The irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 with the through-hole 531a fitted to the small-diameter portion 545b of the projecting portion 545 of the intermediate member 540. In this state, by arranging the upper surface base 510 from above and fastening the upper surface base 510 to the intermediate member 540, the front portion (the portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570) of the rotating unit 500 is assembled as a unit.

  Next, the rotation transmission unit 570 is arranged behind the front portion of the rotation unit 500, and the rotation unit 500 and the rotation transmission unit 570 are fastened to assemble the rotation unit 500 as one unit.

  Next, light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33A is a top view of the rotary unit 500, and FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional view of the rotary unit 500 taken along line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb in FIG. (A) and (b) of FIG. 34 are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the rotation unit 500 in the XXXIV section of (b) of FIG.

  Note that FIG. 33A illustrates a state in which the upper base 510 and the irradiation unit 530 have been removed from the rotating unit 500. In FIGS. 34A and 34B, light emitted from the LED 532 is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B, a reflecting portion 563 that is surrounded by a partition wall 561 and partitioned as one region is disposed below the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540. . As described above, since the LEDs 532 are arranged above the irradiation holes 543, light emitted from the LEDs 532 can be applied to the reflection units 563 at different positions. That is, since the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted in a state where it is partitioned by each reflecting portion 563, the division of the light of each LED 532 can be made clear. As a result, the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted only from the corresponding reflecting portion 563, and the outline of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  In addition, since a structure for allowing the light of the LED 532 to enter the reflecting portion 563 of the corresponding reflecting plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540 is formed from the reflecting plate 560 and the intermediate member 540, such a structure is used. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the body is formed of one member. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product cost.

  As shown in FIG. 34A, the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting plate 560 is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b, and the front side (see FIG. 34A). Side), is transmitted through the front cover 550, and is emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine. That is, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be emitted to the front (front side) of the rotating unit 500. Therefore, even when the posture of the base member 531 is such that the surface on which the LED 532 is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotating unit 500, the light (flashing) of the LED 532 is visually recognized by the player, and the afterimage is displayed by the afterimage effect. be able to.

  Further, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently emitted to the player side by the inclined surface 563b of the reflection plate 560. Therefore, stronger light can be emitted to the front side of the rotating unit 500. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect.

  In the light emitted from the LED 532 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting portion 563, there is light that is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b and reflected by the surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560 facing each other. . The light reflected on the facing surface of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560 is again reflected by the surface (the facing surface of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560) and is irradiated on the front cover 550.

  In this case, as described above, since the intermediate member 540 is formed of white having a lower light absorption than black, light reflected by the intermediate member 540 can be easily reflected again. On the other hand, as described above, the reflection plate 560 has a silver decoration on its outer surface, and can easily reflect light reflected by the reflection plate 560 again.

  Therefore, the light radiated from the LED 532 to the reflecting portion 563 can be emitted from the front side (to the player side) of the rotating unit 500 in a state of being irregularly reflected by the rough surface and uniformly dispersed. That is, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the opening of the reflecting portion 563 from being visually recognized in a state where the light is deflected to a part of the opening.

  As shown in FIG. 34B, the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the horizontal portion 563a of the reflection plate 560 is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a, and the front side (FIG. 34B). Side). Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be emitted through the front cover 550 to the front side.

  Since the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a is not formed at the front end of the reflection plate 560, light can be easily emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotating unit 500. In addition, the intensity of light for displaying an afterimage due to the afterimage effect can be increased. That is, when roughening is performed on an end portion of the inner surface of the reflecting plate 560 on the front side of the rotating unit 500, light is irregularly reflected on the roughened surface, and the front side of the rotating unit 500 (the player side). ) Is reduced, the front end of the reflector 560 is not formed, and at least a smooth surface that is flatter than a rough surface processed into the reflector 563 is irregularly reflected. , And the amount of light traveling toward the front side (player side) of the rotating unit 500 can be increased.

  Further, the partition wall 561 has a front side (a concave notch 564) formed at an end portion on the front side of the horizontal portion 563a (a portion where the rough surface processing of the reflection portion 563 is not formed (smooth surface)). Side), the portion of the horizontal portion 563a where the rough surface processing is not performed has a cross-sectional area of the inner surface toward the front end of the rotary unit 500. Increased (expanded). Therefore, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotation unit 500 can have a spread. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be larger than the area of the light emitting surface of the LED 532. Therefore, the size of the LED 532 can be reduced.

  Further, the front side of the reflector 560 (rotating unit 500) is formed so as to be curved toward the rear side toward the end with the center in the left-right direction (the rotation axis) as the center, so that the front side (concave) of the reflector 560 is formed. As the end on the side where the notch 564 is formed) is radially separated from the rotation axis of the rotary unit 500, the front side (the concave notch 564) is formed in each area partitioned by the partition wall 561. The length of the end of the side) is increased. Thereby, the perceived brightness (brightness of light) of each of the plurality of reflecting portions 563 can be made uniform.

  That is, in the rotating unit 500, the displacement speed (peripheral speed) becomes higher radially outward from the rotating shaft (the center of rotation). Therefore, when the LEDs 532 arranged in a row emit light with the same brightness, the rotating shaft The light of the LED 532 that is closer to the LED looks higher (brighter) than the light of the LED 532 that is farther (radially outward) from the rotation axis.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the end on the front side of the reflection plate 560 is more distant from the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500 in the radial direction, the front side (concave notch) in each region partitioned by the partition wall 561. Since the length of the end portion (on the side where the portion 564 is formed) is increased, the more the reflecting portion 563 (LED 532) is separated radially outward from the rotation axis of the rotating unit 500, the more the diffuse reflection by the rough surface is strengthened. (That is, by reducing the proportion of light visually recognized by the player from the LED 532), the light can be visually recognized as high-brightness light. As a result, it is possible to suppress a difference in brightness as viewed at the radially arranged position and to make the brightness (brightness of light) uniform.

  In addition, the length of the horizontal portion 563a of the reflector 560 in the direction parallel to the axial direction of the rotating unit 500 increases as the distance from the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500 increases in the radial direction. The perceived lightness (brightness of light) can be made uniform.

  The light applied to the front cover 550 can diffuse the traveling direction of the light by the diffusion portion 551 formed on the inner peripheral surface of the front cover 550. That is, due to the rough surface of the diffusion portion 551 of the front cover 550, the traveling direction of the light applied to the diffusion portion 551 can be bent in a plurality of different directions. As a result, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotating unit 500 can have a wider range. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be larger than the area of the light emitting surface of the LED 532. Therefore, the size of the LED 532 can be reduced.

  Here, if the light of the LED 532 is made to be visually recognized by the player directly (without passing through the member of the light transmitting material), the light of the LED 532 has a high directivity to the front, so that the player is dazzling. There was a fear to feel.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the surface for irregularly reflecting the light emitted from the LED 532 is formed at two places, the reflection plate 560 and the front cover 550, the directivity of the light emitted from the LED 532 can be weakened. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the irradiated light and feeling dazzling.

  Here, it is known that a plurality of light-emitting units (LEDs 532) are provided, and the light-emitting units are turned on and off in accordance with the rotational position to perform display by an afterimage effect. However, in the conventional light emitting means, the posture of the base (base member 531) is such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is directed to the front side (player side)). (A posture parallel to the rotated plane), the outer shape in a front view (viewed in the rotation axis direction) becomes large. Therefore, there is a problem that the visibility of the back side of the rotating unit 500 is hindered in a state where the rotation of the rotating display device (the rotating unit 500) is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation unit 500 is configured such that the base member 531 on which the plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged is arranged such that the surface on which the LEDs 532 are mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500. Since it is arranged between 510 and lower surface base 520, the outer shapes of upper surface base 510 and lower surface base 520 when viewed from the front (in the direction of the rotation axis) can be suppressed. As a result, in the state where the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is stopped, the visibility on the back side of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 can be improved.

  Next, the rotation of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 35A and 35B are front views of the rotating unit 500. FIG. FIGS. 36A and 36B are top views of the rotation unit 500. FIG.

  In FIGS. 35A to 36B, the flow of air generated by the rotation unit 500 is shown by a two-dot chain line, and the sign of the air flow K is given. Further, the ventilation holes 512 and 522 of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are illustrated by broken lines.

  Further, in the present embodiment, only the description is given when the rotation unit 500 is rotated left when viewed from the front. When the rotation unit 500 is rotated right when viewed from the front, only the flow of the airflow K is reversed about the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), when the rotation unit 500 is rotated by the driving force of the above-described drive motor 457, the rotation causes external air to enter through the ventilation holes 512 and 522. An airflow K is generated inside the rotation unit 500.

  In this case, since the ventilation holes 512 and 522 are opened tangentially to the rotation direction of the rotation unit 500, the rotation unit 500 rotates through the ventilation holes 512 and 522 when the rotation unit 500 rotates. External air can easily enter the inside of the rotating unit 500.

  More specifically, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated leftward when viewed from the front, at the initial position, the ventilation holes 512 of the upper surface base 510 formed on the right side in the front view and the ventilation holes of the lower surface base 520 formed on the left side in the front view. 522 is displaced in a direction to take in (insert) air into the ventilation holes 512 and 522. As a result, when the rotating unit 500 rotates, air outside the rotating unit 500 can easily enter the inside of the rotating unit 500. Therefore, heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled.

  Since the air holes 512 of the upper surface base 510 and the air holes 522 of the lower surface base 520 are formed symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis, when the rotation unit 500 rotates rightward in a front view, the rotation at the initial position is performed. The air holes 512 of the upper surface base 510 formed on the left side of the unit 500 in front view and the air holes 522 of the lower surface base 520 formed on the right side of the front view make it easy to take in external air into the rotation unit 500. That is, even when the rotating unit 500 rotates rightward, the same operation and effect as those described above (when the rotating unit 500 rotates leftward in front view) are obtained.

  Here, if a base (base member 531) on which the LED (LED 532) is mounted is disposed inside the rotating body (rotating unit 500), and the rotating body is driven to rotate, the LED emits light. If the heat generated during the operation of the IC or the capacitor cannot be sufficiently cooled, the solder of the LED soldered to the base or the IC or capacitor for controlling the LED may melt, resulting in poor contact.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ventilation holes 512 and 522 are opened tangentially to the rotation direction of the rotation unit 500, so that the rotation of the rotation unit 500 takes in outside air into the rotation unit 500. be able to. Therefore, heat generated when the LED operates can be cooled.

  The air taken into the rotation unit 500 from the ventilation holes 512 and 522 mainly collides with the irradiation unit 530 or the reflection plate 560 and is dispersed. The airflow K distributed on the back side of the rotating unit 500 (the back side of the paper in FIG. 35A) is directed to the outside of the rotating unit 500 from the opening on the back side of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 (a gap between the opposite sides). It is blown and released into the atmosphere.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36A, the airflow K dispersed on the front side of the rotating unit 500 (on the near side in FIG. 35A) is radially displaced from the rotating shaft by the centrifugal force of rotation of the rotating unit 500. The air is blown to the outside, blown to the outside of the rotating unit 500, and released to the atmosphere (see FIG. 35A).

  That is, since the rotating unit 500 is formed in a container-like shape with the back side opened, the outside air taken in from the ventilation holes 512 and 522 is efficiently removed from the back side by the combination of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520. Thus, the heat can be cooled when the LED 532 operates. In addition, by exhausting air from the back side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 in this way, it is possible to suppress the exhaust from affecting the sphere flowing down the game area (or rolling the stage).

  In the present embodiment, the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 have a rectangular shape in a front view (that is, as viewed in the rotation axis direction) in which the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 have a long shape along the diametrical direction in the rotation plane of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. Since it is formed, the air inside the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is directed to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by utilizing the centrifugal force caused by the rotation of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. It can flow and can be exhausted from the back side. Therefore, with the flow of the air, outside air can be taken into the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 from the rear side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570.

  That is, in the vicinity of the rotation transmitting unit 570, the rotation speed is low, so that the efficiency of taking in the outside air from the ventilation holes 512 and 522 in the side wall is low (or cannot be taken in), but the circulation of air using the centrifugal force (the rotation transmitting unit 570) is performed. Outside air is taken in from the rear side in the vicinity, and the taken-in outside air is caused to flow to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by centrifugal force, and the flow of air exhausted from the rear side in the radially outward side) Can be formed. As a result, heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled. In particular, cooling of the LED 532 disposed near the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), when the air inside the rotary unit 500 is pushed radially outward by the rotation of the rotary unit 500, the internal pressure on the center side of the rotary unit 500 decreases. External air is taken in from a gap on the back side between the rotation transmission unit 570 and the upper base 510 and the lower base 520. As a result, the cooling of the LED 532 disposed near the rotation transmitting unit 570 can be more reliably achieved.

  In this case, the front wall forming the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge of the upper surface base 510 is downward (the back side of the paper in FIG. 29A)) (the lower edge of the lower surface base 520 is upward) The curved portion has a shape parallel to the rotation plane of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 (that is, the shape of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis is a rectangular parallelepiped). Since the angle of the portion where the air that has flowed to the longitudinal end portion (outward in the radial direction during rotation) due to centrifugal force changes direction toward the rear side becomes substantially a right angle, a vortex is easily formed at such portion. . Therefore, the flow of air is hindered, and it becomes difficult to smoothly exhaust air from the rear side.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge of the upper surface base 510 is downward (rear side of the paper surface in FIG. 29A)) (the front edge of the lower surface base 520 is upward). Is formed outwardly from the center in the left-right direction, so that the air flowing toward the longitudinal end (radially outward during rotation) due to centrifugal force is gradually reduced. In addition to being able to flow to the back side, the angle of the portion where the air flowing to the longitudinal end (outward in the radial direction) changes direction toward the back side can be made larger than substantially a right angle, Vortex formation can be suppressed, and the air flow can be smooth. Therefore, the exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, the cooling of the LED 532 disposed near the rotation transmission unit 570 can be more reliably achieved.

  Further, the distance between the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 facing each other on the rear side (the dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 35A) is such that the distance dimension on the rear side near the rotation transmitting unit 570 is closer to the longitudinal end. Since the distance dimension is made larger than the distance dimension on the back side, the air inside the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 flows toward the longitudinal end (radially outward during rotation) using the centrifugal force due to rotation. By exhausting air from the rear side on the radially outer side, when air is taken in from the rear side near the rotation transmitting unit 570, the air can be taken in efficiently.

  In addition, the open portion on the back side near the rotation transmitting unit 570 (the inner periphery of the decorative portion 511 of the upper surface base 510 and the decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520) is formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotation axis. In addition, it is possible to suppress the disturbance of the outside air on the rear side near the rotation transmission unit 570 (the formation of a flow in the rotation direction) due to the rotation of the lower surface base 520. As a result, outside air can be efficiently taken in from the rear side near the rotation transmission unit 570.

  Furthermore, since the outer peripheral surface of the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572 is formed in a shape narrowing from the back side to the front side, the rotating unit 500 can be used as the decorative portion 511 of the upper base 510 and the decorative portion of the lower base 520. Generation of a vortex in the airflow K when air is taken in from the gap between the rotation transmission unit 570 and the rotation transmission unit 570 can be suppressed. Therefore, the flow of the airflow K flowing in the central portion in the left-right direction of the rotating unit 500 can be made smooth, and when the outside air is taken in from the rear side near the rotation transmitting unit 570, the taking can be performed efficiently. .

  Next, the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 37 and FIG. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the center frame 600 includes a frame 610 formed in an annular shape in a front view, and a center cover 620 disposed to cover an inner peripheral portion of the frame 610. And a sensor 630 attached to the frame 610.

  The frame 610 includes a stage 611 protruding toward the center cover 620 (rear side) from a lower part of an inner peripheral edge in a front view, a wall 612 protruding radially outward from an outer peripheral side, and a rear side. It is formed mainly with a fastening hole 613 that is concavely formed in a circular shape toward the front side at an edge portion thereof, and an opening 614 that opens in front of the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 disposed on the back side. You.

  Further, the frame body 610 is a member that is disposed in the center of the game board 13 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and is made visible to the player via the glass 8. Patterns and pictures are drawn on the front side.

  The stage 611 is formed to bend from the inner edge on the lower side of the frame body 610 to the rear side, and has a first recessed part 611a on the front side on the upper surface thereof and a second recessed part on the rear side end. The setting portions 611b are respectively recessed.

  The stage 611 rolls the sphere on its upper surface and drops the sphere from the upper surface of the stage 611 using the inclination of either the first recessed portion 611a or the second recessed portion 612b. It is possible to form a state in which a ball can easily win in the winning opening 64. Therefore, since a plurality of flow paths of the ball flowing down the game area can be formed, it is possible to give the player interest.

  The first recessed portion 611a is a groove for dropping a ball rolling on the upper portion of the stage 611 to the front side of the game board 13 (the front side of the base plate 60), and has a concave depth toward the front side. Is formed deeply. The second recessed portion 611b is a groove for sending a ball to an opening formed in the center rear surface of the stage 611 in the left-right direction, and has a deeper depth toward the rear surface.

  The wall portion 612 is a portion that is positioned in the front-rear direction with respect to the base plate 60 when the assembled center frame 600 is disposed on the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2). The outer shape is formed larger than the inner shape of the opening formed through in the direction. Thereby, when the center frame 600 is inserted into the opening of the base plate 60 from the front side, the rear side surface of the wall portion 612 abuts on the front side surface of the base plate 60, and The center frame 600 can be positioned.

  The fastening holes 613 are holes that are recessed plurally on the back side of the frame body 610 and are formed at positions facing the through holes 623a of the center cover 620 described later. The opening 614 is an opening for irradiating the front side with sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 described later, and is formed at a position facing the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 to which the sensor light is emitted.

  The center cover 620 is formed of a resin material of a light-transmitting material, is formed in a substantially circular shape in a front view, and is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the frame body 610, and left and right edges of the cover member 621. And a mounting portion 623 that protrudes outward from the standing front end surface of the side wall portion 622 and the lower edge of the cover member 621. You.

  The cover member 621 is formed into a plate-like body having a constant thickness that curves rearward as it goes outward from the upper left-right center in a front view (the front side becomes a convex curved surface). An upper peripheral edge (hereinafter, referred to as a "first portion 621a") of a central portion in the left-right direction is formed at a position forward of peripheral edges at both left and right ends and a lower end (hereinafter, referred to as a "second portion").

  Since the cover member 621 is formed from a plate-like body having a constant thickness, it can be prevented from acting as a convex lens, and the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side can be ensured.

  Further, since the cover member 621 is formed from a plate-like body having a constant thickness, the cover member 621 and the third symbol display device 81 face each other by an amount corresponding to the central portion in the left-right direction being curved toward the front side when viewed from the front. A space can be formed between them. Thereby, the space where the decorative member 450 of the above-mentioned vertical displacement unit 400 is displaced and produced can be secured.

  The side wall portion 622 is a wall portion so that the center cover 620 can be attached to the frame body 610. Since the cover member 621 is curved to the back side as described above, the back side of the frame body 610 and the center cover Where the distance between the front of the center 620 and the front of the center cover 620 can be reduced (eliminated) by the side wall 622 where the distance between the front of the center 620 and the front of the center cover 620 can be reduced.

  That is, the vertical dimension of the side wall 622 on the front side is set to the distance between the back of the frame 610 and the front of the center cover 620 when the center cover 620 is provided on the frame 610. Accordingly, when the frame 610 and the center cover 620 are combined, it is possible to suppress the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 from being excessively protruded to the front side of the frame 610.

  The attachment portion 623 is a protrusion for attaching the center cover 620 to the frame body 610, and has a plurality of through holes 623a formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. As described above, the fastening hole 613 is formed in the back surface of the frame body 610 at a position facing the through hole 623a, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the through hole 623a and fastened to the fastening hole 613. Thus, the frame 610 and the center cover 620 are fastened and fixed.

  The sensor 630 is a motion sensor for detecting a motion of the player, and is a light emitting unit that emits light such as infrared light, and a light receiving unit that receives light reflected by the object when the light emitted from the light emitting unit is reflected by an object. And an irradiation surface 631 having:

  The sensor 630 is provided at a height of about ／ from the bottom when the frame 610 is divided into three equal parts in the vertical direction, and is provided on the right side of the frame 610. The sensor 630 is disposed with its irradiation surface 631 inclined to the center front side of the center frame 600. As a result, light emitted from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is emitted from the central portion on the front side of the game board 13 to the player side via the glass 8.

  Next, the sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 39A is a front view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 39B is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 40A is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 along the line XLa-XLa in FIG. 39A, and FIG. 40B is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 along the line XLb-XLb in FIG. FIG.

  In FIG. 39A and FIG. 40B, the irradiation area of the light of the sensor 630 irradiated in front of the center frame 600 is shown by a two-dot chain line, and is shown as irradiation areas R1 and R2. In FIG. 39B, the sensor 630 is illustrated by a broken line. Further, in FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (b), the sensor 630 and the light emitted from the sensor 630 are shown by two-dot chain lines, and are arranged in front of the center frame 600 (in front of the game board 13). The glass 8 to be produced is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the sensor 630 is disposed forward of the second portion 621b of the cover member 621. Accordingly, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine through (transmitted through) the cover member 621, and the light emitted from the sensor 630 is blocked by the cover member 621. Can be suppressed. In the sensor 630, the decorative portion of the frame 610 is arranged on the front side. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the sensor 630 from the player side (front side).

  The light emitted from the sensor 630 irradiates the glass 8 directly from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 and irradiates the region of the irradiation region R1 emitted from the front side of the glass 8 and the front of the cover member 621 of the center cover 620. The reflected light is reflected and emitted to the irradiation region R2 which is emitted from the front side of the glass 8.

  Here, in a gaming machine in which a motion sensor (sensor 630) is provided in a gaming machine to detect a motion of a player on the front side of a liquid crystal device (third symbol display device 81), the motion sensor is exposed. There was a problem of spoiling interest.

  Therefore, the sensor 630 is arranged on the back side of the decorative member (the frame 610). In this case, if the sensor 630 is retracted from the inner edge side (the opening 614 of the frame body 610) to the inner side (outside) of the decorative member, it is more difficult to visually recognize the sensor. And the detection range becomes narrower. On the other hand, if the sensor 630 is positioned close to the inner edge side of the decorative member (the opening of the frame 610), the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit can be easily turned to the front, so that the detection range can be widened in the front-rear direction. It becomes easier to see. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor 630.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a part of the light emitted from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 irradiates the cover member 621 of the center cover 620, so that the curved shape of the cover member 621 causes the front side ( (The player side). Thereby, the sensor 630 is retracted to the back of the opening 614 of the frame body 610, so that a range in which an object can be detected can be secured while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor 630. In addition, since the cover member 621 is made of a light transmissive material, visibility of a symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be secured.

  Further, since the front side of the cover member 621 has a convex curved surface, when light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected on the front side of the cover member 621, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) at a position close to the sensor 630. Can be made more acute, while at a position farther from Sen 630, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) can be made more obtuse, and the range in which an object can be detected can be increased accordingly.

  Furthermore, the light (light reflected by the cover member 621) applied to the irradiation region R2 is reflected toward the cover member 621 when the object is irradiated and reflected. In this case, the traveling direction of the reflected light is different depending on the surface shape of the object to be reflected, but the light reflected in a plurality of directions is reflected at the front of the cover member 621, so that the traveling direction of the light reflected in different directions is The direction may be the traveling direction toward the sensor 630. That is, by increasing the amount of light reflected on the sensor 630 side, the operation of detecting the light reception of the sensor 630 can be reliably performed.

  The first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is located on the front side of the wall 612 of the frame 610, and the second portion 621b is located on the back side of the wall 612 of the frame 610 (see FIG. b)). That is, the first portion 621a is disposed substantially at the same position as the rear surface of the base plate 60 or at a position on the front side of the rear surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2). It is arranged at a position on the back side of the vehicle.

  Accordingly, a distance between the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 and the third symbol display device 81 at the upper portion of the center frame 600 can be secured. As a result, the dimension in the front-rear direction when the decorative member 450 of the above-described vertical displacement unit 400 is vertically displaced can be secured, and the decorative member 450 can be displaced. In addition, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased in a limited space between the rear space where the decorative member 450 is displaced and the front space where the glass 8 is disposed.

  Further, since the first portion 621a is disposed at substantially the same position as the rear surface of the base plate 60 or at a position on the front side relative to the rear surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), the decorative member 450 ( The rotation unit 500) can be more reliably prevented from interfering with the first portion 621a, and the displacement member can be correspondingly increased in size.

  Further, since the second portion 621b is disposed at a position on the back side of the back surface of the base plate 60, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased, and the front side of the cover member 621 is used as a light reflection surface. Can be easier. That is, the sensor 630 is arranged on the back side so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the object, and it is possible to secure a range in which the object can be detected.

  In addition, since the first portion 621a is located above the cover member 621, in a store where the gaming machine 10 is installed, the illumination of the fluorescent light of the store is reflected by the cover member 621 and the front side (the player side). Irradiation can be suppressed.

  That is, if the upper portion of the cover member 621 is curved to the rear side, the light of the fluorescent lamp of the store, which is irradiated from obliquely above, is easily reflected to the front side. Since the normal direction is formed as a curved surface directed at least below the horizontal direction, light incident on the front surface of the cover member 621 can be reflected downward. That is, when light from a fluorescent lamp or another gaming machine installed on the ceiling in the store is incident on the front of the cover member 621, such light can be suppressed from being reflected toward the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the player feels dazzling and that the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 is deteriorated.

  Next, the relationship between the center frame 600 and the rotating unit 500 of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 41A and 41B are cross-sectional views of the rotating unit 500 and the center frame 600. FIG. FIG. 41A shows the initial position (reference position) of the rotating unit 500 (position in which the extending direction is horizontally oriented), and FIG. 41B shows that the rotating unit 500 is centered on its rotation axis. In the figure, a mode rotated by 90 degrees is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 is displaced, and the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) and the rear side of the center frame 600. , A predetermined gap is formed between the rotation unit 500 of the decorative member 450 and the cover member 621 of the center frame 600. Thus, the rotation unit 500 can rotate without colliding with the cover member 621.

  In this case, if the rotating member (rotating unit 500) is a role that rotates in front of the third symbol display device 81, the rotation of the rotating member generates a flow of wind, and a sphere flowing down due to the wind is generated. There was a problem of moving.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the rotating unit 500 is located above the stage 611 on which the ball rolls, the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611 is easily affected by the wind due to the rotation of the rotating unit 500.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the attachment portion 623 connected from the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is fastened to the fastening hole 613 recessed below the stage 611 of the frame 610 (that is, the attachment hole 613). Since the lower end portion of the center cover 620 is connected to the lower end of the frame 610), the falling area of the sphere and the displacement area of the rotating unit 500 can be defined. Therefore, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be blocked by the cover member 621 (the second portion 621b). As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of the sphere from being affected by the action of the wind. In addition, even when wind is generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 and dust or dust is blown off by the wind, the dust or dust can be blocked by the second portion 621b (the cover member 621). Soaring on the route of light emission and light reception, and a decrease in detection accuracy can be suppressed.

  Here, there is conventionally known a stage 611 of the center frame 600 in which a back wall is erected so that a ball rolling on the stage 611 does not fall to the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 wraps around the front end from the rear end of the stand erected from the stage 611 or the glass 8 on the front side of the game board 13. To affect the ball rolling on the stage 611. On the other hand, in order to prevent the effect of wind on the ball rolling on the stage 611, the back wall is curved to the front side to have a shape that covers the periphery of the stage ball (that is, a closed passage is formed). ), It is difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611, and the interest of the player is impaired.

  On the other hand, since the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is connected to the area including the stage 611 of the frame 610, the second unit 621b (the cover member 621) generates wind generated by the rotation of the rotating unit 500. Can be blocked by As a result, since there is no need to cover the periphery of the stage 611, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611, and to suppress the influence of the wind from affecting the downflow of the ball.

  Here, if the displacement region where the displacement member (vertical displacement unit 400) is displaced and the flow region where the ball flows down are separated by the partition plate (center cover 620), the rear surface arranged on the back side of the game board 13 will be described. Since many members that generate heat, such as the drive motor 441 that drives the third symbol display device 81 and the vertical displacement unit 400, are disposed in the case 300, heat is generated inside the displacement area (the rear side of the game board 13). ), There is a problem that the board controlling the gaming machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is not connected to the frame 610 and is disposed at a predetermined interval from the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610. The back side and the front side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621 can communicate with each other via a predetermined interval. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the heat generated from the vertical displacement unit 400 from being trapped on the back side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621. As a result, cold air on the front side (rather than the rear side) of the game board 13 can be sent to the back side of the game board 13, so that the base for controlling the game machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since a predetermined interval between the first portion 621a and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 is formed at the upper part of the center frame 600, heated air is supplied to the front side of the game board 13 through the predetermined interval. Can be easily washed away. That is, the warmed air on the back side of the game board 13 is raised by the heat, so that the air is heated from the predetermined interval between the first portion 621a formed above and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 toward the front side. Easy to wash. As a result, it is possible to suppress the heat from being trapped on the back sides of the game board 13 and the cover member 621.

  In this case, when the rotating unit 500 is rotated to generate wind, the wind flows out of a predetermined interval between the first portion 621a and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 and flows down in front of the game board 13. May affect a moving ball.

  On the other hand, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating unit 500 can flow toward the upper area (the area above the opening of the game board 13) of the game area, and the action of the wind causes the sphere to flow. Can be suppressed from being affected. That is, the ball that flows down the upper area of the game area is an initial ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a and flowed into the game area, and has a relatively high speed. Compared to a ball rolling on 611, it is less affected by wind. In other words, the wind can flow toward an area where the ball is less likely to be affected by the wind. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotating member can be increased accordingly, and the effect can be improved.

  Next, the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device 700, and FIG. 43 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the XLIV-XLIV line in FIG. 45A is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the line XLVa-XLVa in FIG. 43, and FIG. 45B is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 45 (c) is a sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the line XLVc-XLVc in FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 (d) is a sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the line XLVd-XLVd in FIG.

  Note that in FIG. 43, the outer peripheral surfaces of the distribution member 760, the seesaw member 762, the communication hole 751, and the collection hole 752 are illustrated by broken lines. In FIG. 45 (d), the path of the ball paid out from the opening 744 is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 to 45, the sorting device 700 is disposed below the center frame 600 of the game board 13 and is disposed on the front side (the front side in FIG. 43) with respect to the base plate 60. It is mainly provided with a side forming portion 710 and a back side forming portion 720 disposed on the back side (the back side in the drawing of FIG. 43) with respect to the base plate 60.

  The front side forming portion 710 is formed mainly including a winning member 730 attached to the front side of the base plate 60, and a bending member 740 disposed on the front side of the winning member 730.

  The rear side forming part 720 is formed mainly including an interposition member 750 attached to the rear side of the base plate 60, and a distribution member 760 arranged on the rear side of the interposition member 750. .

  The winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the first winning opening 64 described above located at the upper center in the left-right direction, and the first electric accessory 640 a located below the first winning opening 64. A through hole 731 located on both left and right sides of the first electric accessory 640a and formed in the front-rear direction, and a lower insertion hole 732 positioned below the through hole 731 and formed in the front and rear direction. , Which are mainly provided.

  The through hole 731 is a member into which an upper protruding portion 741 of a bending member 740 described later is inserted, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view opening slightly larger than the outer shape of the upper protruding portion 741 in a rear view. . A projecting wall 731a projecting upward from the rear surface to the front surface is formed on the lower surface of the through hole 731.

  The two projecting walls 731a are symmetrically arranged side by side with respect to the center line in the left-right direction of the through hole 731 when viewed from the front, and the projecting distance is set to decrease from the rear side to the front side. Therefore, the sphere that passes (rolls) inside the through-hole 731 by the intervening member 750 and the sorting member 760 described later is guided to the center position in the left-right direction of the two protruding walls 731a, and is frontward from the back side. Rolled toward the side.

  The lower insertion hole 732 is a hole that communicates with the collection hole 752 of the interposition member 750 disposed on the back side, and is formed at a position facing the collection hole 752 of the interposition member 750. Further, the lower insertion hole 732 is opened in a substantially D-shape in a front view in which the lower surface side is curved, and a first protruding portion 732a protruding downward from the upper surface at a central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and protruding upward from the lower surface. A second protruding portion 732b.

  The first protruding portion 732a is formed such that the protruding distance increases from the front side (the right side in FIG. 45A) to the rear side (the left side in FIG. 45A). The second protrusion 732b is formed to have a smaller protrusion distance from the front side to the rear side. In addition, the distance between the first protrusion 732a and the second protrusion 732b is slightly larger than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, when the ball passes through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732, the ball can be rolled to the rear side by the inclination of the second protrusion 732b from the front side to the rear side. On the other hand, when the sphere bounces up and down when being inserted through the lower insertion hole 732, the upward displacement can be suppressed by the first protrusion 732a.

  A sensor SE that detects the passage of a sphere is provided on the back surface of the lower insertion hole 732. The sensor SE is a member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front and having a through-hole having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere formed on a side surface thereof. Can be detected. The sensor SE is disposed such that the axis of the through hole is coaxial with the arc axis on the lower surface side of the lower insertion hole 732. Thus, the opening direction of the through hole can be inclined slightly downward toward the back side, so that the sphere passing through the inside of the through hole of the sensor SE can be suppressed from staying inside the through hole.

  The bending member 740 is a member disposed on the front side of the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 described above, and is located substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) when viewed from the front. Are symmetrically arranged, and their outer shapes are formed symmetrically.

  In addition, the bending member 740 is disposed at a position where a gap large enough to allow a ball to pass is formed between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2) forming the game area in a front view. This suppresses a ball flowing down the lower game area of the bending member 740 from being caught between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 and remaining in the game area.

  The bending member 740 is formed of a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and has an upper protruding portion 741 protruding from the back surface thereof, a lower protruding portion 743 protruding from below the upper protruding portion 741, and an upper protruding portion 741. And an opening 744 formed between the lower protruding portions 743 facing each other.

  The upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U-shape whose lower side is open in rear view, and its outer shape is set slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Thus, when the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730, the upper protrusion 741 can be inserted and arranged inside the through hole 731. Therefore, when the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730, the upper projecting portion 741 can be inserted and positioned, so that the assembling process can be simplified.

  In addition, since the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U-shape whose lower side is open in rear view, when the ball passes through the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 and rolls toward the bending member 740, the ball protrudes. The connecting portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is not formed on the rolling surface (lower surface) on which the roller rolls. Therefore, since the rolling of the ball can be kept constant, it is possible to prevent the ball from stopping inside the through hole 731. That is, when the connecting portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is formed on the rolling surface of the ball, the resistance increases when the ball rolls on the connecting portion, and the ball jumps at the step. By eliminating the connecting portion on the rolling surface of the ball, the rolling of the ball can be stabilized and the ball can be prevented from being clogged.

  Further, in this case, even if the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in an annular shape in rear view, and the ball passes through the inside of the annular shape, the winning member 730 and the bending member are similarly formed on the rolling surface on which the ball rolls. Although the connection portion with the 740 is not formed, the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in an annular shape, so that the component shape of the bending member 740 is complicated, and the manufacturing cost is increased. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the upper protruding portion 741 is substantially U-shaped when viewed from the rear, the shape of the component can be simplified, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  The lower protruding portion 743 is formed below the upper protruding portion 741, and is formed in a substantially U-shape in a rear view in which the upper side is opened. That is, when viewed from the rear, the open portions of the upper protruding portion 741 and the lower protruding portion 743 are formed to face each other in the up-down direction.

  The lower protruding portion 743 is a path (hereinafter, referred to as a “second throwing path KR2”) for sending a ball thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 toward the bending member 740 to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. And is formed at a position facing the lower insertion hole 732 in the front-rear direction.

  The projecting distance of the lower projecting portion 743 to the back side is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere. In addition, the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730 in a state where the protruding tip surface of the lower protruding portion 743 is in contact with the winning member 730. Therefore, the distance between the opposing bending member 740 and the winning member 730 is set to be larger than the diameter of the ball, and the ball is thrown vertically (below, referred to as a ball path) between the opposing bending member 740 and the winning member 730. A "first throwing route KR1" is formed.

  The bending member 740 is formed with a guide portion 742 projecting from the upper inner surface of the upper protrusion 741 to the lower inner surface of the lower protrusion 743. The guide portion 742 projects in a substantially U-shape whose back side is open in a side view.

  The guide portion 742 vertically projects a ball thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 (first throwing route KR1), and then throws the ball into the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. The height of the lower inner edge in the vertical direction is slightly smaller than the height of the lower inner edge of the lower insertion hole 732 disposed on the back surface.

  The guide portion 742 is formed symmetrically with respect to the center line in the left-right direction in the front view of the through hole 731 arranged on the back side. Thus, the two guide portions 742 are brought into contact with each other and guided (returned to the back side), so that the ball can be prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction.

  The mutually protruding distal end surfaces of the guide portions 742 arranged side by side are formed so as to be inclined toward the base side as they approach the surfaces facing each other (see FIG. 45B). Accordingly, it is possible to effectively suppress the sphere that is brought into contact with the two guide portions 742 and guided (returned to the rear side) from being displaced in the left-right direction.

  The upper protruding portion 741 is formed with a side wall 741a that protrudes inward from the left and right side surfaces in rear view. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) side walls 741a are juxtaposed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. Accordingly, when the ball thrown inside the upper protruding portion 741 rolls in the left-right direction in the normal state, the throwing ball can be stabilized by contacting the tip end surface of the side wall 741a. On the other hand, when two balls flow continuously inside the upper protruding portion 741 and a ball flowing behind collides with a ball flowing ahead, the preceding ball enters between the side walls 741a, so that the left and right sides are placed. The distance in which the ball escapes in the direction can be ensured to prevent the ball from being clogged inside the upper protrusion 741. That is, the ball thrown inside the upper protrusion 741 can be stabilized by the side wall 741a.

  The opening 744 is a predetermined gap formed between the upper protruding portion 741 and the lower protruding portion 743 facing each other, and is formed on both left and right sides in rear view. Further, the opening 744 is formed in a substantially U-shape whose back side is open in a side view.

  The upper end of the opening 744 is set to be substantially the same in the vertical direction as the lower surface of the through-hole 731 of the winning member 730, and the lower end is positioned at a substantially middle position in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. Is set to the height of Accordingly, when a ball is continuously fed into the bending member 740, it is possible to suppress the ball from being released into the opening 744 and clogging the inside of the bending member 740. That is, the opening 744 is formed so as to open on the side surface in the left-right direction of the connection portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2.

  The distribution member 760 is formed in a box-shaped body with a front side opened while being formed in a horizontally long rectangle in a front view. The distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is formed to be inclined downward from the substantially central position in the left-right direction toward the outside in the left-right direction. The left and right ends of the sorting member 760 are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

  The distributing member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 inclined downward from the center in the left-right direction toward the left and right sides in a front view, a seesaw member 762 arranged at the center of the inclined surfaces 761, and an upper part of the seesaw member 762. And a ball feeding port 763 formed at the center.

  The throwing port 763 is a member for forming an opening on the front side of the sorting member 760, and is formed at a position facing the first winning opening 64 of the winning member 730. Accordingly, when the sorting member 760 is disposed on the interposed member 750 described below, a space A can be formed between the ball feeding port 763 and the interposed member 750.

  The space A is formed in a space larger than the outer diameter of the sphere (that is, a gap through which the sphere can pass), and a first prize port of the prize member 730 through a through hole formed in the base plate 60. 64 (see FIG. 44). As a result, the ball won in the first winning port 64 can be thrown into the space A, and the inside of the space A can be thrown.

  The seesaw member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and has three projections 762a projecting outward at an interval of 90 degrees around the axis from the outer edge thereof, and a shaft inserted inside the annular shape. A portion 762b.

  The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support portion for rotating the seesaw member 762 around the axis, is formed in a columnar shape, and is inserted inside the ring of the seesaw member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the interposed member 750 and the distribution member 760, so that the seesaw member 762 is rotatably disposed around the shaft portion 762b.

  The projection 762a is a projection for alternately allocating the ball to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 one by one when the ball is thrown from the space A described above. A ball is sent to the opposite side. That is, the ball thrown from the space A by the projection 762a at the center can be thrown in the left-right direction. The projections 762a protruding at both ends regulate the displacement of the seesaw member 762 and displace the direction in which the tip of the central projection 762a is located by the weight applied when the ball passes (see the seesaw member 762). The rotation of the seesaw member 762 is restricted by the contact between the tip surface of the protrusion 762a and the inclined surface 761. On the other hand, when the ball is guided by the protrusion 762a at the center of the protrusion 762a that is not in contact with the inclined surface 761, the guided ball collides with the protrusion 762a and is pushed down. As a result, the projection 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the projection 762a displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface 761 to restrict the displacement.

  The inclined surface 761 is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter, referred to as a “third ball-sending path KR3”) in which the balls distributed to the left and right by the above-described seesaw member 762 roll and are thrown. It is formed to incline downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the balls distributed to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760 are rolled on the inclined surface 761 and are sent (rolled) to the descending end of the inclined surface 761.

  At the end on the descending side of the inclined surface 761, the side surface on the back side is formed so as to be inclined in the direction approaching the interposition member 750 so as to increase the thickness forward as approaching the end. Thus, the ball rolled on the inclined surface 761 and sent to the end thereof can be sent to the communication hole 751 of the interposition member 750 disposed in front of the sorting member 760.

  The interposition member 750 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the above-described variable winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. And a collection hole 752 opened below the hole 751.

  The communication holes 751 are formed on the front sides of the left and right ends of the distribution member 760, and are formed on the back side of the through holes 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the spaces at the left and right ends of the sorting member 760 and the internal space of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 are connected via the communication hole 751. Therefore, a path (hereinafter, referred to as a “fourth ball-throwing path KR4”) in which a ball rolling above the inclined surface 761 of the sorting member 760 passes through the communication hole 751 and is thrown into the through-hole 731 of the winning member 730. ) Can be formed.

  The collection hole 752 is an opening formed on the back side of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 as described above. That is, the collection hole 752 is connected to the back side of the sensor SE, and the ball passing through the sensor SE is sent to the opening of the collection hole 752. The collecting hole 752 is connected to a device that circulates the ball installed in the store, and the ball collected in the collecting hole 752 is circulated by the circulating device and is launched again as a game ball from the ball firing unit 112a. .

  The sorting device 700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. The ball entering from the first winning opening 64 is sent to the sorting member 760 and is sent to the third throwing route KR3 in one of the left and right directions by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760. When the ball thrown on the third throwing route KR3 is thrown to the end of the third throwing route KR3, the ball is sent to the fourth throwing route KR4 inside the communication hole 751 of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side. It is thrown. The ball thrown on the fourth throwing route KR4 is thrown on the first throwing route KR1 on the back side of the bending member 740. The ball thrown on the first throwing route KR1 is guided by the lower protrusion 743 of the bending member 740 and thrown on the second throwing route KR2. The ball thrown in the second throwing route KR2 passes through the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730, passes through the inside of the sensor SE, and is then thrown into the collection hole 752 of the interposition member 3750.

  Here, as described above, the through-hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 are formed on the left and right sides of the first electric accessory 640a, and the bending members 740 are arranged in a pair of left and right. The first electric accessory 640 a is located between the lower protruding portions 743 of the bending member 740.

  In this case, if the angle of the downward inclination of the third throwing path KR3 is made small (the slope is gentle), the falling velocity of the ball becomes low, and the clogging of the ball in the lower protruding portion 743 becomes easy to occur. On the other hand, when the angle of the descending inclination of the third throwing path KR3 is large (the descending inclination is steep), the falling velocity of the ball is increased, so that the clogging of the ball in the lower insertion hole 732 can be made difficult to occur. The space in the height direction (up-down direction) necessary for disposing the third throwing route KR3 (distributing member 760) increases, and it becomes difficult to dispose the first electric accessory 640a.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the opening 744 is formed in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743, it is possible to make it difficult for the lower protruding portion 743 to be clogged with a ball. The angle of the downward inclination can be made small (the downward inclination is gentle). As a result, the space in the height direction required for disposing the third throwing path KR3 (distributing member 760) can be suppressed, and the disposition of the first electric accessory 640a can be enabled. That is, the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the first electric accessory 640 a is an arrangement that is impossible with a conventional product, and is only possible by forming the opening 744 in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743 as described above. It is a thing.

  Here, in the present embodiment, an opening is formed in the center of the game board 13 (the center frame 600 is arranged), and the third symbol display device 81 is visually recognized by the player through the opening. In recent years, in response to a demand for an increase in the size of the third symbol display device 81, the center opening of the game board 13 (the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 of the center frame 600) has also been enlarged, so that it is located below the center opening of the game board 13. The space between the edge and the lower edge of the game area (the lower inner edge of the inner rail 61) is reduced. Therefore, in the conventional product, the members corresponding to the third throwing path KR3 and the first electric accessory 640a are arranged in the space between the lower edge of the central opening of the game board 13 and the lower edge of the game area. It was difficult.

  That is, as described above, when the angle of the downward inclination of the third throwing path KR3 is small (the downward inclination is gentle), the falling velocity of the ball becomes low, and the ball is easily clogged in the lower protruding portion 743. Become. On the other hand, when the angle of the descending inclination of the third throwing path KR3 is large (the descending inclination is steep), the falling velocity of the ball is increased, so that the clogging of the ball in the lower protrusion 743 can be made difficult to occur. The space in the height direction necessary for disposing the third throwing route KR3 increases, and it becomes difficult to dispose the first electric accessory 640a. In addition, since the disposition position of the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) in the vertical direction is lowered (lowered), the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) and the lower edge portion of the game area (the inner rail 61). It is difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass, and it is necessary to provide the first out ports 71 on both sides of the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the opening is formed in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743, the ball clogging in the lower protruding portion 743 can be less likely to occur. The angle of the descending slope of the three throwing route KR3 can be reduced (the descending slope is made gentler). As a result, the position of the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) in the height direction (vertical direction) can be raised (increased), so that the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) and the game area A gap through which a ball can pass can be secured between the lower edge of the inner rail 61 (the lower inner edge of the inner rail 61). Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the first out ports 71 on both sides of the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740).

  That is, in the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the first electric accessory 640a, an arrangement in which a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the lower protruding portion 743 (the bending member 740) and the lower edge of the game area, This is an arrangement that is impossible with conventional products, and has only become possible by forming an opening in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743 as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the throwing of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 740 will be described. FIG. 46A is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 46B is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13. Note that FIG. 46A corresponds to FIG. 45A, and FIG. 46B corresponds to FIG. 45B.

  As shown in FIG. 46, when two balls are thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 in a manner that there is almost no gap (that is, two balls are connected in succession), the preceding (preceding) A part of the ball is sent to the back side while entering the opening 744 and guided to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730.

  Here, if a passage having a cross-sectional area slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere is formed and the passage is bent, two spheres are formed in the passage with almost no gap (two spheres are connected). ) When the ball is thrown, the following ball sticks to the preceding ball, and the following ball presses against the side wall, so that the two cannot roll and the ball is clogged. Was.

  On the other hand, in the present application, since the opening 744 is formed at the connecting portion between the first ball-sending path KR1 and the second ball-sending path KR2, when the ball passes through the lower protruding portion 743 in a state where a plurality of balls are connected, Even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball can be hardly pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Further, since the opening 744 is formed at a position where the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2 make a tolerance, the ball can be hardly clogged at a bent portion where the ball is easily clogged. That is, the area where the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2 intersect is such that the ball that has flowed down (dropped) on the first throwing route KR1 changes direction and turns in the extending direction of the second throwing route KR2. This is the position where the movement starts, and the ball following the preceding ball can easily catch up. Therefore, when the following ball presses the preceding ball against the side wall, the two cannot roll and the ball tends to be clogged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the opening 744 is formed at the position where the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2 intersect. It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to escape between the opposing sides of the opening 744 (by accommodating a part of the preceding ball in the opening 744) and to press it against the side wall, so that the rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, the height of the lower end of the opening 744 is set to the height at the substantially middle position in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730, so that it falls down (flows down) the first throwing path KR1. When the moving ball reaches the bottom wall of the second throwing path KR2 (the lower protruding portion 743), the ball can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball can escape to the space between the opposing openings 744 and cannot be easily pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Further, since the lower protruding portion 743 is formed in a substantially U shape in side view, and the lower end of the opening 744 is installed at a position separated from the bottom wall of the lower protruding portion 743 by a predetermined distance, A side wall can be left (formed) between the lower end of the opening 744 and the second throwing path KR2 (lower protrusion 743). Therefore, even when the opening is formed in a size that allows the ball to pass through, the ball unnecessarily flows from the bending member 740 to the outside (the game area on the front side of the game board 13) through the opening. Can be suppressed.

  In this case, in the case where the size of the opening 744 is such that the sphere cannot pass, the opening 744 can usually be used to make it difficult to press the preceding sphere against the side wall. A mode is formed in which the leading sphere presses the leading sphere against the center of the opening 744, and the leading sphere may be internally fitted (fitted) into the opening 744. In this case, the following rolling of the ball is hindered by the ball fitted into the opening 744, and the ball is clogged.

  On the other hand, the opening 744 is larger than the outer shape of the sphere (formed so as to allow the sphere to pass through), so that the following sphere presses the preceding sphere against the center of the opening 744. Even in this case, the leading ball can be discharged from the opening 744 to the outside of the bending member 740 (the game area on the front side of the game board 13), and the leading ball is fitted (fitted) into the opening 744. Can be avoided. As a result, the rolling of the following ball can be continued, and the occurrence of clogging of the ball can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, the opening 744 is formed in such a size that the ball can pass, and the opening 744 is disposed on the front side of the game board 13 (that is, the game area), so that the game area flows down the game area. The ball to be moved can flow from the opening 744 into the bending member 740. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, when a sensor that detects a winning ball is provided downstream of the lower protruding portion 743, in addition to the ball that has flowed into the bending member 740 from upstream of the lower protruding portion 743, the bending member The ball that has flowed into 740 can also be detected as a winning ball. In particular, in this case, since the opening 744 (the area where the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2 intersect) is disposed on the front side of the game board 13, the opening 744 flows into the bending member 740 from the opening 744. The player can visually recognize the playing ball. Therefore, also from this point, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In a region where the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2 make a tolerance, a lower portion of the guide portion 742 (that is, a portion which is curved toward the collection hole 752 and inclined downward) is disposed. Accordingly, when the ball flowing down (falling) on the first throwing path KR1 changes direction and starts rolling in the extending direction of the second throwing path KR2, the ball is inclined downward by the guide portion 742. It can be rolled quickly by utilizing. This makes it easy for the preceding ball to roll before the succeeding ball catches up, and the preceding ball can be rolled by the following ball on the back side (along the extending direction of the second throwing route KR2). Since it can be suppressed from being pressed against the side wall on the rear side during rolling, the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the opening 744 is formed at a position on the front side (game area side) of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), ball clogging occurs at a bent portion between the first and second throwing paths KR1 and KR2. In this case, the store operator can access the opening 744 from the front side by opening the glass 8. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging.

  Further, when dust or dirt accumulates at the bent portion between the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2, the store operator opens the glass 8 to access the opening 744 from the front side. Thus, the bent portion can be cleaned through the opening 744. Therefore, the cleaning performance when cleaning the first ball-sending path KR1 and the second ball-sending path KR2 can be improved.

  Next, the light emitting decoration unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 800.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the light-emitting decoration unit 800 includes a base 810 having a horizontally-long rectangular shape in a front view disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and a front side of the base 810. The light emitting device 820 mainly includes a light emitting device 820 to be provided, and a cover member 830 that is provided on the front surface of the light emitting device 820 and that is made of a light transmissive material.

  On the front side of the light-emitting device 820, a plurality of light-emitting bodies (LEDs 821) are dispersedly arranged over the entire surface. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 821 is emitted from the entire surface of the cover member 830 to the front side of the gaming machine.

  Next, a regulation unit 2490 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The same portions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the regulating unit 2490 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the regulation unit 2490 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 49 (a) is a side view of the regulation unit 2490, FIG. 49 (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit 2490, and FIG. 49 (c) is a view taken along the line XLIXc-XLIXc of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the regulation unit 2490.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, in the regulation unit 2490 in the second embodiment, the roller member 492 is supported by the rotating member 2494, and the position of the roller member 492 can be adjusted by the rotation of the rotating member 2494. You.

  The regulating unit 2490 includes a case member 2491 formed in a box-like body, an outer edge member 2493 disposed on the outer edge of the case member 2491 on the open side, and a space between the case member 2491 and the outer edge member 2493 facing each other. It is mainly formed with a rotating member 2494 that is rotatably supported by being sandwiched and a roller member 492 that is supported by the rotating member 2494.

  The case member 2491 is formed in a box shape having an opening on the back side, and is formed to have a larger width dimension in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 49B) than the case member 491 in the first embodiment. The case member 2491 is mainly formed with a projecting portion 491a projecting from the front side surface, and a cutout portion 2491b cut out in a semicircular shape on both side surfaces in the left-right direction.

  The notch portion 2491b is formed by being cut out in a semicircular shape at a substantially central position in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 49 (b)) on both sides of the case member 2491 in the horizontal direction (FIG. 49 (b) horizontal direction). You. The cutout portion 2491b is a cutout for rotatably supporting a shaft portion 2494b of a rotating member 2494 described later inside, and has an inner diameter set to be larger than an outer diameter of the rotating member 2494.

  The outer edge member 2493 is a member that is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the back side (open side) of the case member 2491. The outer edge member 2493 has an inner shape substantially the same shape as the opening of the case member 2491. In addition, an upright portion 2493a that stands upright on the front side is formed around the inner edge on the side surface on the front side (the case member 491 side) of the outer edge member 2493.

  The upright portion 2493a is formed with a recessed portion 2493a1 that is recessed on the back side. The recessed portion 2493a1 is formed at a position facing the notch 2491b of the case member 2492. Therefore, the rotating member 2494 can be disposed on the case member 2491 in a rotatable state by sandwiching the rotating member 2494 described below between the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491 and the concave portion 2493a1.

  The rotating member 2494 is formed of a plate-like body having an oblong shape in a side view, and has a longitudinal dimension smaller than a vertical dimension of an inner portion of the case member 2491. The rotating member 2494 includes a shaft portion 2494b protruding in a cylindrical shape outward in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491 at the center in the longitudinal direction, a shaft support hole 2494a formed through both sides of the shaft portion 2494b, and a shaft. And a regulating portion 2494c bulging radially outward from the protruding tip of the portion 2494b.

  The shaft portion 2494b is protruded longer than the thickness of the case member 2491 formed in a box-like body, and a restricting portion 2494c bulging in the radial direction is formed at the protruding tip portion. Accordingly, the shaft member 2494b is fitted inside the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491 and the concave portion 2493a1 of the outer edge member 2493 is provided from the back side, so that the rotating member 2494 can be rotated with respect to the case member 2491. In addition to the axial support, the restricting portion 2494c can restrict the rotation member 2494 from displacing in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491.

  The shaft support hole 2494a is an opening through which the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 is inserted. The shaft support hole 2494a is formed in a circular shape, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b. Thus, the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 in a state where the retaining ring E1 is removed is inserted into the shaft support hole 2494a, and then the retaining ring E1 is externally fitted to the shaft portion 492b, so that the roller member 492 can be rotated. Can be disposed on the rotating member 2494.

  The regulation unit 2490 configured as described above is assembled as follows.

  First, the shaft 492b of the roller member 492 is inserted into the shaft support hole 2494a of the pair of rotating members 2494, and the roller member 492 is supported by the rotating member 2494. Thus, two roller members 492 can be arranged in a vertically arranged state between the rotating members 2494 arranged in a pair.

  Next, a torsion spring (not shown) is provided on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494, and after fitting inside the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491, the outer edge member 2493 is provided from the back side to rotate. The member 2494 can be disposed so as to be rotatable about the shaft portion 2494b with respect to the case member 2491. Thus, the position of the roller member 492 disposed on the rotating member 2494 can be displaced by rotating and displacing the rotating member 2494. Also, a state in which the roller member 492 disposed above the roller members 492 disposed vertically is urged to the front side (the left side in FIG. 49 (c)) by the torsion spring disposed on the shaft portion 2494b. It can be.

  Next, referring to FIG. 50, a description will be given of a state of contact between the decoration member 450 and the regulating unit 2490 when the decoration member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position. (A) to (c) of FIG. 50 are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG. 50 (a) corresponds to FIG. 24 (a), FIG. 50 corresponds to FIG. 24 (b), and FIG. 21 (c) corresponds to FIG. 18 (c).

  As shown in FIG. 50A, when the decorative member 450 is positioned above the regulating unit 2490, the rotating member 2494 is provided by a torsion spring (not shown) disposed on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494. Is rotated, and the roller member 492 disposed above the roller member 492 disposed below is positioned on the front side.

  As a result, the decorative member 450 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 21A, and the lower end surface of the decorative member 450 shown in FIG. When the roller 492a of the roller member 492 disposed on the upper side is displaced to the vertical position, the pressure of the roller 492a which abuts on the decoration member 450 and suppresses the decoration member 450 is lower than that of the regulating unit 2490 of the first embodiment. Can be smaller. In this case, the rotating member 2494 is in contact with a projection (not shown) formed inside the case member 2491, and the roller member 492 disposed on the upper side is not displaced to the front side (the rotating member 2494 is not rotated). The upper side does not rotate to the front side).

  Therefore, when the decorative member 450 is further displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 21B to the first position shown in FIG. 50C, a driving force is applied to the decorative member 450. Increase of the energy consumption of the driving motor 441 can be suppressed.

  When the decoration member 450 is displaced to the first position shown in FIG. 50 (c), the roller 492a disposed below is in contact with the decoration member 450. As a result, the lower roller member 492 is pressed to the rear side and is displaced to the rear side, and the upper roller 492a is displaced to the front side. Thus, the pressing force of the roller 492a disposed on the upper side against the decoration member 450 can be increased. As a result, when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position, the decorative member 450 can be firmly held by the pressing force of the roller members 492 arranged vertically. On the other hand, when the decoration member 450 is located in the middle of the displacement, the pressing force acting on the decoration member 450 can be reduced to make it easier to displace. That is, with the displacement of the decoration member 450, the pressing force applied to the decoration member 450 from the regulating unit 2490 can be changed.

  Next, a distribution device 700 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the sorting device 3700 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device 3700 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 3700. FIG. 53 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 3700 along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 52, and FIG. 53 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 3700 along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 52 (b). .

  As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, in the sorting device 3700 in the third embodiment, the opening of the second winning opening 640 is connected to the sorting device 3700.

  The distribution device 3700 is disposed below the center frame 600 of the game board 13 and is disposed on the front side with respect to the base plate 60, and is disposed on the rear side with respect to the base plate 60. And a front side forming portion 3710 to be formed.

  The front side forming portion 3710 is formed mainly including a winning member 3730 attached to the base plate 60, and a bending member 3740 disposed on the front side of the winning member 3730.

  The rear side forming portion 3720 includes an interposition member 3750 attached to the base plate 60, a distribution member 760 disposed on the back side of the interposition member 3750, and an interposition member located below the distribution member 760. And a second throwing path 3770 disposed on the back side of the 3750.

  The winning member 3730 is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the first winning opening 64 described above at the upper center in the left-right direction, a first electric accessory 640a below the first winning opening 64, and a first electric winning member. A through-hole 731 formed in the front-rear direction on both sides in the left-right direction of the accessory 640a, a second through-hole 3733 formed in the front-rear direction below the through-hole 731, and a second through-hole 3733 below the second through-hole 3733. And a lower insertion hole 732 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The second through hole 3733 is an opening through which a sphere passes, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape as viewed from the front, which is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. The second through-hole 3733 is formed below the second winning opening 640, and a second protruding wall 3733a is formed on the lower surface and protrudes upward from the back side to the front side. .

  The two second protruding walls 3733a are symmetrically arranged side by side with respect to the center line in the left-right direction of the second through hole 3733 when viewed from the front, and the protruding distance is set to be smaller from the back side to the front side. Therefore, when a sphere passes through the inside of the second through hole 3733 by the intervening member 3750 and the second ball feeding path to be described later, the sphere can be guided to the left-right center position of the two second projecting walls 3733a, and It can be rolled from the back side to the front side.

  The bending member 3740 is a member disposed on the front side of the through-hole 731, the second through-hole 3733, and the lower insertion hole 732 of the above-described winning member 3730. The pair of outer shapes are formed symmetrically.

  The bending member 3740 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate-like body as viewed from the front, and has an upper protruding portion 741 protruding from the back side thereof, an intermediate protruding portion 3745 protruding from below the upper protruding portion 741, and an intermediate protruding portion thereof. And a lower protrusion 743 projecting from below 3745.

  The intermediate protruding portion 3745 is a wall portion that is formed to be long in the up-down direction (vertical direction in FIG. 53B) when viewed from the rear, is formed at the left and right sides of the second through hole 3733, and the upper side surface is The two through holes 3733 are formed at the same height as a substantially middle position in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the lower side surface of the intermediate projecting portion 3745 is formed below the bottom surface of the second through hole 3733.

  In addition, a second opening 3746 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate protruding portion 3745 and the upper protruding portion 741. On the other hand, an opening 744 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate protruding portion 3745 and the lower protruding portion 743.

  The second opening 3746 is formed in a substantially U-shape that is open on the back side in side view, and has an inner shape larger than the outer shape of the sphere. That is, the second opening 3746 is set to a size that allows the ball to pass. The detailed description of the second opening 3746 will be described later.

  The second throwing path 3770 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape in a front view, and has a substantially box-like shape having a constant thickness with an open front side. The second throwing path 3770 is a throwing path for throwing a ball entering the inside of the second winning opening 640 into the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730, and is disposed on the back side of the interposition member 3750. A ball feeding path for feeding a ball can be formed between the inside of the second ball feeding path 3770 and the interposition member 3750.

  In addition, the second throwing path 3770 is disposed such that the left end in front view is located behind the second winning opening 640 of the winning member 3730, and the right end is the second through hole of the winning member 3730. It is arranged on the back side of 3733. That is, the second throwing path 3770 is disposed on the interposition member 3750 in such a manner that the left end in the front view is located above the right end, and is inclined downward toward the right end.

  Further, the second throwing path 3770 has a left end in front view connected to the second winning opening 640 and a right end connected to the second connection hole 3753 of the interposition member 3750. As a result, the ball that has entered the inside of the second winning opening 640 is thrown into the second throwing path 3770, and then rolls through the inside of the second throwing path 3770 from the left end to the right end. The ball is sent to the second connection hole 3753 of the installation member 3750.

  The interposition member 3750 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the above-described variable prize device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction, and a communication hole 751 located on both left and right sides of the variable prize device 65 and formed through the front and rear direction. And a collection hole 752 located below the communication hole 751 and formed in the front-rear direction, and a second connection hole 3753 formed between the communication hole 751 and the collection hole 752 on the right side and formed in the front-rear direction. And is formed.

  The second connection hole 3753 is formed to penetrate in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, the inner shape thereof is set to be larger than the outer shape of the sphere, and is formed at a position on the back side of the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 730. . As a result, the ball rolled inside the above-described second ball feeding path 3770 passes through the inside of the second connection hole 3753 and is sent to the second through hole 3733 of the interposition member 750.

  The sorting device 3700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. The ball entering from the first winning opening 64 is sent to the sorting member 760 and is alternately sent to the inclined surface 761 in one of the left and right directions by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760. When the ball rolling on the inclined surface 761 is thrown to the end of the inclined surface 761, the ball passes through the inside of the communication hole 751 of the interposition member 3750 arranged on the front side and is placed on the back side of the bending member 740. It is thrown. The ball thrown to the back side of the bending members 740 and 3740 is guided along the protruding distal end surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending members 740 and 3740, and falls downward, and drops in the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730. After passing through the inside of the sensor SE after passing through the inside, the ball is sent to the collection hole 752 of the interposition member 3750.

  The ball entering from the second winning opening 640 is sent to the second throwing path 3770, and is sent from the left end to the right end inside the second throwing path 3770. The ball thrown to the right end of the second throwing path 3770 passes through the inside of the second connection hole 3753 of the interposition member 3750 disposed on the front side, and passes through the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730. Later, while being guided along the projecting distal end surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 3740, it falls downward, passes through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730, and passes through the inside of the sensor SE. The ball is sent to the collection hole 752 of the installation member 3750.

  Therefore, in the sorting device 3700, a ball entering from the second winning opening 640 can be detected by the sensor SE disposed on the right side of the winning member 3730 in a front view, so that the ball is newly added to the throwing path from the second winning opening 640. There is no need to provide a sensor SE. That is, the sensor SE that detects a ball entering from the first winning opening 64 can also serve as a sensor SE that detects a ball entering the second winning opening 640, so that the cost of the product can be reduced accordingly. it can.

  Next, the second opening 3746 of the bending member 3740 will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting device 3700. FIG. 54 (a) corresponds to FIG. 53 (a), and FIG. 54 (b) corresponds to FIG. 53 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 54, a ball enters from the first winning opening 64 and is thrown, and is sent to the back side of the bending member 3740, and a ball enters from the second winning opening 640 and is sent, and the bending member 3740 If the ball sent to the back side is sent to the back side of the bending member 3740 at substantially the same timing, the balls on the back side of the bending member 740 may contact each other and the ball may be clogged.

  That is, a ball (hereinafter, referred to as a “lower ball”) sent from the second winning opening 640 and sent from the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730 to the bending member 3740 is transmitted from the first winning opening 64. The ball is thrown, is thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 3730 to the back side of the bending member 3740, and collides with a ball (hereinafter, referred to as an “upper ball”) that falls from above the bending member 3740 to below. If the ball is caught on the front end of the second through hole 3733, the ball may be stuck and clogged.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, since the second opening 3746 is formed in the bending member 3740, the lower ball is discharged by discharging the upper sphere from the second opening 3746 or escaping between the opposing surfaces of the second opening 3746. It is possible to eliminate the state of equilibrium between the ball and the upper ball and suppress the ball from being clogged in the ball feeding path of the bending member 3740.

  That is, when the upper sphere rides on the lower sphere to form a balanced state, the second opening 3746 is formed in the left-right side surface where the upper sphere is located, and the upper spheres Since the ball is leaned to the left or right due to the spherical shape, the upper sphere is sent into the left or right second opening 3744. This makes it possible to eliminate the balance between the lower ball and the upper ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball from being clogged in the ball feeding path of the bending member 3740.

  Next, a sorting device 4700 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 55 (a) is a front view of the sorting device 4700 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 4700 along the line LVb-LVb in FIG. 55 (a). FIG. 55C is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 4700 along the line LVc-LVc in FIG. In FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c), the path through which the sphere passes is schematically illustrated by broken lines.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a) to FIG. 55 (c), the sorting device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment has a prize port located below the opening 744 of the bending member 740 in the left and right direction (left and right direction in FIG. 55 (a)). 4063 is provided.

  The winning opening 4063 is an opening through which a ball flowing down the game area can pass, and is provided on the front side of the game board 13. The winning opening 4063 has a rear side connected to a third connecting hole 4754a of an interposing member 4750, which will be described later, and the ball that has entered the inside of the winning opening 4063 is guided to the third communication hole 54752a.

  The collection hole 752 of the interposition member 4750 is formed to be bent downward at the tip of the second throwing path KR2, and a path through which the ball passes and is thrown downward (sixth throwing path KR6) is formed. You. That is, the sixth throwing route KR6 and the second throwing route KR2 are connected.

  A third connection hole 4752a protruding to the left and right sides is formed in the sixth throwing path KR6, and a sensor SE for detecting passage of a sphere is provided below the third connection hole 4752a.

  The third connection hole 4752a is connected to an open portion on the back side of the winning opening 4063. Thus, the ball that has entered the winning opening 4063 is thrown into the third connection hole 4752a, and is sent to the sixth throwing path.

  Further, a sensor SE2 different from the sensor SE provided in the sixth throwing path KR6 is provided on the passage of the third connection hole 4752a. Thus, a sphere that has entered the inside of the third connection hole 4752a can be detected.

  Thus, the ball discharged from the opening 744 of the bending member 740 can be made to win the winning opening 4063. That is, not only the form in which the ball guided by the bending member 740 passes through the sensor SE, but also the form in which the ball flows out of the opening 744 into the game area, and further, the outflowing ball enters the winning opening 4063, and the sensor SE2 is moved. A passing form can be formed, and amusement can be given to the game.

  The winning opening 4063 may be arranged at a position capable of receiving all of the balls flowing out of the opening 744 into the game area, or may be partially arranged depending on the state of the ball flowing out of the opening 744 into the game area. Some balls may be arranged in a position where they can be received and some balls are not.

  In addition, since the opening 744 is formed at a connection portion between the first ball-throwing passage KR1 and the second ball-throwing passage KR2, the ball that is likely to be clogged is paid out from the opening to the game area, so that the first ball-throwing path KR1 is formed. The ball can be prevented from being clogged at the connection between the ball and the second throwing route KR2.

  Furthermore, since the bending member 740 in which the winning opening 4063 and the opening 744 are formed is arranged on the front side of the game board 13, a mode in which a ball is paid out from the opening 744 and enters the winning opening 4063 can be visually recognized by the player. Yes, it can be interesting and easy to give to the player.

  Since the third connection hole 4752a is connected above the sensor SE arranged in the sixth throwing path KR6, the ball entering from the winning opening 4063 only passes through the sensor SE2 arranged in the third connection hole 4752a. Without passing through the sensor SE arranged in the sixth throwing route KR6. Therefore, since the ball coming from the winning opening 4063 can pass the two sensors, it is possible to give the player an interest.

  Further, since the balls sent to the bending member 740 are sorted left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760, the balls are continuously connected to the connecting portion between the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2. Can be suppressed from being thrown. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball from being clogged at the connecting portion between the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining some or all of one embodiment with some or all of other one or more embodiments.

  In the first embodiment, the case where one sensor 630 is provided on the center frame 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, two sensors 630 may be arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line in the left-right direction of the center frame 600. Three or more sensors 630 may be provided.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the sensor 630 is provided on the frame body 610 of the center frame 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sensor 630 may be disposed on the front cover 460 of the vertical displacement unit 400. In this case, since the irradiation range of the sensor 630 can be widened, the detection area of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 is formed as a curved surface having a convex front surface is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent in a substantially V-shaped cross section at the front center portion. Further, it may be formed as a convex curved surface on the back side. Alternatively, a curved surface may be partially formed. At least, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the cover member 630 so that an object in front of the game board 13 can be detected.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 is made to have the player visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 provided on the back side and also serves as the light emitted from the sensor 630 is used. Although described above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the area of the cover member 621 may be an area where the third symbol display device 81 is visually recognized by a player and an area where light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected. The area may be divided into two. This modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of a center frame 600 as a modification. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 56 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 40B, and only the cross-section of the center cover 620 is schematically illustrated. Further, in FIG. 56, the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side of the center frame 600 is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 includes a second region R2 at both ends in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 56), and a center side (the third symbol display device) of the second region R2 at both ends. 81 front side) and a first region R1.

  The first region R1 is a region where the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side of the cover member 621 is visible to a player, and is formed of a light-transmissive material having relatively high transparency. The second region R2 is a region that reflects light emitted from the sensor 630 to the front side (the player side) of the gaming machine 13. Note that the boundary position between the first region R1 and the second region R2 only needs to be visible from a player located on the front side of the gaming machine 13, and is substantially the same as the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view. The same position is preferred. Further, in this modified example, a description will be given of a mode in which sensors 630 are provided at both left and right ends for easy understanding.

  In this case, for example, a member having high reflectivity such as silver halide may be coated on the back side or the front side of the second region R2. Alternatively, a silver seal may be attached to the rear side or the front side of the second region R2. In this case, since the light emitted from the sensor 630 can be easily reflected, an object on the front side of the game board 13 can be more reliably detected.

  Alternatively, the portion of the second region R2 may have a curved shape that is convex toward the back side, or the portion of the second region R2 may be a flat surface. In this case, the range in which the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the second region R2 and emitted to the front side can be widened, so that the detection range of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the sensor 630 is disposed in front of the cover member 621 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sensor 630 may be disposed rearward of the cover member 621. May be provided. In this case, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is transmitted through the cover member 621, so that an object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected. Further, in this case, since the cover member 620 has a curved shape that is convex toward the front side, when light emitted from the sensor 630 enters the cover member 630, the irradiation angle can be changed. That is, by transmitting the cover member 630 having a curved shape convex to the front side, the irradiation range of the sensor 630 emitted to the front side of the game board 13 can be widened.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the two inclined surfaces 761 (third throwing path KR3) of the sorting member 760 are formed with the same length has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 761 (the third throwing route KR3) may have different lengths. In this case, the time required for each of the balls distributed to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 720 to be detected by the sensor SE can be made different between the left and right paths, so that the player can be given an interest.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the roller 492a may be formed of a material having a lower elastic modulus than rubber or urethane, and an elastic member such as rubber or urethane may be fitted on the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a. In this case, since the volume of the elastic body can be reduced, the manufacturing cost of the roller member 492 can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the thickness of the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 is formed constant has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the thickness of the cover member 621 may be changed. For example, the cross-sectional shape of the cover member 621 may be substantially D-shaped. In this case, since the cover member 621 is a convex lens, the third symbol display device 81 and the decorative member 450 arranged on the back side of the cover member 621 can be displayed in a large size.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 by using the elastic deformation of the roller 492a has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may use the displacement of the roller 492a. For example, even if the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is formed to be displaceable, the roller 492a is displaced, and the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. Good.

  In this case, the roller 492a can be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 without using the elastic deformation of the roller 492a. It is not necessary to form with a material having a high modulus of elasticity. For example, it can be formed with a resin having a lower modulus of elasticity than rubber or urethane, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the above-described third embodiment, the case where the roller 492a disposed on the upper side comes into contact with the decorative member 450 before the roller 492a disposed on the lower side has been described. The roller 492a may be in contact with the decorative member 450 after the roller 492a disposed below.

  For example, the roller 492a disposed above the regulating unit 490 at the initial position (the position where the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 is separated from the roller 492a) is moved in the front-rear direction with the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (FIG. 50). (A) in the left-right direction). In this case, when the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position, the time until the decorative member 450 abuts on the roller 492a is delayed as compared with the first and third embodiments. The time during which the load (resistance) increases can be shortened.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the irradiation control unit 544 and the LED 532 are arranged in contact with each other has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined distance may be set between the irradiation control unit 544 and the LED. A gap may be formed. In this case, since both ends of the irradiation hole 543 can be in an open state, it is possible to suppress the air from staying (stagnating) inside the irradiation hole 543. That is, since a flow of air can be generated inside the irradiation hole 543, the heat generated by the operation of the LED 532 can be efficiently cooled.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the rough surface processing is formed into an uneven shape has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rough surface processing may be a surface including only protrusions (projections). Alternatively, the surface may be composed of only concave portions (dents). Further, the rough surface processing may be extended as a strip or a groove. Furthermore, the concave and convex cross-sectional shapes may be any of a circle, a keypress, a polygon diameter, and a combination thereof. That is, as long as a portion higher and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (surfaces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and irregular reflection is possible, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary.

  In each of the above embodiments, the smoke generating device (smoke generating means) for generating smoke is provided on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60), and the smoke generated from the smoke generating device is transferred to the displacement area of the rotary unit 500. (Rotational region). That is, an atmosphere filled with smoke may be formed in the space between the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 600 (center cover 620). Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be visually recognized by the player while passing the smoke, and the blinking of the LED 532 can be emphasized. In addition, it is possible to make only the blinking of the LED 532 visible while hiding the rotating unit 500 or the member on the back side thereof (making it difficult for a player to visually recognize) with the smoke. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect produced by the LED 532 (light).

  In the conventional product, the smoke is pushed out to the outer peripheral side with the rotation of the rotating unit, and it is difficult to fill the above-mentioned space with the smoke. Therefore, it was difficult to obtain the effect of smoke. On the other hand, according to the rotating unit 500 in each of the above-described embodiments, the ventilation holes 512 and 522 are opened in the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, and the rear surface of the structure in which the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are assembled. Since the side is opened, the outside air taken in from the ventilation holes 512 and 522 can be exhausted from the back side and circulated. Therefore, it is possible to fill the above-mentioned space with smoke (leave around the rotating unit 500). As a result, the LED 532 can be turned on and off in an atmosphere filled with smoke, and the above-described effects can be obtained.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the center cover 620 as an example>
A game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and the liquid crystal display device emitting light and receiving light reflected by the light object A sensor device for detecting the presence of the object on the front side of the game machine, wherein the light transmission material is disposed at the front side of the liquid crystal display device, at least the front is formed as a convex curved surface. A gaming machine A1 comprising a front member made of:

  Here, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device that is disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and an object that emits light and emits the light (eg, a player's hand) 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine equipped with a sensor device (motion sensor) that detects the presence of an object on the front side of a liquid crystal display device by receiving reflected light is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-208139). In this case, if the sensor device is exposed so as to be visible to the player, the interest of the player is impaired. For this reason, the sensor device is arranged on the back side of the decorative member, and is difficult to be visually recognized by a player. When the sensor device emits light and detects the presence of an object by receiving light reflected by the object through the opening portion on the side of the decoration member, the sensor device detects the presence of the object on the side of the decoration member. The further away from the part (retreating to the back side), the more difficult it is for the player to see, but the range in which the object can be detected becomes narrower, and the sensor device is opened to the side of the decorative member. The closer the object is, the wider the range in which the object can be detected, but the easier it is for the player to visually recognize the object. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for a player to visually recognize the sensor device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the sensor device emits light from the sensor device because it is provided on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, and has at least the front surface formed as a convex curved surface and the front member made of a light transmitting material. The reflected light can be reflected by the front member to reach the object, and the light reflected by the object can be reflected by the front member to reach the sensor device. Therefore, since the sensor device can be disposed apart from the opening portion on the side of the decorative member (retracted to the back side), the sensor device is hardly visually recognized by the player, and the object is removed. A detectable range can be secured. In addition, since the front member is made of a light-transmitting material, visibility of a symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be secured.

  Further, since the front surface is a convex curved surface, when light emitted from the sensor device is reflected at the front of the front member, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) is set to be more acute at a position close to the sensor device. On the other hand, at a position far from the sensor device, the angle of reflection (each reflection) can be made more obtuse, and the range in which an object can be detected can be increased accordingly. The same applies to the case where the light reflected by the object is reflected at the front of the front member.

  The gaming machine A2, wherein in the gaming machine A1, the thickness of at least a portion of the front member formed as the curved surface is set to a substantially constant value.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the thickness of at least the portion formed as the curved surface of the front member is set to a substantially constant value, so that the front member acts as a convex lens. And the visibility of the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be ensured. In addition, since a space can be formed on the back side of the front member, a space for displacing another member (a displaceable member) can be secured accordingly.

  The gaming machine A2 includes a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between the liquid crystal display device and the front member, wherein the front member has a first portion of a peripheral edge of the front member closer to the front than a second portion. A gaming machine A3, wherein the gaming machine A3 is disposed at a position where:

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A2, the front member is disposed at a position where the first part of the peripheral edge of the front member is closer to the front than the second part, so that the game is played. The first portion can be used as a passage when the displacement member is displaced between the back side of the board and the back side of the front member. On the other hand, since the second portion of the peripheral edge of the front member is located on the back side of the first portion, the curvature of the front member can be increased in a limited space accordingly.

  The first portion of the front member is disposed substantially at the same position as the back of the game board or at a position closer to the front than the back of the game board, and the second portion of the front member is located at a position higher than the back of the game board. A gaming machine A4, which is provided at a position on the back side.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A3, the first portion of the front member is disposed substantially at the same position as the rear surface of the game board or at a position closer to the front side than the rear surface of the game board. Interference of the displacement member with the first portion can be more reliably suppressed, and the size of the displacement member can be increased accordingly. In addition, since the second portion of the front member is disposed at a position on the back side of the back of the game board, the curvature of the front member can be further increased, and accordingly, the front of the front member is exposed to light. It can be easily used as a reflective surface. That is, it is possible to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making the sensor device hard to be visually recognized by a player.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, a center frame is provided at an inner edge of an opening of the gaming board, and the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable between a back side of the gaming board and a back side of the front member. A gaming machine A5, comprising: a main body member, and a rotating member rotatably disposed on the main body member, wherein a second portion of the front member is connected to the center frame.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3 or A4, the second portion is connected to the center frame, so that the displacement member (main body member) is displaced to the back side of the front member and the rotating member is rotated. The wind generated by this can be blocked by the second portion (front member). As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of the sphere from being affected by the action of the wind. Further, even when wind is generated by the rotation of the rotating member and dust or dust is blown off by the wind, the dust or dust can be blocked by the second portion (front member). -It is possible to suppress the occurrence of soaring on the optical path of the received light and a decrease in detection accuracy.

  In the gaming machine A5, the center frame includes a stage on which a ball is formed to be rollable, and a second portion of the front member is connected to a range including at least the stage of the center frame. Gaming machine A6.

  Here, there is conventionally known a stage of a center frame in which a back wall is erected so that a ball rolling on the stage does not fall to the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating member wraps around the front end from the standing end of the back wall erected from the stage, or is folded back by the glass plate on the front side of the game board. Influence the ball rolling on the stage. On the other hand, in order to prevent the ball rolling on the stage from being affected by the wind, the rear wall is curved to the front side so as to cover the periphery of the stage ball (that is, a closed passage is formed). Since it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the stage, the interest of the game is spoiled.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A5, the second portion of the front member is connected to at least the area including the stage of the center frame, so that the rotating member is rotated. The wind generated by this can be blocked by the second portion (front member). As a result, since there is no need to cover the periphery of the stage, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the stage and to suppress the influence of the wind from affecting the flow of the ball.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the first portion of the front member is disposed at a predetermined interval from an inner edge of the opening of the gaming board or a center frame.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in any one of the gaming machines A5 and A6, the first portion of the front member is disposed at a predetermined interval from the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board or the center frame. Further, the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member can be communicated with each other via the predetermined interval. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat generated from the displacement member (the main body member or the rotating member) from being trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of a peripheral edge of the front member.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in the vertically upper region of the periphery of the front member, so that the rotating member is rotated. Can be caused to flow toward an upper region (a region above the opening of the game board) of the game area, and it is possible to suppress the influence of the wind from affecting the flow of the ball. That is, the ball that flows down the upper area of the game area is an initial ball that has been fired from the firing device and flowed into the game area, and has a relatively high speed. Less susceptible to wind than a moving ball. In other words, the wind can flow toward an area where the ball is less likely to be affected by the wind. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotating member can be increased accordingly, and the effect can be improved.

  Here, when heat is generated from the displacement member (the main body member or the rotating member), the air heated by the heat is raised, and the first portion of the front member is located on the upper side in the vertical direction of the peripheral edge of the front member. The gap (predetermined interval) formed in the region, that is, the communication between the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member can be formed more upward. As a result, heat generated from the displacement member (the main body member or the rotating member) is easily flowed to the front side of the game board and the front member through the gap, and the heat is trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member. Can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine A9 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, wherein a front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed at least below the horizontal direction.

  Here, since the front member is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, it is almost faced to the face of the player (facing directly in front). Therefore, when the front of the front member is formed as a convex curved surface, light from fluorescent lights and other gaming machines installed on the ceiling in the store is reflected toward the player, and the player feels dazzling, The visibility of the liquid crystal display device may be degraded (the liquid crystal display device may be difficult to see due to the reflection of fluorescent lights and other game machines on the front member).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines A1 to A8, the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed at least below the horizontal direction. The light incident on the front of the front member can be reflected downward. That is, when light from a fluorescent lamp or another gaming machine installed on the ceiling in the store is incident on the front of the front member, such light can be suppressed from being reflected toward the player, and as a result, It is possible to suppress that the player feels dazzling and that the visibility of the liquid crystal display device is deteriorated.

  In the gaming machine A9, a first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of a peripheral edge of the front member, and the front member has a thickness dimension of at least a portion formed as the curved surface. The gaming machine A10, wherein the gaming machine A10 is set to a constant value, and the horizontal component increases as the front is positioned vertically upward.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, the first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of the periphery of the front member, and the front member is formed at least as a curved surface. The thickness dimension of the portion is set to a substantially constant value, and the horizontal component increases as the front is positioned vertically upward, so that the air heated by the heat generated from the displacement member (the main body member or the rotating member) Can be raised along the back surface of the front member, and the raised air (heat) can be transferred to a first portion of the front member (a gap (predetermined space) that allows the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member to communicate with each other. Of the game board and the front side of the front member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the heat from being trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the sorting device 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass, and a bent portion formed in a part of the passage member, the passage member includes an opening formed in a side wall of the bent portion. A gaming machine B1 characterized by the following.

  Here, a game machine provided with a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-97764). In this case, a bent portion may be formed in a part of the passage member. By forming the bent portion, the direction in which the ball is thrown (the position at which the ball flows out from the passage to the game area) can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, when a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the flow of the ball in the bent portion is likely to be delayed. Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass through the bent portion in a continuous state, the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, and the following ball presses the preceding ball against the side wall, so that both cannot roll. However, there is a problem that ball clogging may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the passage member has the opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, when a plurality of balls pass through the bent portion in a state where a plurality of balls are connected in series, the passage member is placed behind the preceding ball. Even if the running ball catches up, the preceding ball can be hardly pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion connected to the downstream side of the first portion and having the first portion and the sphere passing in different directions. Means the range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a passage extending linearly, a passage extending curvedly curved, or May be combined.

  In the gaming machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member includes a vertical passage extending in a substantially vertical direction, and an extension passage extending downward and inclined from the vertical passage, and the opening is formed in the vertical direction. A gaming machine B2 formed in a region where a passage and the extension passage intersect.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member has a vertical passage extending in a substantially vertical direction, and an extending passage extending downward and inclined from the vertical passage. The opening is formed in a region where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect, so that occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In other words, the area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is a position where the ball that has flowed down (falled) down the vertical passage changes direction and starts rolling in the extending direction of the extended passage, The ball following the ball is easy to catch up. Therefore, when the following ball presses the preceding ball against the side wall, the two cannot roll and the ball tends to be clogged. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, since the opening is formed in the area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball remains on the side wall. Pressing can be made difficult, and rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B2, the opening is an area where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, and are formed on left and right side walls when the ball rolls along the extension direction of the extension passage. A gaming machine B3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the opening is an area where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect, and when the ball rolls along the extending direction of the extending passage. Are formed on the left and right side walls, even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball can be hardly pressed against the left and right side walls, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B3, an area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, and a back side when a ball rolls along a bottom wall serving as a rolling surface and an extending direction of the extended passage. A gaming machine B4, characterized in that an inclined surface descending at an angle larger than the descending inclination of the extension passage is formed on a side wall of the gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect with each other, along the bottom wall serving as a rolling surface and the extending direction of the extended passage. When the ball rolls, a slope is formed on the rear side wall that is inclined downward at an angle greater than the downward inclination of the extension passage, so that the ball flowing down (falling) in the vertical passage changes direction. When the rolling is started in the extending direction of the extending passage, the ball can be quickly rolled by utilizing the downward inclination of the inclined surface. This makes it easy for the preceding ball to roll before the following ball catches up, and the preceding ball rolls behind the ball (the ball rolls along the extension direction of the extension passage). It can be suppressed from being pressed against the side wall on the rear side), so that the rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In addition, the inclination of the inclined surface may be any one of a linear inclination, a curved inclination, and a combination thereof. Also, the angle of the descending slope of the inclined surface does not need to be larger than the angle of the descending inclination of the extension passage over the entire area of the inclined surface, and the angle of the descending inclination of at least a part of the inclined surface is extended. It is sufficient if the angle is larger than the angle of the downward slope of the passage.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, a game board having a game area formed on a front side is provided, and at least a region of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage intersects with the extended passage is the game. A gaming machine B5 provided on the front side of the board.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, at least the region where the vertical passage and the extended passage of the bent portion of the passage member intersect (that is, the portion where the opening is formed). ) Is disposed on the front side of the game board, so that if the ball is clogged at the bent portion of the passage member, the glass plate is opened to open the ball on the front side of the game board. Can be accessed from the opening. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging.

  In any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in a region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, and a height position corresponding to a radius of a sphere from a bottom wall serving as a rolling surface. A gaming machine B6 formed in a range including:

  According to the gaming machine B6, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in a region where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, and corresponds to a radius of a sphere from a bottom wall serving as a rolling surface. When the ball that flows down (falls) in the vertical passage reaches the bottom wall of the extension passage, the ball can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball can be hardly pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B6, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and at least an area of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is the game. A gaming machine B7 disposed on the front side of the board, wherein the opening is formed to have a size that allows a ball to pass through.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in any one of the gaming machines B2 to B6, at least a region of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage intersects with the extended passage (ie, a portion where an opening is formed) is a game. Since the opening is provided on the front side of the board and has a size that allows a ball to pass through, the occurrence of ball clogging can be easily suppressed.

  That is, when the size of the opening is such that the ball cannot pass, the opening can usually be used to make it difficult for the preceding ball to be pressed against the side wall. There is a case where a form in which the preceding ball is pressed against the center of the opening is formed, and the preceding ball is internally fitted (fitted) into the opening. In this case, the following rolling of the ball is hindered by the ball fitted into the opening, and ball clogging occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B7, even when a form in which the following ball presses the preceding ball toward the center of the opening is formed, the preceding ball is placed outside the passage member through the opening (on the front side of the game board). (The game area), and the preceding ball can be prevented from being fitted (fitted) into the opening. As a result, the rolling of the following ball can be continued, and the occurrence of clogging of the ball can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, the opening is formed in such a size that the ball can pass through, and the opening is disposed on the front side of the game board (that is, the game area), so that the ball flowing down the game area can be formed. The fluid can flow into the passage member from the opening. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, when a sensor that detects a winning ball is provided downstream of the bent portion, in addition to the ball that has flowed into the passage member from upstream of the bent portion, the ball that has flowed into the passage member from the opening also serves as a winning port. Can be detected. In particular, in this case, the opening (the area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect) is disposed on the front side of the game board, so that the player can visually recognize the ball flowing into the passage member from the opening. be able to.

  The gaming machine B8, wherein in the gaming machine 7, the lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated from the bottom wall of the extension passage by a predetermined distance.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7, the lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated by a predetermined distance from the bottom wall of the extension passage, so that the lower end of the inner edge of the opening and the extension passage Side wall can be left (formed) with the bottom wall. Therefore, even when the opening is formed in a size that allows the ball to pass through, it is possible to suppress the ball from unnecessarily flowing out of the passage member to the outside (game area) through the opening.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B8, the passage member is formed to be inclined downward toward the bent portion, is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion, and extends substantially linearly along the width direction of the game area. A pair of the passage members are arranged in such a position that the upstream side of the inclined passage is located at the center in the width direction of the game area and the bent portion is located outside the width direction of the game area. A gaming machine B9, wherein a winning device is located between the bent portions of the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, the passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the bent portion, is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion, and extends substantially linearly along the width direction of the game area. A pair of passage members are arranged in such a manner that the upstream side of the inclined passage is located at the center in the width direction of the game area and the bent part is located outside the width direction of the game area, and the bent parts of the pair of passage members are provided. The winning device is located during the period.

  In this case, if the angle of the descending inclination of the inclined passage is made small (the descending inclination is gradual), the falling velocity of the ball becomes low, and the ball is easily clogged at the bent portion. On the other hand, when the angle of the descending inclination of the inclined passage is increased (the descending inclination is steep), the falling velocity of the ball can be increased to prevent the ball from being clogged at the bent portion. The required space in the height direction is increased, and it is difficult to arrange the winning device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B9, since an opening is formed in the side wall of the bent portion, it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged at the bent portion, and accordingly, the angle of the descending inclination of the inclined passage is reduced accordingly ( The descending slope can be made gentler). As a result, the space in the height direction necessary for disposing the inclined passage can be suppressed, and the arrangement of the winning device can be made possible. That is, the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine B9 is an arrangement that is impossible with a conventional product, and is only possible by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion as described above. .

  In the gaming machine B9, a game board in which a game area is formed on the front side is provided, and at least a region of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is provided on the front side of the game board. A gap through which at least a ball can pass is formed between a portion of the bent portion of the passage member disposed on the front side of the game board and a lower edge portion of the game area. A gaming machine B10 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Here, an opening is formed in the center of the game board, and the player can visually recognize the liquid crystal display device through the opening. In recent years, with an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device, the opening at the center of the game board is also enlarged, so that the space between the lower edge of the opening at the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area is reduced. Therefore, in the conventional product, it is difficult to arrange a member corresponding to the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine 9 in a space between the lower edge of the opening at the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area. there were. That is, as described above, when the angle of the descending inclination of the inclined passage is small (the descending inclination is gentle), the falling velocity of the ball becomes low, and the ball is easily clogged at the bent portion. On the other hand, when the angle of the descending inclination of the inclined passage is increased (the descending inclination is steep), the falling velocity of the ball can be increased to prevent the ball from being clogged at the bent portion. The required space in the height direction is increased, and it is difficult to arrange the winning device. Further, since the arrangement position of the bent portion in the vertical direction is lowered (lowered), it is difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area, and It is necessary to provide out ports on both sides.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B9, since the opening is formed in the side wall of the bent portion, it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged at the bent portion, and accordingly, the inclination is increased. The angle of the descending inclination of the passage can be reduced (the descending inclination is made gentler). As a result, the position of the bent portion in the vertical direction can be raised (increased), so that a gap through which the ball can pass can be secured between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the out ports on both sides of the bent portion. That is, in the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine B9, the arrangement described in the gaming machine B10 is further provided (an arrangement in which a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area). Is an arrangement that is impossible with conventional products, and has only become possible by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion as described above.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the rotating unit 500 as an example>
In a gaming machine having a plurality of light emitting means, and a rotating display device for performing afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position, the rotating display device includes the plurality of light emitting units. A substrate, a main body member accommodating the substrate, and a base member rotatably supporting the main body member, wherein the main body member transmits light of the light emitting means, A gaming machine C1 comprising a plurality of through holes formed through a side wall facing in the rotation direction.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine having a plurality of light-emitting units (LEDs) and a rotary display device that performs after-image display by an after-image effect by blinking the light-emitting units according to the rotational position (for example, JP-A-2015-100385, JP-A-2005-053968, etc.).

  In this case, in the technique disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385, the light-emitting means is exposed, so that the appearance is impaired. On the other hand, in the technique of JP-A-2005-053968, the light of the light-emitting means is visually recognized through a light-transmitting member (push button). Therefore, the light emitting means is not exposed. However, in this case, even if the member (reel) on which the light emitting means is disposed is rotated, the rotation is not visually recognized, and there is no point in displaying the afterimage by the afterimage effect. That is, the same display can be performed by arranging a plurality of light emitting units vertically and horizontally in a matrix and controlling blinking of each of the light emitting units.

  Therefore, the applicant of the present application has devised a rotary display device in which a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged is accommodated in a main body member, and the main body member is rotatably supported by a base member. Publicly known). According to this, since the light emitting means is housed in the main body member, the light emitting means is hardly visually recognized, and the appearance is not impaired. Further, since the afterimage display caused by the blinking of the light emitting means is visually recognized in a state where the rotation of the main body member can be visually recognized, the interest can be enhanced. However, in this case, since the light emitting means is housed in the main body member, it has been newly found that the cooling of the light emitting means is difficult. The light emitting means (LED) and the ICs / capacitors that control the light emitting means are soldered to the board. If the heat generated when these light emitting means or the IC / capacitors cannot be sufficiently cooled, the solder melts. May cause poor contact.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the main body member is provided with the plurality of through holes formed through the side wall facing in the rotation direction. Outside air can be taken into the interior of the vehicle. Therefore, heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled.

  In the gaming machine C1, the main body member is formed in a container-like shape with an open back side.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the main body member is formed in a container shape with the back side opened, so that the outside air taken in from the through hole in the side wall can be efficiently used from the back side. Can be exhausted. Therefore, heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In addition, by exhausting air from the back side of the main body member in this way, it is possible to suppress the exhaust from affecting the sphere flowing down (or rolling the stage) in the game area.

  In the gaming machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, which has a long shape along a diametrical direction in a rotation plane of the main body member, and a front wall forming a front side is closer to an end in a longitudinal direction. A gaming machine C3 formed in a curved shape receding to the side.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view (that is, in the rotation axis direction), which has a long shape along the diametric direction on the rotation plane of the main body member. Therefore, using the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation of the main body member, the air inside the main body member can be caused to flow to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) and exhausted from the back side. Therefore, with the flow of the air, the outside air can be taken into the main body member from the rear side at and near the rotation shaft. That is, since the rotation speed is low in the rotation axis and its vicinity, the efficiency of taking in the outside air from the through hole in the side wall is low (or cannot be taken in), and the air circulation using the centrifugal force (the back surface in the rotation axis and its vicinity) The outside air is taken in from the side, and the taken-in outside air flows to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by centrifugal force to form a flow of air exhausted from the rear side in the radially outward side. be able to. As a result, heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In particular, it is possible to achieve the cooling of the light emitting means disposed on the rotating shaft and its vicinity.

  In this case, if the front wall forming the front side of the main body member has a shape parallel to the rotation plane of the main body member (that is, if the main body member has a rectangular parallelepiped shape), the longitudinal end portion (during rotation) (In the radial direction outward), the angle of the portion where the air changes direction toward the rear side is substantially a right angle, and thus a vortex is easily formed in such a portion. Therefore, the flow of air is hindered, and it becomes difficult to smoothly exhaust air from the rear side.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, since the front wall forming the front side is formed in a curved shape that recedes toward the rear side toward the longitudinal end side, the longitudinal end side (during rotation) due to centrifugal force. The air flowing to the outside (radially outward) can gradually flow to the back side, and the angle of the portion where the air flowing to the longitudinal end (radial outside) changes direction toward the back side Can be made larger than a substantially right angle, so that the formation of a vortex in such a portion can be suppressed and the flow of air can be made smooth. Therefore, the exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, it is possible to more reliably achieve cooling of the light emitting means disposed on the rotating shaft and the vicinity thereof.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open area on the back side near the rotating shaft is larger than an open area on the back side at the longitudinal end side. Machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2 or C3, the main body member has a rotation axis and an open area on the back side near the rotation axis is larger than an open area on the back side at the longitudinal end. The air inside the main body member is caused to flow toward the longitudinal end (outward in the radial direction during rotation) by using the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation, and from the rear side in the radially outward direction. By exhausting, when taking in outside air from the rotating shaft and the back side in the vicinity thereof, the taking in can be performed efficiently.

  In the gaming machine C4, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open portion on the back side near the rotating shaft formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotating shaft.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C4, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open portion on the back side near the rotating shaft formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotating shaft. With the rotation of, the external air on the rotating shaft and the rear side near the rotating shaft can be suppressed from being disturbed (flow in the rotating direction is formed). As a result, outside air can be efficiently taken in from the rotating shaft and the rear side in the vicinity thereof.

  In any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the base member may include a shaft member rotatably supporting the main body member, and the shaft member may be reduced in diameter from a back side to a back side of the main body member. A gaming machine C6.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the shaft member rotatably supporting the main body member on the base member is reduced in diameter from the back side to the back side of the main body member. Therefore, when the outside air is taken in from the rear side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft with the rotation of the main body member, the flow of the outside air along the outer peripheral surface of the shaft member can be made smooth, and the flow resistance can be reduced. As a result, the outside air can be efficiently taken in from the rear side in the vicinity of the rotation shaft and the vicinity thereof, so that the cooling of the light emitting means disposed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft and the vicinity can be more reliably achieved.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the substrate may be housed in the main body member in a posture in which a surface on which the light emitting unit is mounted or a surface on the opposite side faces a side wall of the main body member. Gaming machine C7 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the substrate is mounted on the main body in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted or the surface on the opposite side faces the side wall of the main body member. Since it is housed in the member, the outside air introduced from the through-hole formed through the side wall can be efficiently blown to the light emitting means or the IC / capacitor to enhance the heat radiation effect. As a result, heat generated when the light emitting means or the IC / capacitor operates can be effectively cooled. Further, the posture in which the substrate is accommodated in the main body member is such that the front surface or the back surface of the substrate faces the side wall of the main body member, so that the width dimension of the main body member in a front view (the dimension in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction) ) Can be reduced. As a result, in a state where the main body member (rotary display device) is stopped, visibility of the members and devices disposed on the back side thereof can be secured.

  A gaming machine C8 comprising any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, further comprising smoke generating means for generating smoke in a displacement area of the main body member of the rotary display device.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, since the smoke generating means for generating smoke is provided in the displacement area of the main body member of the rotary display device, the flashing of the light emitting means is emphasized. Can be. Also, while the rotary display device is hidden by smoke, only the blinking of the light emitting means can be visually recognized, and the effect by the light can be enhanced.

  In the conventional rotary display device, it was difficult to obtain the effect of smoke because the smoke was pushed out to the outer peripheral side with the rotation of the main body member. However, according to the present invention, the through hole was formed in the main body member. Is formed and the outside air can be circulated, so that the smoke can stay around the main body member. As a result, the light emitting means can be flickered in an atmosphere filled with smoke, and the above-described effects can be obtained.

  As a smoke generating device, for example, a type in which an aqueous or oily oil (liquid) is heated and vaporized to generate smoke (smoke), a liquid (aqueous or oily) is pressurized and diffused by a compressor, and is diffused into the air. Examples include a type in which fine particles are retained, a type in which carbon dioxide gas is ejected, and the like.

  In the gaming machine C8, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and a display panel disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and protruding forward. And a front member formed of a light transmissive material, wherein at least a main body member of the rotary display member is located between the liquid crystal display device and the front member. Machine C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C8, a gaming board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the gaming board, and a front face of the liquid crystal display device And a front member formed of a light-transmissive material and formed to be convexly curved to the front side, and at least a main body member of the rotary display member is located between the liquid crystal display device and the front member. Therefore, smoke generated from the smoke generator can be easily retained (contained) in the displacement region of the main body member. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the light-emitting means blink in an atmosphere filled with smoke to make the blinking stand out, or to make only the blinking of the light-emitting means visible while hiding the rotary display device with smoke. As a result, the effect produced by light can be enhanced. In particular, since the front member is convexly curved toward the front, smoke can be easily retained in the space on the rear side of the front member. As a result, it is possible to easily enhance the light effect using the smoke described above.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the rotating unit 500 as an example>
A base member, a main body member displaced between a first position and a second position with respect to the base member, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the main body member, wherein the main body member has at least the In a gaming machine in which the displacement member is displaced in a state where the displacement member is disposed at a first position, a rotation member rotatably supported by one of the base member or the main body member, and the main body member is disposed at the first position. And a contact member disposed on the other of the base member and the main body member so as to be able to come into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member in a state in which the main body member is disposed at the first position. The gaming machine D1 wherein the direction of displacement at the time and the direction of rotation of the rotating member are set substantially parallel.

  Here, a base member, a main body member displaced between a first position and a second position with respect to the base member, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the main body member, wherein the main body member is 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable in a state where it is arranged at a first position is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-162990).

  In this case, when the main body member is disposed at the first position and the displacement member is displaced, the main body member may rattle with respect to the base member with the displacement of the displacement member. In view of this, there is an apparatus in which engagement means for engaging the main body member and the base member is provided to suppress rattling. The engaging means is provided on one of the main body member or the base member and urged by the urging means, and is formed so as to be engageable with the engaging member, and is provided on the other of the main body member and the base member. An engaging member disposed, and using the displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member (displacement toward the first position), the engaging member is retracted while resisting the urging force of the urging means; When the member is located at the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the urging force of the urging means to engage the engaged member. Accordingly, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is regulated by the engagement of the engagement means, and the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

  However, in such a conventional engaging means, in order to bring the engaging means into the engaged state (position the main body member at the first position), the engaging member is pressed against the urging force of the urging means. Not only does it need to be retracted, but also when releasing the engagement state of the engagement means (displacing the main body member from the first position to the second position) against the urging force of the urging means. It is necessary to retreat the engaging member, and there is a problem that a driving force required for displacing the main body member with respect to the base member increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the rotating member rotatably supported by one of the base member and the main body member and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member in a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position. And a contact member disposed on the other of the base member and the main body member, so that the contact member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, so that the relative position of the main body member with respect to the base member is increased. The displacement of the main body member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed by restricting the mechanical displacement. In this case, the displacement direction when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the rotation direction of the rotating member are set to be substantially parallel, so that when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the second direction from the first position. When displacing to the position, the rotating member can be rotated in accordance with the displacement, so that the driving force required for displacing the main body member with respect to the base member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1, the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that is elastically deformable at least on an outer peripheral surface side.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that is elastically deformable at least on the outer peripheral surface side, so that the contact member abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. In this case, the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member is elastically deformed, so that the rotating member can be easily held by the contact member. This makes it difficult for the rotating member to rotate, thereby restricting the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member, thereby suppressing the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member.

  The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body exemplified by rubber, urethane, and the like. In this case, the vibration damping effect can perform a vibration damping function or a vibration insulating function of attenuating and insulating the vibration input from the main body member to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member. This is because it is possible to suppress wear and failure of various devices to be installed, loosening of a fastening portion, and the like. In particular, when the displacement member is periodically displaced (for example, when it is rotated at a relatively high speed in order to function as a versa lighter), relatively small amplitude and high frequency vibrations are generated from the main body member to the base member. Therefore, it is particularly effective to employ a viscoelastic body.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed so as to be displaceable in a radial direction, and one of the base member or the main body member is configured to move the rotating member in a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position. A gaming machine D3 comprising: an opposing member disposed so as to oppose the abutting member so as to be in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed so as to be displaceable in the radial direction, and one of the base member or the main body member has the main body member disposed at the first position. In this state, the rotating member is disposed so as to face the contact member, and the facing member is provided so as to be able to contact the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. When the contact member comes into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the outer peripheral surface on the opposite side of the rotating member can be brought into contact with the opposing member. That is, the rotating member can be sandwiched between the contact member and the facing member. This makes it difficult for the rotating member to rotate, thereby restricting the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member, thereby suppressing the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member.

  Examples of the form in which the rotating member can be displaced in the radial direction include, for example, a form in which a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member is formed so as to be displaceable in the radial direction, and a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member. The outer diameter of the shaft is smaller than the inner diameter of the insertion hole of the rotating member that receives the shaft, the outer diameter of the shaft fixed to the rotating member is smaller than the insertion hole of one of the main body member or the base member that receives the shaft. And the like.

  In the gaming machine D3, a shaft fixed to one of the base member or the main body member is provided, and the rotating member is formed of an elastic body in a ring-shaped cross section including a shaft support hole on an inner peripheral side through which the shaft is inserted. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the radial displacement of the rotating member is formed by elastically deforming the elastic body.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3, the radial displacement of the rotating member is formed by elastically deforming the elastic body, so that the base of the main body member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is formed. When the rotating member is sandwiched between the contact member and the opposing member due to the play of the member, the contact member and the opposing member are rotated by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the rotating member (elastic body). The member can be more firmly held. This makes it difficult for the rotating member to rotate, thereby restricting the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member, thereby suppressing the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member.

  In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the radial displacement of the rotating member is performed by utilizing the elastic deformation of the elastic body, the shaft inserted through the shaft support hole of the rotating member can be moved in the radial direction. It does not need to be formed as a shaft, and can be formed as a shaft fixed to one of the base member and the main body member. Thereby, the structure can be simplified, and the durability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, one of the base member or the main body member is provided with a pair of the rotation members, and the pair of rotation members is used when the main body member is disposed at the first position. A gaming machine D5 which is arranged side by side at a predetermined interval in a displacement direction.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, one of the base member and the main body member is provided with a pair of rotating members, and the pair of rotating members is the main body member. Since it is arranged side by side at a predetermined interval in the displacement direction when it is arranged at one position, it is possible to suppress the driving force required when displacing the main body member with respect to the base member, and to reduce the driving force required by the displacement of the displacement member. The rattling of the member with respect to the base member can be effectively suppressed.

  That is, when the contact member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is regulated. However, only one rotating member is brought into contact with the contact member. In this case, there is a possibility that the rotating member is rotated and the contact member is tilted, and the tilting of the contact member due to the rotation of the rotating member is a cause of the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member. Become.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, since the pair of rotating members are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval, the abutting members contact the pair of rotating members at two locations at a predetermined interval. Therefore, it is possible to make contact without rotating the rotating member, and it is possible to suppress the contact member from tilting. As a result, rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the contact member may be a contact surface on a side that receives the rotating member when the main body member of the contact surface with which the rotating member is contacted is disposed at the first position. A gaming machine D6, wherein an inclined surface is formed at an end portion so as to be inclined downward as the distance from the contact surface increases.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the contact member is used when the main body member of the contact surface with which the rotating member is contacted is disposed at the first position. Since the inclined surface is formed to be inclined downward as the distance from the contact surface is increased at the end on the side that receives the rotating member, when the main body member is disposed at the first position, the inclined surface is utilized. The rotating member can be guided to the contact surface of the contact member. Thereby, the driving force required when disposing the main body member at the first position can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the rotating member is provided on the base member, and the contact member is provided on the main body member.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, since the rotating member is provided on the base member and the contact member is provided on the main body member, the weight is relatively large. Since there is no need to provide a bulky rotating member, the weight of the main body member can be reduced, and the driving force required for displacement of the main body member can be suppressed. Further, when the rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed, the main body member on the vibration source side can be reduced in weight, so that the rattling can be easily suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the main body member, and a rotation plane of the displacement member has a contact surface that is in contact with the rotation member of the contact member. A gaming machine D8 substantially parallel to the rotating shaft of the rotating member.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the main body member, and the rotation plane of the displacement member corresponds to the rotation member of the contact member. The driving force required for disposing the main body member at the first position and displacing the main body member from the first position to the second position is substantially parallel to the contact surface to be contacted and the rotation axis of the rotating member. , And wobble of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

  That is, since the displacement form of the displacement member is rotation, the main body member tilts the rotation plane of the displacement member due to the precession movement of the displacement member (movement in which the rotation axis of the displacement member swings like a circle). Vibration is performed in a mode (mode) for causing the vibration. Therefore, since the rotation plane of the displacement member is substantially parallel to the contact surface of the contact member and the rotation axis of the rotation member, the contact surface of the contact member is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation member. It can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member from the direction. As a result, when the main body member is arranged at the first position and when the main body member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the rotating member is rotated, thereby suppressing the driving force required for the displacement of the main body member. By the contact of the contact member with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the game machine includes: a driving unit that generates a driving force; and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force to the main body member and displaces the driving force between the first position and the second position. A transmission member, a crank member having a rotating body that is rotated about a first axis by a driving force of the driving means, and a pin portion that is eccentric from the first axis of the rotating body and protrudes from the rotating body; The crank member has a guide groove in which a pin portion slides, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove to rotate about the second axis as a rotation center and to rotate the main body member with the rotation. An arm member to be displaced, and in a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position, a straight line connecting a first axis of the crank member and an axis of a pin portion is aligned with a second axis of the arm member. Pin of the crank member Gaming machine D9, characterized in that it is substantially orthogonal to the straight line connecting the axis of.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the play of the main body member can be effectively suppressed.

  Here, in the present invention, the direction of displacement when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the direction of rotation of the rotating member are set substantially parallel. Therefore, if the rattling direction of the main body member at the first position is a direction from the first position to the second position or the opposite direction, the rotating member easily rotates in such a direction. It is difficult for the rotating member to exert the effect of suppressing rattling.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D9, when the main body member is located at the first position, the straight line connecting the first shaft of the crank member and the axis of the pin portion is formed by the second shaft of the arm member and the crank shaft. Since it is substantially perpendicular to the straight line connecting the axis of the pin portion of the member, even if the main body member attempts to rotate the arm member by its displacement, no force component in the direction of rotating the crank member is formed ( That is, a dead point can be formed. That is, it is possible to suppress rattling of the main body member in the direction from the first position to the second position or in the opposite direction. Thereby, even if the direction of the backlash of the main body member is from the first position to the second position or the opposite direction (that is, the direction in which the rotating member is easy to rotate), the crank member and the arm member are at the dead center. Is formed, the backlash of the main body member can be effectively suppressed.

<Regarding the concept of the invention, taking the regulation unit 490 as an example>
In a gaming machine having a plurality of light emitting means, and a rotating display device for performing afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position, the rotating display device includes the plurality of light emitting units. A substrate, a main body member accommodating the substrate, and a base member rotatably supporting the main body member, wherein the substrate has a surface on which the light emitting means is mounted, of the main body member. A gaming machine E1 wherein the gaming machine E1 is accommodated in the main body member in a posture substantially parallel to a rotation axis.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine having a plurality of light-emitting units (LEDs) and a rotary display device that performs after-image display by an after-image effect by blinking the light-emitting units according to the rotational position (for example, JP-A-2015-100385, JP-A-2005-053968, etc.). However, in the above-described conventional technology, the posture of the substrate is such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, the rotation plane in which the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is directed toward the front side (player side)). (Parallel posture), the outer shape in a front view (viewed in the rotation axis direction) becomes large. Therefore, when the rotation of the rotary display device is stopped, there is a problem that the visibility on the back side of the rotary display device is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the rotary display device includes a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting units are arranged, a main body member for accommodating the substrate, and a base member for rotatably supporting the main body member. The substrate is accommodated in the main body member in such a manner that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member, so that the outer shape of the main body member in front view (in the rotation axis direction) is suppressed. be able to. As a result, in the state where the rotation of the rotary display device (main body member) is stopped, the visibility of the back side of the main body member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1, the rotating display device includes an opposing member disposed to oppose a surface of the substrate on which the light emitting unit is mounted.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the rotary display device includes the opposing member disposed on the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is opposed to the rotating member. The light can be reflected by the member and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. Therefore, even when the posture of the substrate is such that the surface on which the light-emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis, the light (flashing) of the light-emitting means can be visually recognized by the player, and the afterimage is displayed by the afterimage effect. Can be.

  In the gaming machine E2, the facing member includes a plurality of recesses that are recessed in a surface facing the substrate and extend in a groove shape substantially parallel to a rotation axis of the main body member. A gaming machine E3, wherein the plurality of light emitting means are respectively faced.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine E2, the opposing member has a plurality of recesses which are recessed on the surface facing the substrate and extend in a groove shape substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member. Since the plurality of light emitting means face each other in the plurality of recesses, the light emitted from each of the plurality of light emitting means passes through the plurality of recesses of the opposing member, respectively, and the front side of the rotary display device (game To the user). That is, since the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted in a state partitioned by each concave portion, the division of the light of each light emitting means can be made clear. As a result, the outer shape of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  The gaming machine E3, wherein the concave portion of the facing member includes an end partition wall for partitioning an end of the rotating display device opposite to the front side.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E3, the concave portion of the facing member has an end partition wall for partitioning the end on the opposite side to the front side of the rotary display device. The light applied to the concave portion of the opposing member can be reflected by the end partition wall and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect.

  In the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting unit toward the front side of the rotary display device, and the light emitting unit is located at a position facing the end partition wall of the recess. A gaming machine E5, which is provided.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting means toward the front side of the rotary display device, and the light emitting means is provided with the end partition of the recess. Since it is arranged at the position facing the wall, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be applied to the end partition wall, so that stronger light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotating display device. it can. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect.

  The gaming machine E6 according to any one of the gaming machines E3 to E5, wherein a part of the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member is formed as an uneven surface.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E3 to E5, the concave portion of the facing member has a part of the inner surface formed as an uneven surface. The light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device in a state of being irregularly reflected by the uneven surface and uniformly dispersed. That is, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the opening of the concave portion from being visually recognized in a state where the light is biased to a part of the opening.

  In addition, the unevenness of the uneven surface may be a surface consisting only of protrusions (projections) or a surface consisting only of recesses (dents). The projections or depressions may extend as stripes or grooves. Further, the cross-sectional shapes of the convex and concave portions may be any of a circle, an ellipse, a polygon, and a combination thereof. That is, as long as a portion higher and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (surfaces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and irregular reflection is possible, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary.

  In the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the front end of the rotary display device on the inner surface of the concave portion of the opposing member, and the inner surface of the predetermined range is A gaming machine E7 formed as a surface that is smoother than the uneven surface.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the front end of the rotary display device on the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member, Since the inner surface in the predetermined range is formed as a surface that is smoother than the uneven surface, light can be easily emitted toward the front side (the player side) of the rotary display device, and the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be achieved. The light intensity can be increased. That is, when an uneven surface is formed within a predetermined range from the front end of the rotary display device on the inner surface of the concave portion of the opposing member, light is irregularly reflected on the uneven surface, and the front surface of the rotary display device ( Where the light emitted toward the player side is reduced, the inner surface in such a predetermined range is made smoother than the uneven surface, so that irregular reflection is suppressed and the front side of the rotary display device is reduced. The light traveling toward the (player side) can be increased.

  In the gaming machine E7, the predetermined area in which the uneven surface is not formed is such that the cross-sectional area of the inner surface increases toward the front end of the rotary display device. E8.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E7, in a predetermined range where the uneven surface is not formed, the cross-sectional area of the inner surface is increased toward the front end of the rotary display device. (Ie, the diameter is increased), the light emitted toward the front side (the player side) of the rotary display device can have a wider range. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be larger than the area of the light emitting surface (irradiation surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the light emitting means can be downsized.

  In any of the gaming machines E6 to E8, the concave portions of the opposing member are arranged in a row, and the concave and convex surface arranged radially outward from the rotation axis of the main body member, The gaming machine E9, wherein a length dimension of the main body member in a direction along a rotation axis is increased.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E6 to E8, the concave portion of the opposing member is formed such that the concave and convex surfaces arranged radially outwardly from the rotation axis of the main body member increase the degree of the main body. Since the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the member is increased, the brightness (brightness of light) of each of the plurality of recesses can be made uniform.

  That is, in the rotary display device, the displacement speed (peripheral speed) becomes higher outward in the radial direction from the rotation axis (rotation center). The light of the light emitting means closer to the axis looks higher (brighter) than the light of the light emitting means farther (radially outward) from the rotation axis.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E9, the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the main body member becomes larger as the uneven surface is arranged radially outwardly from the rotation axis of the main body member. The more the concave portion (light emitting means) is separated radially outward from the rotation axis of the main body member, the more the irregular reflection by the uneven surface becomes stronger (that is, the smaller the ratio of the light which can be visually recognized by the player directly from the light emitting means). , Can be visually recognized as light of high brightness. As a result, it is possible to suppress a difference in brightness as viewed at the radially arranged position and to make the brightness (brightness of light) uniform.

  In any one of the gaming machines E3 to E9, a cover member is provided, which is covered with a front end of the rotary display device in a concave portion of the facing member and is formed of a light-transmitting material. A gaming machine E10, wherein an uneven surface is formed at least in a region facing an end of the concave portion.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E3 to E9, a cover formed of a light-transmitting material and covered by the front end of the rotary display device in the recess of the facing member. The cover member has an uneven surface at least in a region facing the end of the concave portion. Therefore, after irregularly reflecting light by the uneven surface, the front side (the player side) of the rotary display device is provided. ). That is, since the emitted light can be made wider, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be larger than the area of the light emitting surface (irradiation surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the light emitting means can be downsized.

  In any of the gaming machines E3 to E10, a plate-shaped interposed member interposed between the substrate and the opposing member is provided, and the interposed member includes the plurality of light emitting units, the plurality of recesses, A gaming machine E11 comprising a through hole formed at a position through which the game machine passes.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E3 to E10, the gaming machine E11 includes a plate-shaped interposed member interposed between the substrate and the facing member, and the interposed member includes a plurality of interposed members. Since a through-hole is formed at a position where the light-emitting means and the plurality of recesses are made to pass through, the light of each light-emitting means is surely made incident on the corresponding recess, and is prevented from being incident (leaked) on the adjacent recess. it can. As a result, the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted only from the corresponding concave portion, and the outline of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  Further, according to the gaming machine E11, since the structure for allowing the light of the light emitting means to enter the corresponding concave portion through the through hole is formed from the two members, the facing member and the interposed member, the structure is one. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where it is constituted by members. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product cost.

  In the gaming machine E11, the interposing member includes a seat portion that comes into contact with the light emitting unit, and the through hole is formed in the seat portion.

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E11, the interposed member includes a seat portion that comes into contact with the light emitting unit, and the through hole is formed in the seat portion. Can easily be made to enter the through hole, and leakage to the outside of the through hole can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect. Further, since the light of the adjacent light emitting means can be prevented from being incident on the through hole by contacting the seat with the light emitting means, the outer shape of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  In the gaming machine E12, the illuminated surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape in a front view, and the through-hole is formed in a circular cross section having an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the illuminated surface. Are arranged concentrically. A gaming machine E13.

  According to the gaming machine E13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E12, the illumination surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape in a front view, and the through-hole has a circular cross section having an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the illuminating surface. Since the irradiation surface and the through hole are formed concentrically, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be efficiently made incident on the concave portion through the through hole.

  In the gaming machine E13, the inner diameter of the through hole is increased from the substrate side to the facing member.

  According to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E13, the through hole has an inner diameter that is increased from the substrate side to the facing member, so that light emitted from the light emitting means is transmitted through the through hole. The light can be efficiently made incident on the concave portion through the through hole. In addition, since the area in contact with the light emitting means can be secured, it is possible to suppress the light of each light emitting means from leaking out of the through hole. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

  The gaming machine E15, wherein in any of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the seat is formed to protrude from a surface of the interposition member facing the substrate.

  According to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the seat is formed so as to protrude from the surface of the interposed member facing the substrate. A space can be formed between the member and the member, and heat generated by the operation of the light emitting means can be radiated.

  The gaming machine E16, wherein the interposed member is provided with a groove-shaped groove that is recessed in a surface facing the substrate and extends along a base of the seat.

  According to the gaming machine E16, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E15, the facing member is provided with a groove-shaped groove that is recessed in the surface facing the substrate and extends along the base of the seat. The heat radiation effect can be enhanced while securing the rigidity of the interposed member. That is, by forming a groove-like groove extending along the base of the seat, the area recessed in the interposed member is minimized, and the rigidity of the interposed member is ensured while the light emitting means A space can be enlarged for a portion where heat generated by the operation is particularly concentrated, and a heat radiation effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine E17, wherein in the gaming machine E15 or E16, the seat is connected to an adjacent seat and an outer peripheral surface of each other.

  According to the gaming machine E17, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E15 or E16, the seats are connected to the adjacent seats and the outer peripheral surfaces of each other, so that the rigidity of the interposed member can be increased.

  In this case, the outer peripheral surface of the seat portion may be formed in a circular shape so that the adjacent outer peripheral surfaces of the seat portions are connected to each other. As a result, the group in which the plurality of seats are connected to each other is formed with an irregular shape, so that the rigidity of the interposed member is improved by using the irregularities of the shape while securing a space and improving the heat radiation effect. Can grow.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the sorting device 4700 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising: a passage member forming a passage through which a ball can pass; and a first privilege granting unit disposed downstream of the passage member and granting a predetermined privilege as the ball passes. An opening formed on the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting unit so as to allow a ball to pass therethrough, and a ball flowing out of the opening to the game area is formed so as to pass therethrough; A second privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege with the passing of the game machine F1.

  Here, a game machine provided with a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-97764). A sensor device for detecting passage of a ball by the passage member is provided downstream of such a passage member, and when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor device, a predetermined privilege is given. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the passage member only has a function of guiding the ball toward the downstream side (sensor device), and the space required for disposition is increased, while adding interest to the game. There was a problem that it was difficult to do.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, when the ball guided to the passage member passes through the first privilege providing means, a predetermined privilege is provided by the first privilege providing means. In this case, an opening is formed on the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege providing means so as to allow the ball to pass therethrough, and the ball flowing out of the opening to the game area is formed so as to pass therethrough. Since there is provided the second privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege along with the passage of the ball, it is possible to form a form in which the ball flows out of the opening into the game area while being guided through the passage member, and the outflowing ball can be formed. When has passed through the second privilege providing means, the predetermined privilege can be provided by the second privilege providing means. Thereby, not only the form in which the ball guided to the passage member passes through the first privilege providing means, but also the form in which the ball flows out of the opening to the game area, and further, the released ball passes through the second privilege providing means. A form can be formed, and an interest can be given to the game.

  The second privilege granting means may be arranged at a position capable of receiving all of the balls flowing out of the opening into the game area, or may be arranged in accordance with the state of the ball flowing out of the opening into the game area. Some of the balls may be arranged so as to receive some of the balls and not to receive some of them.

  The privilege given by the first privilege granting unit and the privilege given by the second privilege granting unit may be the same privilege or different benefits.

  In the gaming machine F1, the passage member includes a bent portion formed in a part of the passage member, and the opening is formed in a side wall of the bent portion.

  Here, by forming a bent portion in a part of the passage member, the direction in which the ball is thrown can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, when a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the flow of the sphere in the bent portion is likely to be stagnant. Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass through the bent portion in a continuous state, the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, and the following ball presses the preceding ball against the side wall, so that both cannot roll. However, there is a problem that ball clogging occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F2, since the passage member has the opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, when a plurality of balls pass through the bent portion in a continuous state, the passage member has Even if the running ball catches up, the preceding ball can be hardly pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion connected to the downstream side of the first portion and having the first portion and the sphere passing in different directions. Means the range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a passage extending linearly, a passage extending curvedly curved, or May be combined.

  In the gaming machine F2, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member where the opening is formed is disposed on the front side of the game board. A gaming machine F3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member where the opening is formed is disposed on the front side of the game board. When the ball is clogged, the ball can be accessed from the opening on the front side of the game board by opening the glass plate. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging. Further, when the game ball flows out of the opening of the passage member into the game area, the outflow mode can be visually recognized by the player, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine F4 is characterized in that at least the entrance of the second privilege granting means is disposed on the front side of the gaming board.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F3, since at least the entrance of the second privilege means is disposed on the front side of the gaming board, the gaming ball flows out of the opening of the passage member to the gaming area. In doing so, the mode in which the outflowed ball enters the entrance of the second privilege granting means can be visually recognized by the player, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the second privilege providing means is connected to the passage member, and a connection path for guiding a ball passing through the second privilege providing means to the passage member is provided. A gaming machine F5 connected to the passage member upstream of the first privilege providing means.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines F1 to F4, a connection passage is provided for connecting the second privilege granting means to the passage member and guiding the ball passing through the second privilege granting means to the passage member. Since the connection passage is connected to the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting means, the ball flows out of the opening into the game area while being guided by the passage member, and the ball that flows out is the first ball. When the ball has passed through the two privilege granting means, the ball can be guided to the passage member through the connection passage so as to pass through the first privilege granting means. Therefore, in addition to the grant of the privilege by the second privilege granting means, the privilege can be granted by the first privilege granting means, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, a distributing means for alternately distributing the entered ball to one and the other is provided, and the pair of passage members are provided in a pair, and one of the pair of passage members is provided with the vibration member. A gaming machine F6 connected to one of the distributing means and the other connected to the other of the distributing means.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the game machine F6 further includes a distributing means for alternately distributing the entered ball to one and the other, and a pair of passage members are provided. Since one of the passage members is connected to one of the distribution means and the other is connected to the other of the distribution means, the balls can enter the passage member one by one. That is, it is possible to suppress a plurality of balls from continuously entering the passage member, so that clogging of the balls in the passage member can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine K1 wherein any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17 and F1 to F6 is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17, and F1 to F6, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17 and F1 to F6, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Gaming machine K3 characterized by the following. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 81 3rd design display device (liquid crystal display device)
416 shaft support (second shaft)
417 Projection (1st axis)
430 Displacement member (arm member)
431 Sliding hole on drive side (sliding groove)
441 Drive motor (drive means)
443 Transmission gear (crank member)
443a Projection (pin part)
450 Decoration member (displacement member)
452 front base (body member)
452h Contact surface (contact member)
491c bulge (opposite member)
492 Roller member (rotating member)
492b Shaft (shaft)
500 rotation unit (rotation display device)
510 Top base (part of body member)
512, 522 Blow hole (through hole)
520 Lower surface base (part of body member)
531 Base material (base)
532 LED (light emitting means)
540 Intermediate plate (interposed member)
543 Irradiation hole (through hole)
544 Irradiation regulation part (seat part)
546 Groove 550 Front cover (transmission part, cover member)
560 Reflector (opposite member)
563a Inclined surface (opposing member)
570 Rotation transmission unit (base member, shaft member)
610 frame (center frame)
621 Cover member (front member)
621a First part 621b Second part 630 Sensor (sensor device)
640a Second winning device (winning device)
740 Passage member (bending member)
742 Guide (Slope)
743 Lower protruding part (bent part)
744 opening KR1 first throwing path (vertical path)
KR2 Second throwing path (extended passage)
KR3 Third throwing path (part of the inclined passage)
KR4 4th throwing path (part of inclined path)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Given in the gaming machine of the pachinko machine or the like, a base member, a body member which is formed to be Displacement with respect to the base member, and a displacement member which is displaceably arranged in its body member, the body member 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable in a state where it is arranged at a position is known (Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-162990 A

  However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that a driving force required for displacing the main body member with respect to the base member increases.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a driving force required when displacing a main body member with respect to a base member. And

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve this purpose, the base unit and a body unit which is formed to be Displacement with respect to the base means, the displacement means is displaceably disposed on the body section Wherein the displacement means is displaced in a state where the main body means is disposed at least in a predetermined position, and is disposed rotatably on one of the base means and the main body means and displaceable in a radial direction. a rotation means which is, the abutment means body means is disposed on the other of the front SL base means or body means contactable to be opposed to the outer peripheral surface of said rotating means in a state of being disposed in the predetermined position Wherein the displacement direction when the main body means is disposed at the predetermined position and the rotation direction of the rotating means are set substantially parallel, and one of the base means or the main body means that the main body means Placed in position In state, said across the rotating means is disposed abutment means and the counter, Ru provided with a counter means that is facing to be brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating means.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the driving force required when the main body member is displaced with respect to the base member can be suppressed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a regulation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a roller member. (A) is a side view of the regulation unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the regulation unit along line XXc-XXc in FIG. 20 (b). It is a front view of the up-down displacement unit in the 1st position. (A) is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit in the XXII section of FIG. 21, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along the line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. (A) to (c) are partial enlarged front views of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 23A is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 23A, and FIG. 23B is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. FIG. 23C is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along the line XXIVc-XXIVc in FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a decoration member. It is an exploded back perspective view of a decoration member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotation unit. (A) is a top view of the rotation unit, (b) is a front view of the rotation unit as viewed in the XXIXb direction of FIG. 29 (a), and (c) is a XXIXc-XXIXc of FIG. 29 (a). It is sectional drawing of the rotation unit in a line. (A) is a top view of an intermediate member, (b) is sectional drawing of the intermediate member in the XXXb-XXXb line of FIG. 30 (a). (A) is a front view of a front cover, and (b) is a partial enlarged sectional view of the front cover taken along the line XXXXb-XXXXIb in FIG. 31 (a). 32A is a top view of the reflector, and FIG. 32B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the reflector taken along line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. (A) is a top view of the rotating unit, and (b) of FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view of the rotating unit taken along line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb of (a). (A) and (b) are the elements on larger scale sectional drawing of the rotation unit in XXXIV part of FIG.33 (b). (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation unit. (A) And (b) is a top view of a rotation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a center frame. (A) is a front view of a center frame, (b) is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line of FIG. 39 (a). 39A is a cross-sectional view of the center frame taken along line XLa-XLa in FIG. 39A, and FIG. 39B is a cross-sectional view of the center frame taken along line XLb-XLb in FIG. 39A. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a rotation unit and a center frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a distribution device. It is a partial enlarged front view of a distribution device. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device along the line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 43. (A) is a sectional view of the sorting device along the line XLVa-XLVa in FIG. 43, (b) is a sectional view of the sorting device along the line XLVb-XLVb in (a) of FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device along the line XLVc-XLVc of FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device along the line XLVd-XLVd of FIG. (A) is a sectional view of the sorting device, and (b) is a sectional view of the sorting device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a light emitting decoration unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a regulation unit in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a side view of the regulation unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the regulation unit taken along line XLIXc-XLIXc in FIG. 49 (b). (A)-(c) is sectional drawing of a vertical displacement unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a distribution device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front view of a distribution device. (A) is a sectional view of the sorting device along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 52, and (b) is a sectional view of the sorting device along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 52 (b). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a distribution apparatus. (A) is a front view of the sorting device in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device along the line LVb-LVb in (a) of FIG. 55, and (c) is a diagram of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the LVc-LVc line of b). It is sectional drawing of the center frame 600 as a modification.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 4 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front door. 5 and a lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front door 5 incorporates a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and is provided with a window part 5c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets 8 is arranged on the back side of the front door 5, and the front of the game board 13 is visible through the glass unit 16 on the front side of the pachinko machine 1.

  On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an upper surface open, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  The front door 5 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. At the periphery of the window 5c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 incorporating light-emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by the lighting or blinking of a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. At the upper left of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 5c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is regenerated according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to (i), whereby the ball is hit on the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 76 and 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gates 66 and 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled. See) on the back side. The base plate 60 is made of wood laminated with a thin plate material, and is formed so that various structures provided on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof cannot be seen by a player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed with a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

  The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 77 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is provided inside the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear sides. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening and the like are provided and fired) on the front surface of the game board 13. The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 76 to prevent a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and vibrates. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate in a lighting state whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the process of probable change, in a time saving operation, or in normal operation, or to indicate in a lighting state whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is changing. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and the combination of the emission colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when one of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 has a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the big hit type when it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 being in the normal state is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is in effect (the state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable changes or during working hours, not only is the probability of hitting the second symbol increased, but also the time during which the first motor-operated accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, so that it is longer than normal. The time is set. When the first motor-operated accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the first electric auditors specialty 640a is directed to the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the first electric auditors-care article 640a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is ready to win. Therefore, during a probability change or during a shortened working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  It is to be noted that, during probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit Thus, a change may be made to increase the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened from the normal operation. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the first electric accessory is opened once. At least one of the number of times the 640a opens may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened, and the first electric accessory 640a and the second electric accessory 82 are opened each time. The number of hits may not be performed, and only the hit probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be increased as compared with the normal pattern.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning (starting winning) of one of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 as a trigger to synchronize with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for performing symbol variation display, and a variation symbol display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the spheres of the first through gates 66 and 67 as triggers. And a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of an LED that emits light.

  A center frame 600 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from an opening opening at the center of the center frame 600.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large-sized 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  Each time the ball passes through the first through gates 66 and 67, the second symbol display device displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as display symbols (second symbols (not shown)) for a predetermined time. The variable display for alternately lighting is performed. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gates 66 and 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, the number of chances of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the first motor-driven accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during probable change and during working hours.

  In addition, the second winning opening during the probable change or during the working hours, such as increasing the probability of winning during the probable change or during the working hours, or by increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the first electric accessory 640a per hit. In the case where the ball is likely to win the 640 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. May be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gates 66 and 67 are mounted on the game board in the regions on both sides of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gates 66 and 67 are configured so that, of the balls fired on the game board, some of the balls flowing down the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the first through gates 66 and 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gates 66 and 67 is retained up to a total of four times, the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and a second symbol retaining lamp (FIG. (Not shown). Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls through the first through gates 66 and 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less or five or more (for example, eight). Is also good. The number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, but may be three or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in front view, a second winning opening 640 where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 ( (See FIG. 4), a jackpot lottery is performed, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports where five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are the same. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first winning opening 64. May be configured such that the number of award balls to be paid out when the player wins is three, and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640.

  The first winning combination 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The first electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the first electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and the ball is difficult to enter the second winning opening 640. I have. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gates 66 and 67, the first electric accessory is displayed. 640a is in an open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric auditors product 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Further, during the probable change or during the shortened working hours, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during the normal working hours. Therefore, a state in which a ball can be more easily won in the second winning opening 640 can be created during probable change or during working hours, as compared with normal times.

  Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first motor-operated accessory 640a as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where it can win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, a person who shoots a ball so that the ball passes on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, obtains a lot of jackpot lottery opportunities by winning in the first winning opening 64, and aims to become a jackpot, This is advantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, during probable change or during working hours, by passing the ball through the first through gates 66 and 67, the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state. Since the winning is easy, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device unit 80, passes through the first through gates 66 and 67, and passes through the first through gate 66, 67. It is more advantageous for the player to set the electric accessory 640a in the open state and to aim for a 15R certain-change big hit by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether the pachinko machine 1 is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to one of the first prize port 64 and the second prize port 640 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to become a symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. It may be on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided a sticking space K 1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label, and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K 1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 640, and 82 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out port 71. You. The first out port 71 is provided below the first winning port 64.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 441 and 457.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, power outage signal SG1 is output to main controller 110 and payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  Note that FIG. 7 shows a state in which the displacement members 430 disposed on both left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 are respectively displaced to the retracted positions. In FIG. 8, displacement members disposed on both left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 are shown. The state in which the members 430 have been respectively displaced to the overhang positions is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the rear case 300, a vertical displacement unit 400 is provided above and a light emitting decoration is provided below. Units 800 are provided, respectively.

  The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from four outer edges of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. One side (front side) is formed in an open box shape. A rectangular opening 301a as viewed from the front is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

  The vertical displacement unit 400 includes a rear base 420 formed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300 and having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, a displacement member 430 and a decorative member disposed displaceably on the rear base 420. 450, and a projecting position in which the displacement member 430 and the decorative member 450 are retracted above the rear case 300 and a projecting portion that projects to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case (that is, the third symbol display device 81). Position (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the rotation unit 500 is provided on the decoration member 450, and the rotation unit 500 is rotated, and the LED of the irradiation unit 530 provided on the rotation unit 500 emits light. And symbols can be displayed. Details of such a structure will be described later.

  The light-emitting decoration unit 800 mainly includes a base body 810 and a light-emitting device 820 disposed on the front side of the base body 810, and emits light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 821 disposed inside the light-emitting device 820. By changing the mode (for example, the number of LEDs 821 to be illuminated), an effect by light emission is performed. The details will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 47, the detailed configurations of the vertical displacement unit 400, the rotation unit 500, the center frame 600, the sorting device 700, and the light emitting decoration unit 800 will be described. First, the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 9 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400. 11 and 13 are front perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 12 and 14 are rear perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 to 14, the vertical displacement unit 400 includes a front base 410 having a substantially L shape in a front view, a rear base 420 overlapped on the rear side of the front base 410, and a front side of the front base 410. , A displacement member 430 that is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441, and connected to one end of the displacement member 430 in the up and down direction (up and down in FIG. 9) with the displacement of the displacement member 430. Direction), a front cover 460 disposed in front of one end of the front base 410, and a decoration member disposed in a gap between the front cover 460 and the front base 410 facing each other. A guide rod P1 for guiding the sliding of the decorative member 450, a side wall member 470 provided at the left and right ends of the decorative member 450 to regulate the displacement of the decorative member 450, and a front surface of the front base 410. A rotation regulating member 480 which is disposed are formed mainly includes.

  In the vertical displacement unit 400, all members except for the decorative member 450 are arranged in a symmetrical pair, and the decorative member 450 is interposed between the pair of opposed members. Further, the detailed description of the members arranged in a pair describes only the members arranged on the left side when viewed from the front (the left side in FIG. 9), and the members arranged on the right side (the right side in FIG. 9) when viewed from the front include The same reference numerals are given to the members on the left side as viewed from the front, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The front base 410 is formed of a substantially L-shaped plate-like body as viewed from the front, and has a first piece 410X forming a long side of the substantially L shape and a first piece 410X forming a short side of the substantially L shape. It is mainly provided with two pieces 410Y.

  The first piece 410X is arranged so that its extending direction is parallel to the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 9). Further, the first piece 410X has a standing portion 412 erected on the front side of an outer end portion (left end portion) in the left-right direction, an upper concave groove 413 recessed in an arcuate cross section at an upper portion, and a cross section at a lower portion. And a lower concave groove 414 formed in an arc shape.

  The upright portion 412 is a wall that abuts on a sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 to be described later and regulates the rearward displacement of the decorative member 450, and extends from an upper portion to a lower portion of the left edge of the first piece 410X. It is formed.

  The upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 are grooves into which a guide rod P1 described later is internally fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. The upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 are formed such that axes formed in a semi-circular cross section are located on the same straight line, and the lower concave groove 414 extends from the upper end of the upper concave groove 413. Is set to be larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. Thereby, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be fitted in the upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414.

  The second piece 410Y is formed in a vertically long rectangle in a front view, and has an opening 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center thereof, an engaging portion 415 projecting to the rear side, and a shaft supporting portion 416 projecting in a cylindrical shape to the rear side. It is formed mainly in preparation.

  The opening 411 is an opening through which the shaft of the drive motor 441 attached to the front side of the front base 410 is inserted into the back side of the front base 410, and a transmission gear fitted to the shaft of the drive motor 441. The inner diameter is formed larger than the outer shape of 442. Thus, when the drive motor 441 fails due to deterioration or the like, the drive motor 441 can be removed from the front base 410, and the transmission gear 442 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 400 through the opening 411. As a result, after the transmission gear 442 is attached to the shaft of the new drive motor 441, the transmission gear 442 can be disposed by inserting the opening 411, so that the shaft of the drive motor 441 can be This can be performed more easily than when the drive motor 441 is arranged on the front base 410 while being inserted into the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 arranged between the opposed sides of the transmission gear 443, and the number of steps for replacing parts is reduced. be able to. Further, in this case, since the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 can be securely fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441, the reliability at the time of component replacement can be improved.

  The engaging portion 415 is a protrusion for locking one end of a torsion spring SP1 described later, and protrudes from the back side of the second piece 410Y, and its protruding tip is bent to the center in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400. It is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section. Accordingly, the rotation of the torsion spring SP1 around the axis can be restricted by the protruding portion toward the rear side, and the displacement of the torsion spring SP1 toward the rear side can be restricted by the bent portion at the tip.

  The shaft support portion 416 is a cylindrical rod member made of a metal material, and has one end fitted to the back side of the front base 410.

  The drive motor 441 is a motor that applies a driving force to the vertical displacement unit 400, and is disposed on the front base 410 as described above, and is a transmission gear 442 disposed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420. , 443.

  As described above, the transmission gear 442 is a gear whose shaft hole is externally fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 and is connected to the drive motor 441, and is provided in mesh with the transmission gear 443.

  The transmission gear 443 is a gear that is rotatably disposed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 with its shaft hole fitted inside the projection 417 of the front base 410, and as described above, The gear 442 is arranged in mesh with the gear 442. Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor 441 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 443 via the transmission gear 442.

  In addition, the transmission gear 443 includes a protrusion 443a that protrudes from a rear side surface. The protrusion 443a is a rod member formed of a metal material and formed in a columnar shape, and is disposed on the outer peripheral edge of the transmission gear 443. Therefore, when the driving force is applied to the driving motor 441 to rotate the transmission gear 443 as described above, the projection 443a is displaced in an arc shape about the axis of the transmission gear 443.

  The rear base 420 is a plate member formed to have substantially the same external shape as the front view shape of the second piece 410Y of the front base 410, and includes an upright portion 421 that stands upright on the outer edge.

  The erected portion 421 is a wall for forming a gap between the front base 410 and the back base 420 facing each other, and the erected distance is larger than the longitudinal dimension of the combined displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443. It is set to have a large size, and is disposed in a state where the front end face is in contact with the rear side of the front base 410. As a result, a gap for disposing the transmission gears 442 and 443 and the later-described displacement member 430 can be formed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 facing each other.

  The displacement member 430 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially box shape whose outer edge portion protrudes rearward. Further, the displacement member 430 has a through hole 433 formed in the bent portion in a circular shape in the front-rear direction, a decoration-side sliding hole 432 formed in one side of the long side in the front-rear direction, and a short side side. It mainly includes a drive-side sliding hole 431 formed through the other side in the front-rear direction, and a displacement-side engaging portion 434 protruding from a protruding portion of the outer edge portion on one side of the long side.

  The through hole 433 is a hole into which the shaft support 416 of the front base 410 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support 416. Therefore, after the through-hole 433 is inserted into the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410, the front base 410 and the rear base 420 are combined, so that the displacement member 430 can be displaced with respect to the front base 410. Can be arranged.

  The drive-side sliding hole 431 is a long hole into which the projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 is inserted, and the width in the short direction is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the projection 443a. The drive-side sliding hole 431 has a longitudinal direction formed in the same direction as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) on the short side of the displacement member 430, and as described above, the transmission gear 443 causes the driving force of the drive motor 441 to move. When the rotation of the transmission gear 443 is performed, the projection 443 a of the transmission gear 443 slides inside the driving-side sliding hole 431 with the displacement, thereby rotating the displacement member 430 about the through hole 433. That is, by driving the drive motor 441, the displacement member 430 can be displaced around the through hole 433.

  The decoration-side sliding hole 432 is a long hole that is provided in a decoration member 450 to be described later and through which a columnar supporting portion 452a is inserted, and whose width in the short direction is the outer diameter of the supporting portion 452a. It is formed larger than. The decoration-side sliding hole 432 has a longitudinal direction formed in the same direction as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) on the long side of the displacement member 430. As described above, when the displacement member 430 is rotated about the through-hole 433, the decoration-side sliding hole 432 has an arc-shaped displacement locus about the through-hole 433.

  The displacement-side engaging portion 434 is a protrusion that engages the other end of the torsion spring SP1 described later, and is formed to protrude from an inner peripheral surface of an outer edge portion provided on the rear side of the displacement member 430. In addition, the displacement-side engaging portion 434 is formed on a side surface inside the bend of the displacement member 430 that is bent into a substantially L shape in a front view. Accordingly, the other end of the torsion spring SP1 can be engaged with the displacement side engaging portion 434 inside the displacement member 430 on the back side.

  The torsion spring SP1 has its torsion portion disposed around the through hole 433 (the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410) of the displacement member 430, and rotates counterclockwise around the rotation axis of the displacement member 430 (vertical displacement unit). One end of the displacement member 430 that constitutes the right side of the front view 400 is applied to the engaging portion 415 of the front base 410, and the other end is a displacement member. 430 are engaged with the displacement side engagement portions 434, respectively. As a result, the displacement member 430 rotates counterclockwise around the axis of the through hole 433 (the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410) with respect to the front base 410 (the displacement member 430 configuring the right side of the vertical displacement unit 400 in front view rotates clockwise). )).

  As described above, the decorative member 450 is a member interposed between a pair of opposing vertical displacement units 400 configured as a pair of left and right sides, and has a front base whose size in the left-right direction is symmetrically disposed. It is set to be the same as the distance between the outer ends in the left-right direction of 410.

  The decorative member 450 is formed in a U-shape as viewed from the front with its lower side open, and includes a front base 452 constituting a central portion thereof, a sliding portion 451 connected to both left and right ends of the front base 452, and a front base. It is formed mainly including a back base 453 that covers the back of the 452 and a rotation unit 500 that is rotatably arranged on the front side of the front base 452.

  The front base 452 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body as viewed from the front, and has a U-shaped cross section in which upper and lower end faces are bent to the back side. The front base 452 includes a support portion 452a protruding from the rear side, an engagement portion 452b protruding from both ends in the left-right direction to the front side, and a contact surface 452h formed smoothly on the front side at both ends in the left-right direction. And an inclined surface 452g formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h.

  As described above, the support portion 452a is a rod member inserted into the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430, and is formed in a cylindrical rod-like body. As a result, the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the motor 441, and when the decoration side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is rotationally displaced around the through hole 433, the displacement member 430 is inserted into the decoration side sliding hole 432. The support portion 452a is displaced with the displacement of the decoration-side sliding hole 432. As a result, the decorative member 450 can be displaced by displacing the support portion 452a.

  The engagement portion 452b is a projection to which the other end of the urging spring SP2 described later is engaged, and is formed in a hook shape from the front side of both ends of the front base 452.

  The contact surface 452h is a smooth surface that is in contact with a roller 492a of the regulating unit 490 described later, and is formed on a smooth surface on which the roller 492a can roll. The inclined surface 452g is a surface that is inclined downward from the front side to the rear side at the lower end portion of the contact surface 452h. Thereby, it is possible to easily bring a regulation unit 490 described later and the decorative member 450 into contact with each other. The detailed description of the contact between the regulating unit 490 and the decorative member 450 will be described later.

  The sliding portion 451 is a rod-shaped body having a rectangular cross section extending in the up-down direction, and is provided so as to be connected to both left and right ends of the front base 452. In addition, the sliding portion 451 includes a through hole 451a that opens in the vertical direction. The through hole 451a is an opening through which the guide rod P1 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1.

  Accordingly, when the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the drive motor 441 and the decorative member 450 is displaced as described above, the direction of the displacement is changed by the sliding portions 451 provided at both ends of the front base 452. Be regulated. As a result, the decorative member 450 is displaced along the axial direction (vertical direction) of the guide rod P1. That is, the decoration member 450 can be slid in the vertical direction by the application of the driving force from the driving motor 441.

  The rear base 453 is a plate member that is covered on the rear side of the front base 452 at a substantially central position in the left-right direction, and is formed to have substantially the same outer size as the central portion of the front base 452 when viewed from the front. Thus, the gears 454 to 456 can be rotatably disposed in the internal space between the front base 452 and the rear base 453. A drive motor 457 that outputs a driving force for rotation and a control signal to the rotation unit 500 is attached to the back surface of the back base 453. The details of the gears 454 to 456 and the drive motor 457 will be described later.

  The front cover 460 is a member that is disposed to face the front side of the first piece 410X of the front base 410 and covers the front of the first piece 410X, and is substantially similar to the outer shape of the first piece 410X when viewed from the front. It is formed in the same shape. The front cover 460 is provided with an upright wall 461 erected from the outer edge to the back side, and is formed in a box-like body having an open back side.

  The upright wall 461 includes an upper groove forming member 462 protruding upward from a side surface forming the upper side, and a lower groove forming member 463 protruding downward from a side surface forming the lower side.

  The upper groove forming member 462 is formed at a position facing the upper concave groove 413 of the front base 410, and has a concave groove 462a which is formed in a semicircular shape on the back side. On the other hand, the lower groove forming member 463 is formed at a position facing the lower groove 414 of the front base 410, and has a concave groove 463a formed in a semicircular arc on the back side.

  The concave grooves 462a and 463a are grooves in which the guide rod P1 is internally fitted, and are concavely formed in a semicircular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. Also, the grooves 462a and 463a are formed such that the axes provided in the semicircular arc are formed on the same straight line, and the distance between the upper end of the groove 462a and the lower end of the groove 463a is opposite. It is set larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. Thereby, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be fitted in the concave grooves 462a and 463a.

  Therefore, when the front cover 460 is disposed in front of the front base 410, the guide rod P can be sandwiched between the upper concave groove 413 and the concave groove 462a and the lower concave groove 414 and the concave groove 463a. As a result, the guide rod P1 can be disposed on the front base 410 so as not to fall off. As a result, the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 into which the guide rod P1 is inserted can be held so as not to fall off the front base 410.

  Also, the distance between the front wall 461 of the front cover 460 formed on the outer side in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400 and the front-rear facing portion of the standing portion 412 formed on the first piece 410X of the front base 410. Is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the thickness of the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction, and the left and right outer ends of the sliding portion 451 are arranged between the sliding members 451. Thereby, as described above, when the decoration member 450 is displaced in the up-down direction, it is possible to suppress the decoration member 450 from rattling in the front-rear direction.

  The side wall members 470 are members disposed at both ends on the center side in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400, and are formed of a substantially L-shaped plate-like body bent rearward in a side view. Further, a wall surface bent outward in the left-right direction is formed on the front end surface of the side wall member 470, and a regulating unit 490 described later is attached to the wall surface.

  Further, the side wall member 470 is provided with a pattern on the side surface on the center side in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 9) with respect to the vertical displacement unit 400 so that the player can use the center frame 86 ( The pattern of the side wall member 470 is disposed so as to be visible through a central opening of the center member (see FIG. 2). Thereby, the vertical displacement unit 400 (for example, the front cover 460 or the like) disposed outside the side wall member 470 in the left-right direction can be made invisible to the player.

  The rotation restricting member 480 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body as viewed from the front, and has an annular roller 481 provided with a shaft in the front-rear direction on the back side so as to be rotatable. In addition, the rotation restricting member 480 has an outer shape that is substantially half the outer shape of the second piece 410Y of the front base 410 in a front view, and is provided with a predetermined gap in front of the front base 410.

  The rotation restricting member 480 is a member that returns a rotation unit 500 described later to an initial position, and can define an initial position of the rotation unit 500 by abutting the roller 481 and the upper surface base 510.

  The urging spring SP2 is a coil spring that connects the front base 410 and the decorative member 450 and urges the decorative member 450 upward. One end is engaged with the engaging portion 418 of the front base 410, and the other. The end is engaged with the engaging portion 412b of the decorative member 450. Thus, the decorative member 450 is constantly urged upward with respect to the front base 410. Therefore, when the decoration member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position by a displacement described later, the decoration member 450 can be easily displaced to the second position. Further, the biasing spring SP2 is bent along the outer peripheral surface of the roller 419 at the center. Thereby, the length of the urging spring SP2 can be secured, and the urging force can be prevented from being excessively increased.

  Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 15 to 17A are front views of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG. 15A shows a state in which the vertical displacement unit 400 is arranged at the ascending position, and FIG. FIG. 17A corresponds to the state of being disposed at the lowered position.

  15B corresponds to FIG. 15A, FIG. 16B corresponds to FIG. 16A, and FIG. 17B corresponds to the rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in FIG. . 15 (b), 16 (b) and 17 (b) show a state in which the rear base 420 is removed for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in a state where the vertical displacement unit 400 is arranged at the ascending position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as a “second position”), the displacement member 430 is one of them. The side (the long side where the decoration-side sliding hole 432 is formed) is swung up, and the decoration member 450 is positioned at the uppermost position. The support portion 452 a of the decoration member 450 is located inside the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 and close to the radially outer end from the axis of the through hole 433.

  In this state, the rotation direction of one side of the displacement member 430 (the short side where the drive-side sliding hole 431 is formed) is substantially the same as the direction of a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a. Matches. That is, a state in which the extending direction of the drive-side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 is orthogonal to the direction of a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a (the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are at the dead center). Is formed). Accordingly, the displacement member 430 cannot rotate around the through-hole 433, and the displacement member 430 can be prevented from being rotationally displaced by the weight of the decoration member 450 connected to the displacement member 430.

  15A and 15B, the pair of drive motors 441 are respectively driven to rotate, and when each transmission gear 443 is rotated, the projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 causes the displacement member 430 to rotate. The right and left displacement members 430 are respectively pushed down by sliding in the drive side sliding holes 431.

  Accordingly, the left and right displacement members 430 are rotated around the axis of the through hole 433 as the rotation center, and the decoration member 450 is displaced downward as shown in FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b). In this state, when the transmission gears 443 are further rotated by the rotational drive of the pair of drive motors 441, the left and right displacement members 430 are further pushed downward, as shown in FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b). As shown, the decorative member 450 is arranged at a lowered position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as a “first position”).

  As shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, when the vertical displacement unit 400 is located at the first position, the left and right displacement members 430 are formed on one side thereof (the drive side sliding hole 431 is formed). (Short side) is lowered, so that the decorative member 450 is located at the lowest position and protrudes to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). .

  In this case (when the vertical displacement unit 400 is located at the lowered position), the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400, and the through-hole 433 is formed. The side surface of the support portion 452a of the decorative member 450 abuts on the radially outer end side. Thus, the weight of the decorative member 450 can apply a force displacing in the gravitational direction and a force in the direction from the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400 to the center portion on the support portion 452a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decoration member 450 from rattling in the vertical and horizontal directions due to the displacement operation of the rotation unit 500 of the decoration member 450 described later.

  Further, the rotation direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the shorter side on which the drive side sliding hole 431 is formed) substantially coincides with the direction of a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a. That is, a state in which the extending direction of the drive-side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 is orthogonal to the direction of a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a (the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are at the dead center). Is formed). Therefore, the displacement member 430 cannot rotate with the through hole 433 as an axis, and when the decoration member 450 rattles in the vertical direction due to the displacement operation of the rotation unit 500 described later, the displacement member 430 is displaced by the rattling. Displacement of the member 430 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress lptp that the decoration member 450 rattles.

  In addition, regulation units 490 are arranged in front of both ends of decorative member 450. Thereby, the displacement of the decorative member 450 in the front-back direction can be regulated. The detailed description of the regulation unit 490 will be described later.

  Next, the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 18 is an exploded front perspective view of the regulating unit 490, and FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the roller member 492. 20A is a side view of the regulation unit 490, FIG. 20B is a rear view of the regulation unit 490, and FIG. 20C is a view taken along line XXc-XXc in FIG. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the regulation unit 490.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the regulating unit 490 includes a case member 491 formed in a box shape having an open back side, a roller member 492 disposed inside the case member 491, and a case member 491. And an outer edge member 493 disposed on an open (open side) outer edge.

  The case member 491 includes a protruding portion 491a protruding from the front side surface, a notch portion 491b cut out in a semicircular shape on both left and right side surfaces, and a bulging rear surface from the inner side surface facing the opening. Bulging portion 491c.

  The protruding portion 491a is a projection for fastening the case member 491 to the above-described side wall member 470. A fastening hole is formed in the front side, and a screw is fastened to the fastening hole from the front side via the side wall member 470. By doing so, the regulating unit 490 can be disposed on the side wall member 470.

  The cutout portions 491b are formed by vertically cutting two semicircular cutouts on both lateral sides of the case member 491 in the left-right direction. The cutout portion 491b is a cutout for inserting the collar 492c of the roller member 492 therein, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the collar 492c of the roller member 492.

  The bulging portion 491c is formed to bulge from below the center in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 20C) of the side surface (the rear surface of the front wall) facing the open side of the case member 491. The bulging portion 491c has a predetermined gap between the bulging portion 491c and the roller 492a of the roller member 492.

  The roller member 492 includes a roller 492a formed from an elastic member into an annular shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the axis, a shaft 492b inserted into the roller 492a, and both sides of the roller 492a supported by the shaft 492b. And a pair of retaining rings E1 externally fitted to the shaft portion 492b outside the collar 492c.

  The shaft portion 492b is a member that is inserted into the inner periphery of the roller 492a, is formed in a columnar shape substantially the same as the inner diameter of the inner periphery of the roller 492a, and has an axial dimension between the lateral sides of the case member 491 in the left-right direction. Is set to be larger than the width dimension. In addition, concave portions 492b1 that are recessed in the axial direction are formed at both axial ends of the shaft portion 492b. The concave portion 492b1 is formed over the entire circumference of the shaft portion 492b, and has an outer diameter in the axial direction smaller than an inner diameter of a retaining ring E1 described later.

  The collar 492c is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, is formed in a substantially stepped shape in cross section, and includes a small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 and a large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 having an outer diameter larger than the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1. Further, the inner diameter of the collar 492c (the inner diameter of the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2) is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b, and the shaft portion 492b can be inserted therein.

  The small-diameter tube portion 492c1 is a portion that is fitted inside the notch portion 491b of the case member 491, and as described above, the outer diameter of the small-diameter tube portion 492c1 is larger than the inner diameter of the notch portion 491b of the case member 491. Is done.

  The large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 is a member for regulating displacement in the left-right direction when the roller member 492 is disposed on the case member 491, and the outer diameter of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 is a notch of the case member 491. It is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the portion 491b. The distance between the axially outer side surfaces of the pair of large-diameter cylindrical portions 492c2 provided at both axial ends of the roller 492a is larger than the distance between the opposing left and right side surfaces inside the opening of the case member 491. Are also formed smaller.

  The retaining ring E1 is an E-ring (E-shaped retaining ring), and is fitted around the concave portion 492b1 with the opening portion widened in the concave portion 492b1 of the shaft portion 492b. That is, the inner diameter of the inner circumference of the retaining ring E1 is set substantially equal to the outer diameter of the recess 492b1.

  The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, after the retaining ring E1 is externally fitted to the concave portion 492b1 on one end side of the shaft portion 492b, the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is attached to one collar 492c from the other end (the side on which the retaining ring E1 is externally fitted). ) Is inserted through the shaft 492b. Next, after the roller 492a is inserted through the shaft portion 492b from the other end, the shaft portion of the one collar 492c is oriented with the large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 facing one side (the side on which the retaining ring E1 is fitted). 492b. Thereafter, one retaining ring E1 is externally fitted to the concave portion 492b1 on the other side of the shaft portion 492b.

  As a result, the displacement of the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c supported by the shaft portion 492b between the pair of retaining rings E1 is restricted by the retaining ring E1. As a result, the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c can be prevented from coming off the shaft portion 492b.

  The outer edge member 493 is a member that is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front and is disposed on the back side (open side) of the case member 491. The outer edge member 493 has an inner peripheral shape in a front view that is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the opening of the case member 491 in a rear view. On the side surface on the front side (the case member 491 side) of the outer edge member 493, an upright portion 493a that stands upright on the front side is formed around the inner edge portion.

  The upright portion 493a is provided with a recessed portion 493a1 that is recessed on the back side. The recess 493a1 is formed at a position facing the notch 491b of the case member 491. Therefore, the roller member 492 can be disposed on the case member 491 by sandwiching the collar 492c of the roller member 492 between the notch portion 491b and the concave portion 493a1 of the case member 491.

  The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, two collars 492c arranged at both axial ends of the roller member 492 are vertically arranged in the notch portion 491b of the case member 491 so as to pivotally support the collars 492c. Next, the outer edge member 493 is fastened and fixed to the case member 491 from the back side of the case member 491 with the upright portion 493a side facing the front side (facing the case member 491 side). Thus, the roller member 492 is rotatably disposed with respect to the case member 491, and can be prevented from dropping from the case member 491.

  Next, an operation of the regulation unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400 at the first position. FIG. 22A is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the XXII section of FIG. 21. FIG. 22B is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 along the line XXIIb-XXIIb in FIG. . In FIG. 22A, the outer shapes of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are illustrated by broken lines.

  FIGS. 23A to 23C are partially enlarged front views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 24A is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 along the line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 24B is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 23B, and FIG. 24C is a sectional view taken along the line XXIVc-XXIVc in FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the displacement unit 400. FIGS. 23A to 23C show the transition state of the vertical displacement unit 400, and the outer shapes of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are shown by broken lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the vertical displacement unit 400 is located at the first position, the decorative member 450 is located below. In this case, as described above, both ends of the decorative member 450 are located on the back side of the regulating unit 490.

  In this case, when the decoration member 450 is arranged at the first position and the rotation unit 500 described later is rotated, the decoration member 450 may rattle with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement. Therefore, there is an arrangement in which an engaging means for engaging the decorative member 450 with the front base 410 is provided to prevent rattling. The engaging means is provided on one of the decorative member 450 or the front base 410 and is urged by the urging means. The engaging member is formed so as to be engageable with the engaging member. An engaging member disposed on the other side of the front base 410, and using the displacement (displacement toward the first position) of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410, the engaging member resists the urging force of the urging means. When the decorative member 450 is located at the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the urging force of the urging means and engaged with the engaged member. Thereby, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the front base 410 is regulated by the engagement of the engaging means, and the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

  However, in such a conventional engaging means, in order to bring the engaging means into the engaged state (position the main body member at the first position), the engaging member is pressed against the urging force of the urging means. Not only does it need to be retracted, but also when the engagement state of the engagement means is released (the decoration member 450 is displaced from the first position to the second position), the urging force of the urging means is opposed. Therefore, there is a problem that the driving force required when the decorative member 450 is displaced with respect to the front base 410 increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 of the decorative member 450 is in contact with the roller 492a of the restricting unit 490, the relative displacement of the front base 410 is restricted. Thus, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotary unit 500 can be suppressed.

  In this case, since the direction of displacement when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position and the direction of rotation of the roller member 492 of the regulating unit 490 are set substantially parallel, the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position. At this time, the roller member 492 of the regulating unit 490 can be rotated with the displacement, so that the driving force required to displace the decoration member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be suppressed.

  Further, since the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body that can be elastically deformed as described above, when the roller 492a of the regulating unit 490 comes into contact with the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, the outer periphery of the roller 492a By elastically deforming the surface side, the front base 452 can easily hold the roller 492a. This makes it difficult for the roller 492a to rotate, thereby suppressing rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410.

  The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body exemplified by rubber, urethane, and the like. In this case, due to the vibration damping effect, a vibration damping function or a vibration insulating function of attenuating and insulating vibration input from the decorative member 450 to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be performed. This is because it is possible to suppress wear and failure of various devices provided on the 410 side, loosening of the fastening portion, and the like. In particular, when the rotation unit 500 is periodically displaced (for example, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated at a relatively high speed in order to function as a versa lighter), relatively small amplitude and high frequency vibrations are generated from the decorative member 450. Since the input is made to the front base 410, it is particularly effective to employ a viscoelastic body.

  Further, when the decorative member 450 and the regulating unit 490 (the roller 492a) come into contact with each other, the product accuracy and the assembly error of the vertical displacement unit 400 can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the roller 492a. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the precision in molding the part, and the manufacturing cost of the part can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the product can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the collision sound when the decorative member 450 and the regulating unit 490 (the roller 492a) come into contact can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the roller 492a, it is possible to prevent the player from hearing the sound when the decorative member 450 is displaced. It is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being spoiled. Further, since the direction of the rotation axis of the roller 492a is orthogonal to the direction of displacement of the decorative member 450, the roller 492a can be rotated with the displacement of the decorative member 450, and the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a contact each other. When the members are in contact with each other and displaced, it is possible to suppress the sound of rubbing between the members. In other words, when the projection is brought into contact with the displacement member to assist the stop of the displacement member and to prevent rattling, when the displacement member is displaced in the contact state with the projection, the members rub against each other. A sound is generated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are brought into contact with each other, the roller 492a can be rotated along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450. Of the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a can be suppressed.

  Further, since the regulation of the decoration member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be performed by the regulation unit 490 of the side wall member 470 fastened and fixed to the front base 410, the regulation unit 490 which is relatively heavy is disposed on the decoration member 450. Since there is no need, it is possible to reduce the weight of the decorative member 450 and suppress the driving force required for the displacement of the decorative member 450, and to suppress the rattling of the decorative member 450 with the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500. In this case, the weight of the decorative member 450 serving as a vibration source can be reduced, so that rattling can be easily suppressed.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 23 and 24, a description will be given of a contact state between the decoration member 450 and the regulating unit 490 when the decoration member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position.

  As shown in FIGS. 23A and 24A, when the decorative member 450 is located above the regulating unit 490, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a contacts the decorative member 450 and the case member 491. It is arranged without touching.

  The decorative member 450 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 24 (a), and the lower end surface of the decorative member 450 is a case as shown in FIGS. 23 (b) and 24 (b). When the member 491 is displaced to the substantially vertical position substantially the same as the vertical intermediate position, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492 a disposed above the regulating unit 490 and the front surface of the decorative member 450 abut. State. Thereby, it can suppress that the decorative member 450 rattles back and forth and right and left.

  That is, the roller 492a disposed on the upper side is pushed out by the decoration member 450, rotates while being displaced in the radial direction, and comes into contact with the decoration member 450 in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 24B). Therefore, the rattling of the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction is suppressed. Further, since the roller 492a can rotate in one direction around the axis of the shaft portion 492b and cannot rotate in the direction in which the decoration member 450 moves left and right, it is possible to prevent the decoration member 450 from rattling in the left and right direction. be able to.

  On the other hand, since the roller 492a is rotatable around the axis of the shaft portion 492b, even when the roller 492a and the rotating unit 500 are in contact with each other, the decorative member 450 is displaced vertically in the first position. Can be done.

  Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 452g is formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position, the inclined surface 452g is used. Roller 492a can be guided to the front side of the contact surface 452h. Thereby, the driving force required when arranging the decorative member 450 at the first position can be suppressed.

  When the decorative member 450 is displaced further downward and is positioned at the first position from the state shown in FIGS. 23B and 24B, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two rollers 492a provided in the regulating unit 490 And the front surface of the decorative member 450 can be brought into contact.

  Here, if the play of the decoration member 450 that is displaced up and down is suppressed by the rotating body (the roller 492a) that rotates along the displacement direction of the decoration member 450, the rotating body (the roller 492a) is It is difficult to restrict the decoration member 450 from moving along the direction of displacement, and to prevent the decoration member 450 from being displaced against vertical play.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the rotation direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the shorter side on which the drive side slide hole 431 is formed) is the same as the rotation axis of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. Since the direction substantially coincides with the direction of the straight line connecting the symbols, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical direction at the first position. That is, in the present embodiment, the regulating unit 490 can allow only the vertical displacement for displacing the decoration member 450 to the first position, and in the second position, the transmission gear 443 and the displacement member 430 are disengaged from each other. By forming the dead point, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical direction. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be regulated, the play of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

  The rollers 492a disposed below the rollers 492a arranged vertically are in contact with not only the decorative member 450 but also the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491.

  That is, when the roller 492a disposed on the lower side is in contact with the decorative member 450, the rubber component of the roller 492a is pushed out to the front side (the right side in FIG. 24C) (is elastically deformed). Thus, the outer peripheral surface on the front side is brought into contact with the side surface of the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, and the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. be able to. Accordingly, the resistance when the roller 492a rotates around the shaft portion 492b can be increased, and the roller 492a can be hardly rotated. Therefore, resistance when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction can be increased. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be regulated, the play of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

  Here, as a mode of sandwiching the roller 492a between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the shaft 492b of the roller 492a is moved in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 24C). In this case, the roller 492a may be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, but in this case, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a may have a diameter of 492b. A structure that enables displacement in the direction is required.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body, and by utilizing the elastic deformation, the roller 492a is moved between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. The shaft 492b of the roller 492a does not need to be formed so as to be displaceable in the radial direction, and the shaft 492b can be formed as a shaft fixed to the front base 410. Thereby, the structure can be simplified, and the durability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the roller 492a is elastically displaced and is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 of the decorative member 450 accompanying the displacement of the rotary unit 500 is displaced. When the roller 492a is sandwiched between the decoration member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 due to backlash, the elastic recovery force of the roller 492a is used to apply the roller 492a to the decoration member 450 and the case member 491. The swelling portion 491c can more easily hold the roller 492a more firmly. This makes it difficult for the roller 492a to rotate, thereby suppressing the relative rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410. Therefore, the decorative member 450 rattles with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotation unit 500. Can be suppressed.

  Further, as the decoration member 450 is displaced from the upper position to the lower end position, the displacement resistance can be increased. Therefore, when the decoration member 450 is stopped at the first position, other components are damaged by the stopping operation. Can be suppressed.

  That is, in the present embodiment, since the rotation unit is provided at the central portion of the decoration member 450, when being displaced in the direction of gravity and stopped, the kinetic energy at the time of displacement is added to the weight of the decoration member 450 for each component. Because it works, the parts are easily damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when being displaced to the first position, the stop operation can be assisted, so that the stop operation in the direction that is more easily damaged can be assisted. As a result, breakage of components can be effectively suppressed, and the reliability of products can be improved.

  Furthermore, since two rollers 492a are vertically arranged along the direction of displacement of the decorative member 450, the contact surfaces 452h of the decorative member 450 abut at two places with a predetermined interval. Therefore, the inclination of the decorative member 450 can be suppressed, and the rattling of the rotating unit 500 with respect to the upper surface base 510 can be suppressed. As a result, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotary unit 500 can be effectively suppressed.

  The rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 described later is set to be substantially the same as the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (that is, the surface with which the roller 492a contacts). That is, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is disposed in parallel with the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the roller 492a. Thereby, while suppressing the driving force required when disposing the decoration member 450 at the first position and displacing the decoration member 450 from the first position to the second position, the front base of the decoration member 450 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 is suppressed. The rattling with respect to 410 can be effectively suppressed.

  More specifically, since the displacement mode of the rotation unit 500 is rotation, the decoration member 450 rotates due to the precession motion of the rotation unit 500 (the motion in which the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500 swings like a circle). The unit 500 is vibrated in a mode (mode) in which the plane of rotation of the unit 500 is tilted. Therefore, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is substantially parallel to the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, so that the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (that is, the roller 492a is (A surface to be contacted) can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a from a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the roller 492a. As a result, when the decoration member 450 is arranged at the first position and when the decoration member 450 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the driving force required for the displacement of the decoration member 450 is suppressed by rotating the roller 492a. While the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a, the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement (rotation) of the rotating unit 500 can be effectively suppressed. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25 to FIG. 36, the rotating unit 500 provided on the decorative member 450 will be described.

  First, the overall configuration of the decorative member 450 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the decorative member 450, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the decorative member 450.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the decorative member 450 includes gears 454 to 456 disposed between the front base 452 and the rear base 453 and a drive motor mounted on the rear side of the rear base 453. 457 and a signal transmission mechanism 458 attached to the rear side of the front base 452.

  The front base 452 has a concave portion 452c formed on the rear side at the center thereof. The recess 452c is annularly recessed in a front view, and has an insertion hole 452f formed in the shaft portion in the front-rear direction and openings 452d, 452e opened in the left-right direction on both side surfaces in the left-right direction. You.

  The rear base 453 is formed from a plate-like body having a rectangular shape in front view that is smaller than the front view of the front base 452, and has an opening 453b that opens in the center in the front-rear direction, and a circular shape on the right side in front view in the front-rear direction. It is mainly provided with an insertion hole 453a that opens, and shaft support portions 453c and 453d that project in a cylindrical shape on the front side.

  The insertion hole 453a is an opening through which a shaft portion of the drive motor 457 described later is inserted. The insertion hole 453a is opened at a position facing the shaft portion of the drive motor 457, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion of the drive motor 457. The opening is circular. The opening 453b is an opening through which a signal transmission mechanism 458 to be described later is inserted, and is formed in an inner hole shape larger than the shape of the signal transmission mechanism 458 in a front view.

  The shaft support portions 453c and 453d are shaft portions that are inserted into shaft portions of gears 455 and 456, which will be described later, and have a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of each gear 455 and 456.

  The drive motor 457 is a motor in which a position detection encoder is incorporated, and can detect a rotation angle and a rotation speed of the motor. The drive motor 457 is attached to the back surface of the back base 453 as described above, the shaft of the drive motor 457 is inserted into the insertion hole 453a of the back base 453, and screws and bolts from the front side of the back base 453. And fixed.

  The gear 454 is meshed with the gear 455 and is fixed to the shaft of the drive motor 457 inserted through the insertion hole 453a of the rear base 453. The gear 454 is formed to have a smaller thickness in the front-rear direction than the space between the rear base 453 and the front base 452, and when the rear base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are formed. Can rotate without abutting against the side surface. When a rotational driving force is applied from the driving motor 457, the gear 454 is rotated, and the rotational driving force can be transmitted to the gear 455 meshed with the gear 454.

  The gear 455 meshes with a rear base 571 (see FIG. 26) of the rotating unit 500, which will be described later, and rotates around the shaft support 453c through a shaft support 453c whose shaft hole projects forward of the rear base 453. Arranged as possible. The gear 455 is formed to have a smaller thickness in the front-rear direction than the space between the rear base 453 and the front base 452. When the rear base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are formed. Can rotate without abutting against the side surface. When a rotational driving force is applied from the driving motor 457, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the gear 454 to the gear 455, and the rear base 571 is rotated. As a result, the rotation unit 500 is rotated.

  Note that a part of the gear 455 is inserted through the first opening 452 d of the front base 452 and is meshed with the rear base 571 of the rotating unit 500 disposed in front of the front base 452.

  A gear 456 is meshed with the rear base 571 of the rotation unit 500. The gear 456 is a member having a protrusion for detecting an initial position (reference position) protruding from a side surface (axial end surface) of the gear 456. It is arranged on the base 453. A part of the gear 456 is inserted into the second opening 452e and meshes with the rear base 571. Further, the gear 456 is formed to have a smaller thickness in the front-rear direction than the space between the rear base 453 and the front base 452. When the rear base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are formed. Can rotate without abutting against the side surface. When a rotational driving force is applied from the driving motor 457 and the gear 454, the gear 455, and the rotation unit 500 (the rear base 571) are rotated, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the rear base 571 and the gear 456 is rotated. . As a result, the initial position of the rotation unit 500 can be detected.

  In this case, the number of gear teeth carved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear 456 and the number of gear teeth of the gear 571a1 carved on the outer peripheral surface of the rear base 571 of the rotation unit 500 are set to be the same. Thus, the gear 456 can be rotated once per rotation of the rotation unit 500. Thus, initial position detection (reference position) can be easily performed.

  The signal transmission mechanism 458 is a slip ring that transmits electric power and a signal to the irradiation unit 530 of the rotating rotary unit 500, and is configured to rotate a shaft 458a protruding from the front. The shaft portion 458a is formed in a substantially D-shaped cross section, has a passage opened therein, and an electric wiring is inserted into the passage.

  When the signal transmission mechanism 458 is attached to the rear side of the front base 452 by inserting the opening 453b of the rear base 453, the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is inserted through the shaft 458a. At the same time, it is in a state of protruding from the front of the front base 452.

  Next, the overall configuration of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 500. FIG. 29A is a top view of the rotating unit 500, FIG. 29B is a front view of the rotating unit 500 as viewed in the XXIXb direction of FIG. 29A, and FIG. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 500 taken along line XXIXc-XXIXc of FIG. The description of the rotating unit 500 is based on the state at the initial position (reference position).

  As shown in FIGS. 27 to 29, the rotation unit 500 includes an upper surface base 510 forming an upper side surface, a lower surface base 520 forming a lower side surface, and an irradiation unit 530 disposed below the upper surface base 510. An intermediate member 540 disposed below the irradiation unit 530; a reflector 560 disposed below the intermediate member 540; a front cover 550 disposed in front of the reflector 560; A rotation transmission unit 570 disposed on the back side of the base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is mainly formed.

  The rotation transmitting unit 570 is a unit for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 457 to the upper base 510 and the lower base 520, and includes a rear base 571 disposed on the rear side and a front base 572 disposed on the front side. And a bearing BR interposed between the front base 572 and the rear base 571, and a fastening member 573 disposed inside the bearing BR.

  The rear base 571 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a bulging portion 571a that swells in an annular shape when viewed from the rear side from the inner peripheral edge to the back side. A gear 571a1 is engraved on the outer side surface of the bulging portion 571a. The gear 571a1 is meshed with the gear 455 as described above. Thus, by applying a driving force to the driving motor 457, the driving force for rotation is transmitted through the gears 454 and 455, and the rear base 571 (gear 571a1) is transmitted, and the rotating unit 500 is rotated.

  The front base 572 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer erected portion 572a erected from the outer peripheral edge and an inner erected portion 572b erected from the inner circular portion in a U-shape as viewed from the front. And.

  The outer standing portion 572a is a wall for forming a gap between the front surface of the rear base 571 and the rear surface of the front base 572, and sandwiching the bearing BR and the fastening member 573 between the opposing surfaces. The height is set to be approximately the same as the width dimension of the BR in the axial direction, and is set to be the same as the outer diameter of the bearing BR.

  Further, the side surface of the outer standing portion 572a on the standing front end side is in contact with the front surface of the rear base 571, and a screw inserted from the rear side of the rear base 571 is fastened and fixed. As a result, the rear base 571 and the front base 572 are fastened and fixed.

  The inner standing portion 572b is a member that suppresses twisting of the wiring connecting the inside of the rotary unit 500 and the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is rotated. The signal transmission mechanism 458 is formed so as to have a substantially U-shape, and the inner shape is substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when viewed from the front.

  Therefore, when arranging the rotation unit 500 on the front base 452, the inner erected portion 572b can be externally fitted to the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458. Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, the flat portions of the inner standing portion 572b and the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 mesh with each other, and the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be rotated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wiring connecting the rotation unit 500 and the signal transmission mechanism 458 from being twisted.

  The bearing BR is a member that suppresses transmission of the rotation to the front base 452 when the rotation unit 500 is rotated with respect to the front base 452, and is an annular metal member having different inner and outer diameters. Are formed, and a spherical or cylindrical metal body is fitted between the two members.

  The outer diameter of the bearing BR is set substantially equal to the inner diameter of the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572. Thus, the bearing BR can be fixedly disposed on the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572. In this case, the inner diameter of the back base 571 is set smaller than the outer diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, when the bearing BR is sandwiched between the front base 572 and the rear base 571, the bearing BR is prevented from coming off the rotation transmitting unit 570.

  The fastening member 573 is a member for fastening the rotating unit 500 to the front base 452. The fastening member 573 is formed in an annular shape in a front view, and includes a protruding wall portion 573a protruding from the outer peripheral surface on the front side.

  The outer diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed substantially the same as the inner diameter of the bearing BR. On the other hand, the inner diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed larger than the outer shape of the inner standing portion 572b of the front base 572. As a result, the outer periphery of the fastening member 573 is fitted inside the inner periphery of the bearing BR, and the fastening member 573 is disposed on the rotation transmission unit 570 in such a manner that the inner upright portion 572b of the front base is inserted through the inner periphery. .

  The protruding wall portion 573a is a protruding portion for preventing the fastening member 573 from being detached from the assembled rotation transmitting unit 570, and is formed to protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the fastening member 573 over the entire circumference with a fixed protruding dimension. The outer diameter is set larger than the inner diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, by fastening the fastening member 573 to the bearing BR from the front side of the bearing BR, the removal of the fastening member 573 from the assembled rotation transmitting unit 570 can be suppressed.

  More specifically, by moving the fastening member 573 into the bearing BR from the front of the bearing BR, the movement of the fastening member 573 backward with respect to the bearing BR can be restricted. On the other hand, the movement of the fastening member 573 to the front side is performed by disposing the bearing BR between the front base 572 and the back base 571 so that the front side surface of the fastening member 573 and the back side of the front base 572 are located. And is regulated by being brought into contact with the side of the vehicle. As a result, detachment of the fastening member 573 from the assembled rotation transmitting unit 570 can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the fastening member 573 having the bearing BR externally fitted thereto is fastened to the front base 452, it is possible to suppress transmission of the rotation motion when the rotation unit 500 is rotated to the front base 452.

  That is, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, only the ring-shaped metal body disposed outside the bearing BR is rotated, and the rotation is performed on the ring-shaped metal body disposed inside. By not transmitting, the rotation of the fastening member 573 can be suppressed. As a result, the rotation unit 500 can be rotated with respect to the decoration member 450.

  The upper surface base 510 is formed in an arc shape that curves backward (upward in FIG. 29A) when viewed from above, and has a front edge curved downward (backward in FIG. 29A). It is formed into a curved shape. The upper surface base 510 includes a decorative portion 511 that bulges in a semicircular shape when viewed from the front at the center in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 29B), , And a pressing portion 513 protruding in a cylindrical shape on the lower side.

  The decorative portion 511 is a portion that is fastened to the upper side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 described above, and has a fastening hole that is fastened to the front base 572 on the back side, as well as a front view. The radius of the semicircular shape is formed larger than the radius of the outer diameter of the front base 572. Thereby, it is fastened to the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and the upper side of the front base 572 can be made invisible when viewed from the front.

  The blow hole 512 is a through hole that penetrates in the up-down direction (vertical direction in FIG. 29 (c)), and is formed in a long hole shape that is long opened in the front-back direction (vertical direction in FIG. 29 (a)). Further, a plurality of ventilation holes 512 are formed in the left-right direction along the arc shape of the upper surface base 510.

  When the upper surface base 510 is combined with the lower surface base 520, the pressing portion 513 forms a gap between the irradiation unit 530 sandwiched between the upper surface base 510 and the upper surface base 510, and regulates movement of the irradiation unit 530. The height of the protrusion is set to the height up to the side surface on the upper surface side of the irradiation unit 530 (see FIG. 29C). Further, a plurality of pressing portions 513 are formed so as to protrude from an edge on the back side of the upper surface base 510.

  The lower surface base 520 is formed in substantially the same shape as the upper surface base 510, and is arranged symmetrically with the upper surface base 510 about the axis of the rotation transmission unit 570. Note that the decorative portion 521 and the air holes 522 formed on the lower surface base have the same shape as the decorative portion 511 and the air holes 512 formed on the upper surface base 510, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520 is a portion that is fastened to the lower side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and is fastened to the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, so that the front base The lower side of 572 can be made invisible. Therefore, by matching the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, it is possible to prevent the player from visually observing the mechanism when rotating the rotating unit 500, thereby preventing the interest of the player from being spoiled.

  The irradiation unit 530 is formed mainly including a base member 531 and an LED 532 disposed on the lower surface side of the base member 531.

  The base member 531 is formed of a plate-like body having an outer shape in a top view slightly smaller than the upper surface base 510 in a top view. Thereby, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are disposed in combination in the vertical direction, the base member 531 can be made invisible in the vertical direction.

  The base member 531 has a through-hole 531a that penetrates in a vertical direction at an edge on the front side. The through-hole 531a is a member that suppresses the displacement of the base member 531 and will be described in detail later. The wiring of the shaft portion 458b of the signal transmission mechanism 458 described above is connected to the base member 531. Accordingly, light can be emitted from an LED 532 described later via an IC or a capacitor incorporated in the base member 531.

  The LED 532 is formed as a surface-mounted LED, has a rectangular outer shape (outer shape of a cavity molded from a resin ceramic) in a front view, and has an irradiation surface for irradiating light (epoxy or silicon encapsulated in the cavity). Is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front. Further, the LEDs 532 are arranged on the lower surface side of the base member 531, and a plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged in the left-right direction along the arc shape of the base member 531 when viewed from above. Thereby, the LED 532 can irradiate light to a reflecting plate 560 described later.

  The intermediate member 540 is formed from a plate-like body whose outer shape in a top view is substantially the same as the shape of the upper surface base 510 in a top view. Thus, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are arranged in a vertically combined manner, the intermediate member 540 can be arranged between the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520.

  The front cover 550 is formed of a transparent light-transmitting material, and is formed in an arc shape in a top view. The front cover 550 is disposed on the intermediate member 540 side.

  The reflection plate 560 has a silver decoration (plating) on its outer surface, and is formed of a plate-like body whose outer shape in top view is substantially the same as the shape of the top base 510 in top view. In addition, the reflector 560 includes a concave notch 564 in which a front side surface is cut rearward.

  The concave notch 564 is arranged such that the front surface of the front cover 550 is substantially at the same position as the front surfaces of the upper base 510, the lower base 520, and the intermediate member 540 by inserting the front cover 550 into the cutout portion. Can be set up. That is, the width dimension of the front cover 550 in the front-rear direction is set to the distance dimension from the front surface of the concave portion 564 of the reflection plate 560 to the front surfaces of the upper base 510, the lower base 520, and the intermediate member 540. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the front cover 550 from being disposed so as to protrude from the rotation unit 500. As a result, the rotating unit 500 can be assembled as an integrated unit with less unevenness, and when the rotating unit 500 is visually recognized, it is difficult to understand the external shape of each component, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being spoiled. .

  Next, the intermediate member 540 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 30A is a top view of the intermediate member 540, and FIG. 30B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 540 taken along line XXXb-XXXb in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b), the intermediate member 540 has a first outer edge portion that stands upward from the outer edge portion (in a direction in which the upper surface base 510 is disposed) when viewed from above. 541 and a second outer edge portion 542, an irradiation hole 543 formed to penetrate in the vertical direction, an irradiation regulating portion 544 protruding from the periphery of the irradiation hole 543, and a protruding portion protruding from the front edge. It is mainly provided with a portion 545 and a groove 546 recessed in the outer peripheral edge of the irradiation regulating portion 544.

  The first outer edge 541 is formed at the outer edge of the intermediate member 540 on the front side. The inner diameter of the curved shape of the first outer edge 541 on the front side (the lower side in FIG. 30A) when viewed from above is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the curved shape on the front side of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 when viewed from above. Set identically. In addition, the vertical dimension of the first outer edge portion 541 is set to be larger than the thickness dimension (vertical dimension) of the base member 531. Therefore, when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the irradiation unit 530 can be shielded by the first outer edge portion 541 so that the irradiation unit 530 cannot be seen from the front side.

  The second outer edge 542 is formed on the outer edge on the back side of the intermediate member 540. The shape of the second outer edge portion 542 on the back side (the upper side in FIG. 30A) when viewed from above is substantially the same as the shape on the back side of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 when viewed from above. The standing dimension of the second outer edge 542 is set lower than that of the first outer edge 541. Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is assembled, the lower side surface of the irradiation unit 530 is disposed in a state of being in contact with the standing front end surface of the second outer edge portion 542. Therefore, the introduced outside air can be smoothly discharged to the back.

  The irradiation hole 543 is a hole for individually dividing light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 532 provided in the irradiation unit 530, and is opened at a position facing the LED 532 provided in the irradiation unit 530. . Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the light of the adjacent LED 532 from irradiating another range. The inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, and their axes are coaxially arranged. Thus, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently made incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the reflecting plate 560 described later via the irradiation hole 543.

  The irradiation hole 543 has a larger inner diameter from the upper surface side (the LED 532 side) toward the lower surface side. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently made incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the reflecting plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543.

  The irradiation restricting portion 544 protrudes around the irradiation hole 543 described above. Accordingly, the gap between the LED 532 and the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 can be reduced, so that the light of the LED 532 can be easily incident on the irradiation hole 543, and can be prevented from leaking out of the irradiation hole 543. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

  In addition, the projecting dimension of the irradiation regulating unit 544 is set to be substantially the same as the standing dimension of the second outer edge 542, and when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the projecting distal end surface of the irradiation regulating unit 544 and the irradiation unit 530 are formed. The LED 532 is brought into contact. This can suppress the light of the adjacent LED from being incident on the irradiation hole 543, so that the outer diameter of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified. Further, since the inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, the area of the irradiation control section 544 in contact with the LED 532 can be secured. Leakage to the outside of the irradiation hole 543 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

  Furthermore, since the irradiation regulating portions 544 are connected to the adjacent irradiation regulating portions 544 and the outer peripheral surfaces thereof, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be increased. In this case, the irradiation regulating portion 544 has a circular outer peripheral surface, and the adjacent irradiation regulating portions 544 are connected to each other. That is, since the group in which the plurality of irradiation restricting portions 544 are connected to each other is formed in an irregular shape (a shape in which a plurality of outwardly projecting circular arcs are continuous), a space (surface area) is secured, and the heat radiation effect is enhanced. In addition, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be increased by using the unevenness of the outer shape.

  The protruding portion 545 is a protrusion that restricts the irradiation unit 530 from moving forward, backward, left, and right, and is formed at a position that is inserted into the through hole 531a of the base member 531 when the rotating unit 500 is assembled. Further, the protruding portion 545 is formed in a shape in which columns having different outer diameters are vertically combined, and has a large-diameter portion 545a on the base side and a small-diameter portion 545b on the distal end which is smaller in diameter than the large-diameter portion 545a. Formed from

  The large diameter portion 545a is a projection for forming a predetermined gap between the intermediate member 540 and the base member 531 when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540. The outer diameter is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the hole 531a, and the protrusion dimension is set to be substantially the same as the standing dimension of the second outer edge 542.

  Thus, when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540, the facing distance between the front intermediate member 540 and the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined. On the other hand, the facing distance between the back side intermediate member 540 and the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined by the second outer edge 542. In addition, since the projecting distance of the large diameter portion 545a and the standing distance of the second outer edge portion 542 are set to be substantially the same, the vertical side surface of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is set to the vertical side surface of the intermediate member 540. They can be arranged in parallel to each other.

  The small diameter portion 545b is a projection for positioning the irradiation unit 530 with respect to the intermediate member 540 when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540, and is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the through hole 531a of the base member 531. Set to the same or a slightly smaller outer diameter. Therefore, when disposing the irradiation unit 530 on the intermediate member 540, the through-hole 531 a of the base member 531 is externally fitted to the small-diameter portion 545 b of the intermediate member 540, so that the irradiation unit 530 with respect to the intermediate member 540 is moved in the front-rear and left-right directions. Can be specified.

  The groove portion 546 is a groove that extends along the base of the irradiation control portion 544 and that is concavely formed in a U-shaped cross section. The concave portion of the groove 546 increases the area where the side surface of the intermediate member 540 contacts the outside air, so that the heat radiation of the intermediate member 540 is improved. In addition, the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced while securing the rigidity of the intermediate member 540. That is, by forming the groove-shaped groove portion 546 extending along the base of the irradiation regulating portion 544, the area recessed in the intermediate member 540 is minimized, and the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 is secured. By the operation of the LED 532, a space can be expanded in a portion where generated heat is particularly concentrated, and a heat radiation effect can be enhanced.

  The groove width of the groove 546 is set to be smaller than the distance dimension from the outer peripheral edge of the irradiation regulating portion 544 to the irradiation hole 543, and the depth of the groove 546 is smaller than half the thickness of the intermediate member 540. Set smaller.

  Next, the front cover 550 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 31A is a front view of the front cover 550, and FIG. 31B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front cover 550 along the line XXXIB-XXXXIb in FIG. Note that, in FIG. 31B, the diffusion unit 551 is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the front cover 550 has a diffusion portion 551 on the inner side (upper side in FIG. 31B) on the lower side (left side in FIG. 31B). It is formed in preparation.

  The diffuser 551 is a part having a roughened surface, and can diffuse the light irradiated to the diffuser 551 by irregularly reflecting the light on the roughened surface. Note that the rough surface processing is a processing mode in which irregularities are formed on the surface.

  Next, the reflection plate 560 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 32A is a top view of the reflection plate 560, and FIG. 32B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the reflection plate 560 taken along the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. In FIG. 32B, the reflection unit 563 is schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 32A and 32B, the reflection plate 560 is surrounded by a partition wall 561 erected on the upper surface side (the front side in FIG. 32A). It is mainly provided with a reflecting portion 563 formed on the upper surface of the region and an upright wall 562 erected along an edge on the back side.

  The partition wall 561 is erected in a U-shape with the front side (lower side in FIG. 32 (a)) open when viewed from above, and a plurality of partition walls 561 extend in the left-right direction along the front edge of the reflector 560. The pieces are formed side by side. In addition, adjacent standing walls 562 are combined with (also used as) the walls extending in the front direction to form one wall. Thereby, the space in which the partition walls 561 are juxtaposed can be reduced. As a result, the number of partition walls 561 formed can be maximized.

  The reflecting portion 563 is formed by roughening the upper surface of a region surrounded by the front edge of the reflecting plate 560 and the partition wall 561 by laser processing or the like when viewed from above. The reflecting portion 563 has a horizontal portion 563a formed from a side surface parallel to the upper surface and the lower surface of the reflecting plate 560, and the thickness of the reflecting plate 560 increases as the distance from the horizontal portion 563a increases due to the connection with the horizontal portion 563a. And an inclined surface 563b inclined in the direction.

  The horizontal portion 563a is formed on a side surface other than the front edge, of the side surfaces parallel to the upper surface and the lower surface of the reflection plate 560. That is, the horizontal portion 563a (reflection portion 563) is not formed on the front edge, and the rough surface is not processed. Thus, the reflection portion 563 can be formed while holding the front edge of the reflection plate 560. As a result, there is no need to separately form a holding portion for rough surface processing on the reflection plate 560, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  The inclined surface 563b is a portion mainly reflecting light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 disposed on the upper surface side toward the front side, and is inclined 45 degrees toward the front side with respect to the irradiation surface of the LED 532. Formed on the surface.

  The connecting position between the horizontal portion 563a and the inclined surface 563b is set to a position where the connecting straight line passes through the axis of the irradiation surface of the LED 532. Accordingly, of the light emitted from the LED 532, the light emitted toward the back side can be effectively reflected to the front side by the inclined surface 563b. On the other hand, of the light emitted from the LED 532, the light emitted to the front side can be reflected to the front side by the horizontal portion 563a.

  As described above, the standing wall 562 is erected along the rear edge of the reflection plate 560, and the erected height is set to the same height as the erected height of the partition wall 561. . Thus, when the rotation unit 500 is assembled (the intermediate member 540 is disposed above the reflection plate 560), a space can be formed between the upright wall 562 and the partition wall 561. That is, an air layer can be formed between the reflection plate 560 and the intermediate member 540. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat from being stored inside the reflection plate 560 and the intermediate member 540, and the rotation unit 500 stores heat, so that the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 provided in the rotation unit 500 has Damage can be suppressed.

  The rotating unit 500 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, the fastening member 573 is internally fitted to the inner circle portion of the bearing BR from the front side, and the inner circle portion of the fastening member 573 is externally fitted to the inner standing portion 572b of the front base 572. After integrating the front base 572, the bearing BR, and the fastening member 573, the rear base 571 is arranged on the back side, and the front base 572 and the back base 571 are fastened to assemble the rotation transmission unit 570 as a unit.

  A lower surface base 520 is disposed below the reflection plate 560 at a front portion of the rotation unit 500 (a portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570), and the lower surface base 520 and the reflection plate 560 are fastened. After the lower surface base 520 and the reflection plate 560 are fastened and fixed, the intermediate member 540 is overlaid on the upper surface side of the reflection plate 560 with the front cover 550 sandwiched on the front side. The irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 with the through-hole 531a fitted to the small-diameter portion 545b of the projecting portion 545 of the intermediate member 540. In this state, by arranging the upper surface base 510 from above and fastening the upper surface base 510 to the intermediate member 540, the front portion (the portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570) of the rotating unit 500 is assembled as a unit.

  Next, the rotation transmission unit 570 is arranged behind the front portion of the rotation unit 500, and the rotation unit 500 and the rotation transmission unit 570 are fastened to assemble the rotation unit 500 as one unit.

  Next, light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33A is a top view of the rotary unit 500, and FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional view of the rotary unit 500 taken along line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb in FIG. (A) and (b) of FIG. 34 are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the rotation unit 500 in the XXXIV section of (b) of FIG.

  Note that FIG. 33A illustrates a state in which the upper base 510 and the irradiation unit 530 have been removed from the rotating unit 500. In FIGS. 34A and 34B, light emitted from the LED 532 is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B, a reflecting portion 563 that is surrounded by a partition wall 561 and partitioned as one region is disposed below the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540. . As described above, since the LEDs 532 are arranged above the irradiation holes 543, light emitted from the LEDs 532 can be applied to the reflection units 563 at different positions. That is, since the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted in a state where it is partitioned by each reflecting portion 563, the division of the light of each LED 532 can be made clear. As a result, the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted only from the corresponding reflecting portion 563, and the outline of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  In addition, since a structure for allowing the light of the LED 532 to enter the reflecting portion 563 of the corresponding reflecting plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540 is formed from the reflecting plate 560 and the intermediate member 540, such a structure is used. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the body is formed of one member. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product cost.

  As shown in FIG. 34A, the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting plate 560 is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b, and the front side (see FIG. 34A). Side), is transmitted through the front cover 550, and is emitted toward the front side of the gaming machine. That is, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be emitted to the front (front side) of the rotating unit 500. Therefore, even when the posture of the base member 531 is such that the surface on which the LED 532 is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotating unit 500, the light (flashing) of the LED 532 is visually recognized by the player, and the afterimage is displayed by the afterimage effect. be able to.

  Further, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently emitted to the player side by the inclined surface 563b of the reflection plate 560. Therefore, stronger light can be emitted to the front side of the rotating unit 500. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect.

  In the light emitted from the LED 532 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting portion 563, there is light that is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b and reflected by the surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560 facing each other. . The light reflected on the facing surface of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560 is again reflected by the surface (the facing surface of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560) and is irradiated on the front cover 550.

  In this case, as described above, since the intermediate member 540 is formed of white having a lower light absorption than black, light reflected by the intermediate member 540 can be easily reflected again. On the other hand, as described above, the reflection plate 560 has a silver decoration on its outer surface, and can easily reflect light reflected by the reflection plate 560 again.

  Therefore, the light radiated from the LED 532 to the reflecting portion 563 can be emitted from the front side (to the player side) of the rotating unit 500 in a state of being irregularly reflected by the rough surface and uniformly dispersed. That is, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the opening of the reflecting portion 563 from being visually recognized in a state where the light is deflected to a part of the opening.

  As shown in FIG. 34B, the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the horizontal portion 563a of the reflection plate 560 is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a, and the front side (FIG. 34B). Side). Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be emitted through the front cover 550 to the front side.

  Since the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a is not formed at the front end of the reflection plate 560, light can be easily emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotating unit 500. In addition, the intensity of light for displaying an afterimage due to the afterimage effect can be increased. That is, when roughening is performed on an end portion of the inner surface of the reflecting plate 560 on the front side of the rotating unit 500, light is irregularly reflected on the roughened surface, and the front side of the rotating unit 500 (the player side). ) Is reduced, the front end of the reflector 560 is not formed, and at least a smooth surface that is flatter than a rough surface processed into the reflector 563 is irregularly reflected. , And the amount of light traveling toward the front side (player side) of the rotating unit 500 can be increased.

  Further, the partition wall 561 has a front side (a concave notch 564) formed at an end portion on the front side of the horizontal portion 563a (a portion where the rough surface processing of the reflection portion 563 is not formed (smooth surface)). Side), the portion of the horizontal portion 563a where the rough surface processing is not performed has a cross-sectional area of the inner surface toward the front end of the rotary unit 500. Increased (expanded). Therefore, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotation unit 500 can have a spread. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be larger than the area of the light emitting surface of the LED 532. Therefore, the size of the LED 532 can be reduced.

  Further, the front side of the reflector 560 (rotating unit 500) is formed so as to be curved toward the rear side toward the end with the center in the left-right direction (the rotation axis) as the center, so that the front side (concave) of the reflector 560 is formed. As the end on the side where the notch 564 is formed) is radially separated from the rotation axis of the rotary unit 500, the front side (the concave notch 564) is formed in each area partitioned by the partition wall 561. The length of the end of the side) is increased. Thereby, the perceived brightness (brightness of light) of each of the plurality of reflecting portions 563 can be made uniform.

  That is, in the rotating unit 500, the displacement speed (peripheral speed) becomes higher radially outward from the rotating shaft (the center of rotation). Therefore, when the LEDs 532 arranged in a row emit light with the same brightness, the rotating shaft The light of the LED 532 that is closer to the LED looks higher (brighter) than the light of the LED 532 that is farther (radially outward) from the rotation axis.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the end on the front side of the reflection plate 560 is more distant from the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500 in the radial direction, the front side (concave notch) in each region partitioned by the partition wall 561. Since the length of the end portion (on the side where the portion 564 is formed) is increased, the more the reflecting portion 563 (LED 532) is separated radially outward from the rotation axis of the rotating unit 500, the more the diffuse reflection by the rough surface is strengthened. (That is, by reducing the proportion of light visually recognized by the player from the LED 532), the light can be visually recognized as high-brightness light. As a result, it is possible to suppress a difference in brightness as viewed at the radially arranged position and to make the brightness (brightness of light) uniform.

  In addition, the length of the horizontal portion 563a of the reflector 560 in the direction parallel to the axial direction of the rotating unit 500 increases as the distance from the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500 increases in the radial direction. The perceived lightness (brightness of light) can be made uniform.

  The light applied to the front cover 550 can diffuse the traveling direction of the light by the diffusion portion 551 formed on the inner peripheral surface of the front cover 550. That is, due to the rough surface of the diffusion portion 551 of the front cover 550, the traveling direction of the light applied to the diffusion portion 551 can be bent in a plurality of different directions. As a result, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotating unit 500 can have a wider range. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be larger than the area of the light emitting surface of the LED 532. Therefore, the size of the LED 532 can be reduced.

  Here, if the light of the LED 532 is made to be visually recognized by the player directly (without passing through the member of the light transmitting material), the light of the LED 532 has a high directivity to the front, so that the player is dazzling. There was a fear to feel.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the surface for irregularly reflecting the light emitted from the LED 532 is formed at two places, the reflection plate 560 and the front cover 550, the directivity of the light emitted from the LED 532 can be weakened. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing the irradiated light and feeling dazzling.

  Here, it is known that a plurality of light-emitting units (LEDs 532) are provided, and the light-emitting units are turned on and off in accordance with the rotational position to perform display by an afterimage effect. However, in the conventional light emitting means, the posture of the base (base member 531) is such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is directed to the front side (player side)). (A posture parallel to the rotated plane), the outer shape in a front view (viewed in the rotation axis direction) becomes large. Therefore, there is a problem that the visibility of the back side of the rotating unit 500 is hindered in a state where the rotation of the rotating display device (the rotating unit 500) is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation unit 500 is configured such that the base member 531 on which the plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged is arranged such that the surface on which the LEDs 532 are mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500. Since it is arranged between 510 and lower surface base 520, the outer shapes of upper surface base 510 and lower surface base 520 when viewed from the front (in the direction of the rotation axis) can be suppressed. As a result, in the state where the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is stopped, the visibility on the back side of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 can be improved.

  Next, the rotation of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 35A and 35B are front views of the rotating unit 500. FIG. FIGS. 36A and 36B are top views of the rotation unit 500. FIG.

  In FIGS. 35A to 36B, the flow of air generated by the rotation unit 500 is shown by a two-dot chain line, and the sign of the air flow K is given. Further, the ventilation holes 512 and 522 of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are illustrated by broken lines.

  Further, in the present embodiment, only the description is given when the rotation unit 500 is rotated left when viewed from the front. When the rotation unit 500 is rotated right when viewed from the front, only the flow of the airflow K is reversed about the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), when the rotation unit 500 is rotated by the driving force of the above-described drive motor 457, the rotation causes external air to enter through the ventilation holes 512 and 522. An airflow K is generated inside the rotation unit 500.

  In this case, since the ventilation holes 512 and 522 are opened tangentially to the rotation direction of the rotation unit 500, the rotation unit 500 rotates through the ventilation holes 512 and 522 when the rotation unit 500 rotates. External air can easily enter the inside of the rotating unit 500.

  More specifically, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated leftward when viewed from the front, at the initial position, the ventilation holes 512 of the upper surface base 510 formed on the right side in the front view and the ventilation holes of the lower surface base 520 formed on the left side in the front view. 522 is displaced in a direction to take in (insert) air into the ventilation holes 512 and 522. As a result, when the rotating unit 500 rotates, air outside the rotating unit 500 can easily enter the inside of the rotating unit 500. Therefore, heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled.

  Since the air holes 512 of the upper surface base 510 and the air holes 522 of the lower surface base 520 are formed symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis, when the rotation unit 500 rotates rightward in a front view, the rotation at the initial position is performed. The air holes 512 of the upper surface base 510 formed on the left side of the unit 500 in front view and the air holes 522 of the lower surface base 520 formed on the right side of the front view make it easy to take in external air into the rotation unit 500. That is, even when the rotating unit 500 rotates rightward, the same operation and effect as those described above (when the rotating unit 500 rotates leftward in front view) are obtained.

  Here, if a base (base member 531) on which the LED (LED 532) is mounted is disposed inside the rotating body (rotating unit 500), and the rotating body is driven to rotate, the LED emits light. If the heat generated during the operation of the IC or the capacitor cannot be sufficiently cooled, the solder of the LED soldered to the base or the IC or capacitor for controlling the LED may melt, resulting in poor contact.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ventilation holes 512 and 522 are opened tangentially to the rotation direction of the rotation unit 500, so that the rotation of the rotation unit 500 takes in outside air into the rotation unit 500. be able to. Therefore, heat generated when the LED operates can be cooled.

  The air taken into the rotation unit 500 from the ventilation holes 512 and 522 mainly collides with the irradiation unit 530 or the reflection plate 560 and is dispersed. The airflow K distributed on the back side of the rotating unit 500 (the back side of the paper in FIG. 35A) is directed to the outside of the rotating unit 500 from the opening on the back side of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 (a gap between the opposite sides). It is blown and released into the atmosphere.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36A, the airflow K dispersed on the front side of the rotating unit 500 (on the near side in FIG. 35A) is radially displaced from the rotating shaft by the centrifugal force of rotation of the rotating unit 500. The air is blown to the outside, blown to the outside of the rotating unit 500, and released to the atmosphere (see FIG. 35A).

  That is, since the rotating unit 500 is formed in a container-like shape with the back side opened, the outside air taken in from the ventilation holes 512 and 522 is efficiently removed from the back side by the combination of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520. Thus, the heat can be cooled when the LED 532 operates. In addition, by exhausting air from the back side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 in this way, it is possible to suppress the exhaust from affecting the sphere flowing down the game area (or rolling the stage).

  In the present embodiment, the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 have a rectangular shape in a front view (that is, as viewed in the rotation axis direction) in which the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 have a long shape along the diametrical direction in the rotation plane of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. Since it is formed, the air inside the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is directed to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by utilizing the centrifugal force caused by the rotation of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. It can flow and can be exhausted from the back side. Therefore, with the flow of the air, outside air can be taken into the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 from the rear side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570.

  That is, in the vicinity of the rotation transmitting unit 570, the rotation speed is low, so that the efficiency of taking in the outside air from the ventilation holes 512 and 522 in the side wall is low (or cannot be taken in), but the circulation of air using the centrifugal force (the rotation transmitting unit 570) is performed. Outside air is taken in from the rear side in the vicinity, and the taken-in outside air is caused to flow to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by centrifugal force, and the flow of air exhausted from the rear side in the radially outward side) Can be formed. As a result, heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled. In particular, cooling of the LED 532 disposed near the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), when the air inside the rotary unit 500 is pushed radially outward by the rotation of the rotary unit 500, the internal pressure on the center side of the rotary unit 500 decreases. External air is taken in from a gap on the back side between the rotation transmission unit 570 and the upper base 510 and the lower base 520. As a result, the cooling of the LED 532 disposed near the rotation transmitting unit 570 can be more reliably achieved.

  In this case, the front wall forming the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge of the upper surface base 510 is downward (the back side of the paper in FIG. 29A)) (the lower edge of the lower surface base 520 is upward) The curved portion has a shape parallel to the rotation plane of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 (that is, the shape of the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis is a rectangular parallelepiped). Since the angle of the portion where the air that has flowed to the longitudinal end portion (outward in the radial direction during rotation) due to centrifugal force changes direction toward the rear side becomes substantially a right angle, a vortex is easily formed at such portion. . Therefore, the flow of air is hindered, and it becomes difficult to smoothly exhaust air from the rear side.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge of the upper surface base 510 is downward (rear side of the paper surface in FIG. 29A)) (the front edge of the lower surface base 520 is upward). Is formed outwardly from the center in the left-right direction, so that the air flowing toward the longitudinal end (radially outward during rotation) due to centrifugal force is gradually reduced. In addition to being able to flow to the back side, the angle of the portion where the air flowing to the longitudinal end (outward in the radial direction) changes direction toward the back side can be made larger than substantially a right angle, Vortex formation can be suppressed, and the air flow can be smooth. Therefore, the exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, the cooling of the LED 532 disposed near the rotation transmission unit 570 can be more reliably achieved.

  Further, the distance between the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 facing each other on the rear side (the dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 35A) is such that the distance dimension on the rear side near the rotation transmitting unit 570 is closer to the longitudinal end. Since the distance dimension is made larger than the distance dimension on the back side, the air inside the upper base 510 and the lower base 520 flows toward the longitudinal end (radially outward during rotation) using the centrifugal force due to rotation. By exhausting air from the rear side on the radially outer side, when air is taken in from the rear side near the rotation transmitting unit 570, the air can be taken in efficiently.

  In addition, the open portion on the back side near the rotation transmitting unit 570 (the inner periphery of the decorative portion 511 of the upper surface base 510 and the decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520) is formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotation axis. In addition, it is possible to suppress the disturbance of the outside air on the rear side near the rotation transmission unit 570 (the formation of a flow in the rotation direction) due to the rotation of the lower surface base 520. As a result, outside air can be efficiently taken in from the rear side near the rotation transmission unit 570.

  Furthermore, since the outer peripheral surface of the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572 is formed in a shape narrowing from the back side to the front side, the rotating unit 500 can be used as the decorative portion 511 of the upper base 510 and the decorative portion of the lower base 520. Generation of a vortex in the airflow K when air is taken in from the gap between the rotation transmission unit 570 and the rotation transmission unit 570 can be suppressed. Therefore, the flow of the airflow K flowing in the central portion in the left-right direction of the rotating unit 500 can be made smooth, and when the outside air is taken in from the rear side near the rotation transmitting unit 570, the taking can be performed efficiently. .

  Next, the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 37 and FIG. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the center frame 600 includes a frame 610 formed in an annular shape in a front view, and a center cover 620 disposed to cover an inner peripheral portion of the frame 610. And a sensor 630 attached to the frame 610.

  The frame 610 includes a stage 611 protruding toward the center cover 620 (rear side) from a lower part of an inner peripheral edge in a front view, a wall 612 protruding radially outward from an outer peripheral side, and a rear side. It is formed mainly with a fastening hole 613 that is concavely formed in a circular shape toward the front side at an edge portion thereof, and an opening 614 that opens in front of the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 disposed on the back side. You.

  Further, the frame body 610 is a member that is disposed in the center of the game board 13 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and is made visible to the player via the glass 8. Patterns and pictures are drawn on the front side.

  The stage 611 is formed to bend from the inner edge on the lower side of the frame body 610 to the rear side, and has a first recessed part 611a on the front side on the upper surface thereof and a second recessed part on the rear side end. The setting portions 611b are respectively recessed.

  The stage 611 rolls the sphere on its upper surface and drops the sphere from the upper surface of the stage 611 using the inclination of either the first recessed portion 611a or the second recessed portion 612b. It is possible to form a state in which a ball can easily win in the winning opening 64. Therefore, since a plurality of flow paths of the ball flowing down the game area can be formed, it is possible to give the player interest.

  The first recessed portion 611a is a groove for dropping a ball rolling on the upper portion of the stage 611 to the front side of the game board 13 (the front side of the base plate 60), and has a concave depth toward the front side. Is formed deeply. The second recessed portion 611b is a groove for sending a ball to an opening formed in the center rear surface of the stage 611 in the left-right direction, and has a deeper depth toward the rear surface.

  The wall portion 612 is a portion that is positioned in the front-rear direction with respect to the base plate 60 when the assembled center frame 600 is disposed on the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2). The outer shape is formed larger than the inner shape of the opening formed through in the direction. Thereby, when the center frame 600 is inserted into the opening of the base plate 60 from the front side, the rear side surface of the wall portion 612 abuts on the front side surface of the base plate 60, and The center frame 600 can be positioned.

  The fastening holes 613 are holes that are recessed plurally on the back side of the frame body 610 and are formed at positions facing the through holes 623a of the center cover 620 described later. The opening 614 is an opening for irradiating the front side with sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 described later, and is formed at a position facing the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 to which the sensor light is emitted.

  The center cover 620 is formed of a resin material of a light-transmitting material, is formed in a substantially circular shape in a front view, and is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the frame body 610, and left and right edges of the cover member 621. And a mounting portion 623 that protrudes outward from the standing front end surface of the side wall portion 622 and the lower edge of the cover member 621. You.

  The cover member 621 is formed into a plate-like body having a constant thickness that curves rearward as it goes outward from the upper left-right center in a front view (the front side becomes a convex curved surface). An upper peripheral edge (hereinafter, referred to as a "first portion 621a") of a central portion in the left-right direction is formed at a position forward of peripheral edges at both left and right ends and a lower end (hereinafter, referred to as a "second portion").

  Since the cover member 621 is formed from a plate-like body having a constant thickness, it can be prevented from acting as a convex lens, and the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side can be ensured.

  Further, since the cover member 621 is formed from a plate-like body having a constant thickness, the cover member 621 and the third symbol display device 81 face each other by an amount corresponding to the central portion in the left-right direction being curved toward the front side when viewed from the front. A space can be formed between them. Thereby, the space where the decorative member 450 of the above-mentioned vertical displacement unit 400 is displaced and produced can be secured.

  The side wall portion 622 is a wall portion so that the center cover 620 can be attached to the frame body 610. Since the cover member 621 is curved to the back side as described above, the back side of the frame body 610 and the center cover Where the distance between the front of the center 620 and the front of the center cover 620 can be reduced (eliminated) by the side wall 622 where the distance between the front of the center 620 and the front of the center cover 620 can be reduced.

  That is, the vertical dimension of the side wall 622 on the front side is set to the distance between the back of the frame 610 and the front of the center cover 620 when the center cover 620 is provided on the frame 610. Accordingly, when the frame 610 and the center cover 620 are combined, it is possible to suppress the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 from being excessively protruded to the front side of the frame 610.

  The attachment portion 623 is a protrusion for attaching the center cover 620 to the frame body 610, and has a plurality of through holes 623a formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. As described above, the fastening hole 613 is formed in the back surface of the frame body 610 at a position facing the through hole 623a, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the through hole 623a and fastened to the fastening hole 613. Thus, the frame 610 and the center cover 620 are fastened and fixed.

  The sensor 630 is a motion sensor for detecting a motion of the player, and is a light emitting unit that emits light such as infrared light, and a light receiving unit that receives light reflected by the object when the light emitted from the light emitting unit is reflected by an object. And an irradiation surface 631 having:

  The sensor 630 is provided at a height of about ／ from the bottom when the frame 610 is divided into three equal parts in the vertical direction, and is provided on the right side of the frame 610. The sensor 630 is disposed with its irradiation surface 631 inclined to the center front side of the center frame 600. As a result, light emitted from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is emitted from the central portion on the front side of the game board 13 to the player side via the glass 8.

  Next, the sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 39A is a front view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 39B is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 40A is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 along the line XLa-XLa in FIG. 39A, and FIG. 40B is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 along the line XLb-XLb in FIG. FIG.

  In FIG. 39A and FIG. 40B, the irradiation area of the light of the sensor 630 irradiated in front of the center frame 600 is shown by a two-dot chain line, and is shown as irradiation areas R1 and R2. In FIG. 39B, the sensor 630 is illustrated by a broken line. Further, in FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (b), the sensor 630 and the light emitted from the sensor 630 are shown by two-dot chain lines, and are arranged in front of the center frame 600 (in front of the game board 13). The glass 8 to be produced is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the sensor 630 is disposed forward of the second portion 621b of the cover member 621. Accordingly, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine through (transmitted through) the cover member 621, and the light emitted from the sensor 630 is blocked by the cover member 621. Can be suppressed. In the sensor 630, the decorative portion of the frame 610 is arranged on the front side. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the sensor 630 from the player side (front side).

  The light emitted from the sensor 630 irradiates the glass 8 directly from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 and irradiates the region of the irradiation region R1 emitted from the front side of the glass 8 and the front of the cover member 621 of the center cover 620. The reflected light is reflected and emitted to the irradiation region R2 which is emitted from the front side of the glass 8.

  Here, in a gaming machine in which a motion sensor (sensor 630) is provided in a gaming machine to detect a motion of a player on the front side of a liquid crystal device (third symbol display device 81), the motion sensor is exposed. There was a problem of spoiling interest.

  Therefore, the sensor 630 is arranged on the back side of the decorative member (the frame 610). In this case, if the sensor 630 is retracted from the inner edge side (the opening 614 of the frame body 610) to the inner side (outside) of the decorative member, it is more difficult to visually recognize the sensor. And the detection range becomes narrower. On the other hand, if the sensor 630 is positioned close to the inner edge side of the decorative member (the opening of the frame 610), the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit can be easily turned to the front, so that the detection range can be widened in the front-rear direction. It becomes easier to see. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor 630.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a part of the light emitted from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 irradiates the cover member 621 of the center cover 620, so that the curved shape of the cover member 621 causes the front side ( (The player side). Thereby, the sensor 630 is retracted to the back of the opening 614 of the frame body 610, so that a range in which an object can be detected can be secured while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor 630. In addition, since the cover member 621 is made of a light transmissive material, visibility of a symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be secured.

  Further, since the front side of the cover member 621 has a convex curved surface, when light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected on the front side of the cover member 621, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) at a position close to the sensor 630. Can be made more acute, while at a position farther from Sen 630, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) can be made more obtuse, and the range in which an object can be detected can be increased accordingly.

  Furthermore, the light (light reflected by the cover member 621) applied to the irradiation region R2 is reflected toward the cover member 621 when the object is irradiated and reflected. In this case, the traveling direction of the reflected light is different depending on the surface shape of the object to be reflected, but the light reflected in a plurality of directions is reflected at the front of the cover member 621, so that the traveling direction of the light reflected in different directions is The direction may be the traveling direction toward the sensor 630. That is, by increasing the amount of light reflected on the sensor 630 side, the operation of detecting the light reception of the sensor 630 can be reliably performed.

  The first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is located on the front side of the wall 612 of the frame 610, and the second portion 621b is located on the back side of the wall 612 of the frame 610 (see FIG. b)). That is, the first portion 621a is disposed substantially at the same position as the rear surface of the base plate 60 or at a position on the front side of the rear surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2). It is arranged at a position on the back side of the vehicle.

  Accordingly, a distance between the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 and the third symbol display device 81 at the upper portion of the center frame 600 can be secured. As a result, the dimension in the front-rear direction when the decorative member 450 of the above-described vertical displacement unit 400 is vertically displaced can be secured, and the decorative member 450 can be displaced. In addition, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased in a limited space between the rear space where the decorative member 450 is displaced and the front space where the glass 8 is disposed.

  Further, since the first portion 621a is disposed at substantially the same position as the rear surface of the base plate 60 or at a position on the front side relative to the rear surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), the decorative member 450 ( The rotation unit 500) can be more reliably prevented from interfering with the first portion 621a, and the displacement member can be correspondingly increased in size.

  Further, since the second portion 621b is disposed at a position on the back side of the back surface of the base plate 60, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased, and the front side of the cover member 621 is used as a light reflection surface. Can be easier. That is, the sensor 630 is arranged on the back side so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the object, and it is possible to secure a range in which the object can be detected.

  In addition, since the first portion 621a is located above the cover member 621, in a store where the gaming machine 10 is installed, the illumination of the fluorescent light of the store is reflected by the cover member 621 and the front side (the player side). Irradiation can be suppressed.

  That is, if the upper portion of the cover member 621 is curved to the rear side, the light of the fluorescent lamp of the store, which is irradiated from obliquely above, is easily reflected to the front side. Since the normal direction is formed as a curved surface directed at least below the horizontal direction, light incident on the front surface of the cover member 621 can be reflected downward. That is, when light from a fluorescent lamp or another gaming machine installed on the ceiling in the store is incident on the front of the cover member 621, such light can be suppressed from being reflected toward the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the player feels dazzling and that the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 is deteriorated.

  Next, the relationship between the center frame 600 and the rotating unit 500 of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 41A and 41B are cross-sectional views of the rotating unit 500 and the center frame 600. FIG. FIG. 41A shows the initial position (reference position) of the rotating unit 500 (position in which the extending direction is horizontally oriented), and FIG. 41B shows that the rotating unit 500 is centered on its rotation axis. In the figure, a mode rotated by 90 degrees is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 is displaced, and the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) and the rear side of the center frame 600. , A predetermined gap is formed between the rotation unit 500 of the decorative member 450 and the cover member 621 of the center frame 600. Thus, the rotation unit 500 can rotate without colliding with the cover member 621.

  In this case, if the rotating member (rotating unit 500) is a role that rotates in front of the third symbol display device 81, the rotation of the rotating member generates a flow of wind, and a sphere flowing down due to the wind is generated. There was a problem of moving.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the rotating unit 500 is located above the stage 611 on which the ball rolls, the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611 is easily affected by the wind due to the rotation of the rotating unit 500.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the attachment portion 623 connected from the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is fastened to the fastening hole 613 recessed below the stage 611 of the frame 610 (that is, the attachment hole 613). Since the lower end portion of the center cover 620 is connected to the lower end of the frame 610), the falling area of the sphere and the displacement area of the rotating unit 500 can be defined. Therefore, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 can be blocked by the cover member 621 (the second portion 621b). As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of the sphere from being affected by the action of the wind. In addition, even when wind is generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 and dust or dust is blown off by the wind, the dust or dust can be blocked by the second portion 621b (the cover member 621). Soaring on the route of light emission and light reception, and a decrease in detection accuracy can be suppressed.

  Here, there is conventionally known a stage 611 of the center frame 600 in which a back wall is erected so that a ball rolling on the stage 611 does not fall to the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500 wraps around the front end from the rear end of the stand erected from the stage 611 or the glass 8 on the front side of the game board 13. To affect the ball rolling on the stage 611. On the other hand, in order to prevent the effect of wind on the ball rolling on the stage 611, the back wall is curved to the front side to have a shape that covers the periphery of the stage ball (that is, a closed passage is formed). ), It is difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611, and the interest of the player is impaired.

  On the other hand, since the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is connected to the area including the stage 611 of the frame 610, the second unit 621b (the cover member 621) generates wind generated by the rotation of the rotating unit 500. Can be blocked by As a result, since there is no need to cover the periphery of the stage 611, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the upper part of the stage 611, and to suppress the influence of the wind from affecting the downflow of the ball.

  Here, if the displacement region where the displacement member (vertical displacement unit 400) is displaced and the flow region where the ball flows down are separated by the partition plate (center cover 620), the rear surface arranged on the back side of the game board 13 will be described. Since many members that generate heat, such as the drive motor 441 that drives the third symbol display device 81 and the vertical displacement unit 400, are disposed in the case 300, heat is generated inside the displacement area (the rear side of the game board 13). ), There is a problem that the board controlling the gaming machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is not connected to the frame 610 and is disposed at a predetermined interval from the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610. The back side and the front side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621 can communicate with each other via a predetermined interval. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the heat generated from the vertical displacement unit 400 from being trapped on the back side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621. As a result, cold air on the front side (rather than the rear side) of the game board 13 can be sent to the back side of the game board 13, so that the base for controlling the game machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since a predetermined interval between the first portion 621a and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 is formed at the upper part of the center frame 600, heated air is supplied to the front side of the game board 13 through the predetermined interval. Can be easily washed away. That is, the warmed air on the back side of the game board 13 is raised by the heat, so that the air is heated from the predetermined interval between the first portion 621a formed above and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 toward the front side. Easy to wash. As a result, it is possible to suppress the heat from being trapped on the back sides of the game board 13 and the cover member 621.

  In this case, when the rotating unit 500 is rotated to generate wind, the wind flows out of a predetermined interval between the first portion 621a and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 and flows down in front of the game board 13. May affect a moving ball.

  On the other hand, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating unit 500 can flow toward the upper area (the area above the opening of the game board 13) of the game area, and the action of the wind causes the sphere to flow. Can be suppressed from being affected. That is, the ball that flows down the upper area of the game area is an initial ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a and flowed into the game area, and has a relatively high speed. Compared to a ball rolling on 611, it is less affected by wind. In other words, the wind can flow toward an area where the ball is less likely to be affected by the wind. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotating member can be increased accordingly, and the effect can be improved.

  Next, the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the sorting device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device 700, and FIG. 43 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the XLIV-XLIV line in FIG. 45A is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the line XLVa-XLVa in FIG. 43, and FIG. 45B is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 45 (c) is a sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the line XLVc-XLVc in FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 (d) is a sectional view of the sorting device 700 along the line XLVd-XLVd in FIG.

  Note that in FIG. 43, the outer peripheral surfaces of the distribution member 760, the seesaw member 762, the communication hole 751, and the collection hole 752 are illustrated by broken lines. In FIG. 45 (d), the path of the ball paid out from the opening 744 is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 to 45, the sorting device 700 is disposed below the center frame 600 of the game board 13 and is disposed on the front side (the front side in FIG. 43) with respect to the base plate 60. It is mainly provided with a side forming portion 710 and a back side forming portion 720 disposed on the back side (the back side in the drawing of FIG. 43) with respect to the base plate 60.

  The front side forming portion 710 is formed mainly including a winning member 730 attached to the front side of the base plate 60, and a bending member 740 disposed on the front side of the winning member 730.

  The rear side forming part 720 is formed mainly including an interposition member 750 attached to the rear side of the base plate 60, and a distribution member 760 arranged on the rear side of the interposition member 750. .

  The winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the first winning opening 64 described above located at the upper center in the left-right direction, and the first electric accessory 640 a located below the first winning opening 64. A through hole 731 located on both left and right sides of the first electric accessory 640a and formed in the front-rear direction, and a lower insertion hole 732 positioned below the through hole 731 and formed in the front and rear direction. , Which are mainly provided.

  The through hole 731 is a member into which an upper protruding portion 741 of a bending member 740 described later is inserted, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view opening slightly larger than the outer shape of the upper protruding portion 741 in a rear view. . A projecting wall 731a projecting upward from the rear surface to the front surface is formed on the lower surface of the through hole 731.

  The two projecting walls 731a are symmetrically arranged side by side with respect to the center line in the left-right direction of the through hole 731 when viewed from the front, and the projecting distance is set to decrease from the rear side to the front side. Therefore, the sphere that passes (rolls) inside the through-hole 731 by the intervening member 750 and the sorting member 760 described later is guided to the center position in the left-right direction of the two protruding walls 731a, and is frontward from the back side. Rolled toward the side.

  The lower insertion hole 732 is a hole that communicates with the collection hole 752 of the interposition member 750 disposed on the back side, and is formed at a position facing the collection hole 752 of the interposition member 750. Further, the lower insertion hole 732 is opened in a substantially D-shape in a front view in which the lower surface side is curved, and a first protruding portion 732a protruding downward from the upper surface at a central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and protruding upward from the lower surface. A second protruding portion 732b.

  The first protruding portion 732a is formed such that the protruding distance increases from the front side (the right side in FIG. 45A) to the rear side (the left side in FIG. 45A). The second protrusion 732b is formed to have a smaller protrusion distance from the front side to the rear side. In addition, the distance between the first protrusion 732a and the second protrusion 732b is slightly larger than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, when the ball passes through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732, the ball can be rolled to the rear side by the inclination of the second protrusion 732b from the front side to the rear side. On the other hand, when the sphere bounces up and down when being inserted through the lower insertion hole 732, the upward displacement can be suppressed by the first protrusion 732a.

  A sensor SE that detects the passage of a sphere is provided on the back surface of the lower insertion hole 732. The sensor SE is a member having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front and having a through-hole having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere formed on a side surface thereof. Can be detected. The sensor SE is disposed such that the axis of the through hole is coaxial with the arc axis on the lower surface side of the lower insertion hole 732. Thus, the opening direction of the through hole can be inclined slightly downward toward the back side, so that the sphere passing through the inside of the through hole of the sensor SE can be suppressed from staying inside the through hole.

  The bending member 740 is a member disposed on the front side of the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 described above, and is located substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) when viewed from the front. Are symmetrically arranged, and their outer shapes are formed symmetrically.

  In addition, the bending member 740 is disposed at a position where a gap large enough to allow a ball to pass is formed between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2) forming the game area in a front view. This suppresses a ball flowing down the lower game area of the bending member 740 from being caught between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 and remaining in the game area.

  The bending member 740 is formed of a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view, and has an upper protruding portion 741 protruding from the back surface thereof, a lower protruding portion 743 protruding from below the upper protruding portion 741, and an upper protruding portion 741. And an opening 744 formed between the lower protruding portions 743 facing each other.

  The upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U-shape whose lower side is open in rear view, and its outer shape is set slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Thus, when the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730, the upper protrusion 741 can be inserted and arranged inside the through hole 731. Therefore, when the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730, the upper projecting portion 741 can be inserted and positioned, so that the assembling process can be simplified.

  In addition, since the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U-shape whose lower side is open in rear view, when the ball passes through the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 and rolls toward the bending member 740, the ball protrudes. The connecting portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is not formed on the rolling surface (lower surface) on which the roller rolls. Therefore, since the rolling of the ball can be kept constant, it is possible to prevent the ball from stopping inside the through hole 731. That is, when the connecting portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is formed on the rolling surface of the ball, the resistance increases when the ball rolls on the connecting portion, and the ball jumps at the step. By eliminating the connecting portion on the rolling surface of the ball, the rolling of the ball can be stabilized and the ball can be prevented from being clogged.

  Further, in this case, even if the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in an annular shape in rear view, and the ball passes through the inside of the annular shape, the winning member 730 and the bending member are similarly formed on the rolling surface on which the ball rolls. Although the connection portion with the 740 is not formed, the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in an annular shape, so that the component shape of the bending member 740 is complicated, and the manufacturing cost is increased. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the upper protruding portion 741 is substantially U-shaped when viewed from the rear, the shape of the component can be simplified, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  The lower protruding portion 743 is formed below the upper protruding portion 741, and is formed in a substantially U-shape in a rear view in which the upper side is opened. That is, when viewed from the rear, the open portions of the upper protruding portion 741 and the lower protruding portion 743 are formed to face each other in the up-down direction.

  The lower protruding portion 743 is a path (hereinafter, referred to as a “second throwing path KR2”) for sending a ball thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 toward the bending member 740 to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. And is formed at a position facing the lower insertion hole 732 in the front-rear direction.

  The projecting distance of the lower projecting portion 743 to the back side is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere. In addition, the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730 in a state where the protruding tip surface of the lower protruding portion 743 is in contact with the winning member 730. Therefore, the distance between the opposing bending member 740 and the winning member 730 is set to be larger than the diameter of the ball, and the ball is thrown vertically (below, referred to as a ball path) between the opposing bending member 740 and the winning member 730. A "first throwing route KR1" is formed.

  The bending member 740 is formed with a guide portion 742 projecting from the upper inner surface of the upper protrusion 741 to the lower inner surface of the lower protrusion 743. The guide portion 742 projects in a substantially U-shape whose back side is open in a side view.

  The guide portion 742 vertically projects a ball thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 (first throwing route KR1), and then throws the ball into the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. The height of the lower inner edge in the vertical direction is slightly smaller than the height of the lower inner edge of the lower insertion hole 732 disposed on the back surface.

  The guide portion 742 is formed symmetrically with respect to the center line in the left-right direction in the front view of the through hole 731 arranged on the back side. Thus, the two guide portions 742 are brought into contact with each other and guided (returned to the back side), so that the ball can be prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction.

  The mutually protruding distal end surfaces of the guide portions 742 arranged side by side are formed so as to be inclined toward the base side as they approach the surfaces facing each other (see FIG. 45B). Accordingly, it is possible to effectively suppress the sphere that is brought into contact with the two guide portions 742 and guided (returned to the rear side) from being displaced in the left-right direction.

  The upper protruding portion 741 is formed with a side wall 741a that protrudes inward from the left and right side surfaces in rear view. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) side walls 741a are juxtaposed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. Accordingly, when the ball thrown inside the upper protruding portion 741 rolls in the left-right direction in the normal state, the throwing ball can be stabilized by contacting the tip end surface of the side wall 741a. On the other hand, when two balls flow continuously inside the upper protruding portion 741 and a ball flowing behind collides with a ball flowing ahead, the preceding ball enters between the side walls 741a, so that the left and right sides are placed. The distance in which the ball escapes in the direction can be ensured to prevent the ball from being clogged inside the upper protrusion 741. That is, the ball thrown inside the upper protrusion 741 can be stabilized by the side wall 741a.

  The opening 744 is a predetermined gap formed between the upper protruding portion 741 and the lower protruding portion 743 facing each other, and is formed on both left and right sides in rear view. Further, the opening 744 is formed in a substantially U-shape whose back side is open in a side view.

  The upper end of the opening 744 is set to be substantially the same in the vertical direction as the lower surface of the through-hole 731 of the winning member 730, and the lower end is positioned at a substantially middle position in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. Is set to the height of Accordingly, when a ball is continuously fed into the bending member 740, it is possible to suppress the ball from being released into the opening 744 and clogging the inside of the bending member 740. That is, the opening 744 is formed so as to open on the side surface in the left-right direction of the connection portion between the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2.

  The distribution member 760 is formed in a box-shaped body with a front side opened while being formed in a horizontally long rectangle in a front view. The distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is formed to be inclined downward from the substantially central position in the left-right direction toward the outside in the left-right direction. The left and right ends of the sorting member 760 are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

  The distributing member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 inclined downward from the center in the left-right direction toward the left and right sides in a front view, a seesaw member 762 arranged at the center of the inclined surfaces 761, and an upper part of the seesaw member 762. And a ball feeding port 763 formed at the center.

  The throwing port 763 is a member for forming an opening on the front side of the sorting member 760, and is formed at a position facing the first winning opening 64 of the winning member 730. Accordingly, when the sorting member 760 is disposed on the interposed member 750 described below, a space A can be formed between the ball feeding port 763 and the interposed member 750.

  The space A is formed in a space larger than the outer diameter of the sphere (that is, a gap through which the sphere can pass), and a first prize port of the prize member 730 through a through hole formed in the base plate 60. 64 (see FIG. 44). As a result, the ball won in the first winning port 64 can be thrown into the space A, and the inside of the space A can be thrown.

  The seesaw member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and has three projections 762a projecting outward at an interval of 90 degrees around the axis from the outer edge thereof, and a shaft inserted inside the annular shape. A portion 762b.

  The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support portion for rotating the seesaw member 762 around the axis, is formed in a columnar shape, and is inserted inside the ring of the seesaw member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the interposed member 750 and the distribution member 760, so that the seesaw member 762 is rotatably disposed around the shaft portion 762b.

  The projection 762a is a projection for alternately allocating the ball to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 one by one when the ball is thrown from the space A described above. A ball is sent to the opposite side. That is, the ball thrown from the space A by the projection 762a at the center can be thrown in the left-right direction. The projections 762a protruding at both ends regulate the displacement of the seesaw member 762 and displace the direction in which the tip of the central projection 762a is located by the weight applied when the ball passes (see the seesaw member 762). The rotation of the seesaw member 762 is restricted by the contact between the tip surface of the protrusion 762a and the inclined surface 761. On the other hand, when the ball is guided by the protrusion 762a at the center of the protrusion 762a that is not in contact with the inclined surface 761, the guided ball collides with the protrusion 762a and is pushed down. As a result, the projection 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the projection 762a displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface 761 to restrict the displacement.

  The inclined surface 761 is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter, referred to as a “third ball-sending path KR3”) in which the balls distributed to the left and right by the above-described seesaw member 762 roll and are thrown. It is formed to incline downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the balls distributed to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760 are rolled on the inclined surface 761 and are sent (rolled) to the descending end of the inclined surface 761.

  At the end on the descending side of the inclined surface 761, the side surface on the back side is formed so as to be inclined in the direction approaching the interposition member 750 so as to increase the thickness forward as approaching the end. Thus, the ball rolled on the inclined surface 761 and sent to the end thereof can be sent to the communication hole 751 of the interposition member 750 disposed in front of the sorting member 760.

  The interposition member 750 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the above-described variable winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. And a collection hole 752 opened below the hole 751.

  The communication holes 751 are formed on the front sides of the left and right ends of the distribution member 760, and are formed on the back side of the through holes 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the spaces at the left and right ends of the sorting member 760 and the internal space of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 are connected via the communication hole 751. Therefore, a path (hereinafter, referred to as a “fourth ball-throwing path KR4”) in which a ball rolling above the inclined surface 761 of the sorting member 760 passes through the communication hole 751 and is thrown into the through-hole 731 of the winning member 730. ) Can be formed.

  The collection hole 752 is an opening formed on the back side of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 as described above. That is, the collection hole 752 is connected to the back side of the sensor SE, and the ball passing through the sensor SE is sent to the opening of the collection hole 752. The collecting hole 752 is connected to a device that circulates the ball installed in the store, and the ball collected in the collecting hole 752 is circulated by the circulating device and is launched again as a game ball from the ball firing unit 112a. .

  The sorting device 700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. The ball entering from the first winning opening 64 is sent to the sorting member 760 and is sent to the third throwing route KR3 in one of the left and right directions by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760. When the ball thrown on the third throwing route KR3 is thrown to the end of the third throwing route KR3, the ball is sent to the fourth throwing route KR4 inside the communication hole 751 of the interposition member 750 arranged on the front side. It is thrown. The ball thrown on the fourth throwing route KR4 is thrown on the first throwing route KR1 on the back side of the bending member 740. The ball thrown on the first throwing route KR1 is guided by the lower protrusion 743 of the bending member 740 and thrown on the second throwing route KR2. The ball thrown in the second throwing route KR2 passes through the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730, passes through the inside of the sensor SE, and is then thrown into the collection hole 752 of the interposition member 3750.

  Here, as described above, the through-hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 are formed on the left and right sides of the first electric accessory 640a, and the bending members 740 are arranged in a pair of left and right. The first electric accessory 640 a is located between the lower protruding portions 743 of the bending member 740.

  In this case, if the angle of the downward inclination of the third throwing path KR3 is made small (the slope is gentle), the falling velocity of the ball becomes low, and the clogging of the ball in the lower protruding portion 743 becomes easy to occur. On the other hand, when the angle of the descending inclination of the third throwing path KR3 is large (the descending inclination is steep), the falling velocity of the ball is increased, so that the clogging of the ball in the lower insertion hole 732 can be made difficult to occur. The space in the height direction (up-down direction) necessary for disposing the third throwing route KR3 (distributing member 760) increases, and it becomes difficult to dispose the first electric accessory 640a.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the opening 744 is formed in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743, it is possible to make it difficult for the lower protruding portion 743 to be clogged with a ball. The angle of the downward inclination can be made small (the downward inclination is gentle). As a result, the space in the height direction required for disposing the third throwing path KR3 (distributing member 760) can be suppressed, and the disposition of the first electric accessory 640a can be enabled. That is, the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the first electric accessory 640 a is an arrangement that is impossible with a conventional product, and is only possible by forming the opening 744 in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743 as described above. It is a thing.

  Here, in the present embodiment, an opening is formed in the center of the game board 13 (the center frame 600 is arranged), and the third symbol display device 81 is visually recognized by the player through the opening. In recent years, in response to a demand for an increase in the size of the third symbol display device 81, the center opening of the game board 13 (the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 of the center frame 600) has also been enlarged, so that it is located below the center opening of the game board 13. The space between the edge and the lower edge of the game area (the lower inner edge of the inner rail 61) is reduced. Therefore, in the conventional product, the members corresponding to the third throwing path KR3 and the first electric accessory 640a are arranged in the space between the lower edge of the central opening of the game board 13 and the lower edge of the game area. It was difficult.

  That is, as described above, when the angle of the downward inclination of the third throwing path KR3 is small (the downward inclination is gentle), the falling velocity of the ball becomes low, and the ball is easily clogged in the lower protruding portion 743. Become. On the other hand, when the angle of the descending inclination of the third throwing path KR3 is large (the descending inclination is steep), the falling velocity of the ball is increased, so that the clogging of the ball in the lower protrusion 743 can be made difficult to occur. The space in the height direction necessary for disposing the third throwing route KR3 increases, and it becomes difficult to dispose the first electric accessory 640a. In addition, since the disposition position of the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) in the vertical direction is lowered (lowered), the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) and the lower edge portion of the game area (the inner rail 61). It is difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass, and it is necessary to provide the first out ports 71 on both sides of the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the opening is formed in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743, the ball clogging in the lower protruding portion 743 can be less likely to occur. The angle of the descending slope of the three throwing route KR3 can be reduced (the descending slope is made gentler). As a result, the position of the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) in the height direction (vertical direction) can be raised (increased), so that the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740) and the game area A gap through which a ball can pass can be secured between the lower edge of the inner rail 61 (the lower inner edge of the inner rail 61). Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the first out ports 71 on both sides of the lower protruding portion 743 (bending member 740).

  That is, in the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the first electric accessory 640a, an arrangement in which a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the lower protruding portion 743 (the bending member 740) and the lower edge of the game area, This is an arrangement that is impossible with conventional products, and has only become possible by forming an opening in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743 as described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the throwing of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 740 will be described. FIG. 46A is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 46B is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13. Note that FIG. 46A corresponds to FIG. 45A, and FIG. 46B corresponds to FIG. 45B.

  As shown in FIG. 46, when two balls are thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 in a manner that there is almost no gap (that is, two balls are connected in succession), the preceding (preceding) A part of the ball is sent to the back side while entering the opening 744 and guided to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730.

  Here, if a passage having a cross-sectional area slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere is formed and the passage is bent, two spheres are formed in the passage with almost no gap (two spheres are connected). ) When the ball is thrown, the following ball sticks to the preceding ball, and the following ball presses against the side wall, so that the two cannot roll and the ball is clogged. Was.

  On the other hand, in the present application, since the opening 744 is formed at the connecting portion between the first ball-sending path KR1 and the second ball-sending path KR2, when the ball passes through the lower protruding portion 743 in a state where a plurality of balls are connected, Even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball can be hardly pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Further, since the opening 744 is formed at a position where the first throwing path KR1 and the second throwing path KR2 make a tolerance, the ball can be hardly clogged at a bent portion where the ball is easily clogged. That is, the area where the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2 intersect is such that the ball that has flowed down (dropped) on the first throwing route KR1 changes direction and turns in the extending direction of the second throwing route KR2. This is the position where the movement starts, and the ball following the preceding ball can easily catch up. Therefore, when the following ball presses the preceding ball against the side wall, the two cannot roll and the ball tends to be clogged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the opening 744 is formed at the position where the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2 intersect. It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to escape between the opposing sides of the opening 744 (by accommodating a part of the preceding ball in the opening 744) and to press it against the side wall, so that the rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, the height of the lower end of the opening 744 is set to the height at the substantially middle position in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730, so that it falls down (flows down) the first throwing path KR1. When the moving ball reaches the bottom wall of the second throwing path KR2 (the lower protruding portion 743), the ball can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball can escape to the space between the opposing openings 744 and cannot be easily pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Further, since the lower protruding portion 743 is formed in a substantially U shape in side view, and the lower end of the opening 744 is installed at a position separated from the bottom wall of the lower protruding portion 743 by a predetermined distance, A side wall can be left (formed) between the lower end of the opening 744 and the second throwing path KR2 (lower protrusion 743). Therefore, even when the opening is formed in a size that allows the ball to pass through, the ball unnecessarily flows from the bending member 740 to the outside (the game area on the front side of the game board 13) through the opening. Can be suppressed.

  In this case, in the case where the size of the opening 744 is such that the sphere cannot pass, the opening 744 can usually be used to make it difficult to press the preceding sphere against the side wall. A mode is formed in which the leading sphere presses the leading sphere against the center of the opening 744, and the leading sphere may be internally fitted (fitted) into the opening 744. In this case, the following rolling of the ball is hindered by the ball fitted into the opening 744, and the ball is clogged.

  On the other hand, the opening 744 is larger than the outer shape of the sphere (formed so as to allow the sphere to pass through), so that the following sphere presses the preceding sphere against the center of the opening 744. Even in this case, the leading ball can be discharged from the opening 744 to the outside of the bending member 740 (the game area on the front side of the game board 13), and the leading ball is fitted (fitted) into the opening 744. Can be avoided. As a result, the rolling of the following ball can be continued, and the occurrence of clogging of the ball can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, the opening 744 is formed in such a size that the ball can pass, and the opening 744 is disposed on the front side of the game board 13 (that is, the game area), so that the game area flows down the game area. The ball to be moved can flow from the opening 744 into the bending member 740. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, when a sensor that detects a winning ball is provided downstream of the lower protruding portion 743, in addition to the ball that has flowed into the bending member 740 from upstream of the lower protruding portion 743, the bending member The ball that has flowed into 740 can also be detected as a winning ball. In particular, in this case, since the opening 744 (the area where the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2 intersect) is disposed on the front side of the game board 13, the opening 744 flows into the bending member 740 from the opening 744. The player can visually recognize the playing ball. Therefore, also from this point, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In a region where the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2 make a tolerance, a lower portion of the guide portion 742 (that is, a portion which is curved toward the collection hole 752 and inclined downward) is disposed. Accordingly, when the ball flowing down (falling) on the first throwing path KR1 changes direction and starts rolling in the extending direction of the second throwing path KR2, the ball is inclined downward by the guide portion 742. It can be rolled quickly by utilizing. This makes it easy for the preceding ball to roll before the succeeding ball catches up, and the preceding ball can be rolled by the following ball on the back side (along the extending direction of the second throwing route KR2). Since it can be suppressed from being pressed against the side wall on the rear side during rolling, the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the opening 744 is formed at a position on the front side (game area side) of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), ball clogging occurs at a bent portion between the first and second throwing paths KR1 and KR2. In this case, the store operator can access the opening 744 from the front side by opening the glass 8. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging.

  Further, when dust or dirt accumulates at the bent portion between the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2, the store operator opens the glass 8 to access the opening 744 from the front side. Thus, the bent portion can be cleaned through the opening 744. Therefore, the cleaning performance when cleaning the first ball-sending path KR1 and the second ball-sending path KR2 can be improved.

  Next, the light emitting decoration unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 800.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the light-emitting decoration unit 800 includes a base 810 having a horizontally-long rectangular shape in a front view disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and a front side of the base 810. The light emitting device 820 mainly includes a light emitting device 820 to be provided, and a cover member 830 that is provided on the front surface of the light emitting device 820 and that is made of a light transmissive material.

  On the front side of the light-emitting device 820, a plurality of light-emitting bodies (LEDs 821) are dispersedly arranged over the entire surface. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 821 is emitted from the entire surface of the cover member 830 to the front side of the gaming machine.

  Next, a regulation unit 2490 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The same portions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the regulating unit 2490 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the regulation unit 2490 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 49 (a) is a side view of the regulation unit 2490, FIG. 49 (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit 2490, and FIG. 49 (c) is a view taken along the line XLIXc-XLIXc of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the regulation unit 2490.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, in the regulation unit 2490 in the second embodiment, the roller member 492 is supported by the rotating member 2494, and the position of the roller member 492 can be adjusted by the rotation of the rotating member 2494. You.

  The regulating unit 2490 includes a case member 2491 formed in a box-like body, an outer edge member 2493 disposed on the outer edge of the case member 2491 on the open side, and a space between the case member 2491 and the outer edge member 2493 facing each other. It is mainly formed with a rotating member 2494 that is rotatably supported by being sandwiched and a roller member 492 that is supported by the rotating member 2494.

  The case member 2491 is formed in a box shape having an opening on the back side, and is formed to have a larger width dimension in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 49B) than the case member 491 in the first embodiment. The case member 2491 is mainly formed with a projecting portion 491a projecting from the front side surface, and a cutout portion 2491b cut out in a semicircular shape on both side surfaces in the left-right direction.

  The notch portion 2491b is formed by being cut out in a semicircular shape at a substantially central position in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 49 (b)) on both sides of the case member 2491 in the horizontal direction (FIG. 49 (b) horizontal direction). You. The cutout portion 2491b is a cutout for rotatably supporting a shaft portion 2494b of a rotating member 2494 described later inside, and has an inner diameter set to be larger than an outer diameter of the rotating member 2494.

  The outer edge member 2493 is a member that is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the back side (open side) of the case member 2491. The outer edge member 2493 has an inner shape substantially the same shape as the opening of the case member 2491. In addition, an upright portion 2493a that stands upright on the front side is formed around the inner edge on the side surface on the front side (the case member 491 side) of the outer edge member 2493.

  The upright portion 2493a is formed with a recessed portion 2493a1 that is recessed on the back side. The recessed portion 2493a1 is formed at a position facing the notch 2491b of the case member 2492. Therefore, the rotating member 2494 can be disposed on the case member 2491 in a rotatable state by sandwiching the rotating member 2494 described below between the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491 and the concave portion 2493a1.

  The rotating member 2494 is formed of a plate-like body having an oblong shape in a side view, and has a longitudinal dimension smaller than a vertical dimension of an inner portion of the case member 2491. The rotating member 2494 includes a shaft portion 2494b protruding in a cylindrical shape outward in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491 at the center in the longitudinal direction, a shaft support hole 2494a formed through both sides of the shaft portion 2494b, and a shaft. And a regulating portion 2494c bulging radially outward from the protruding tip of the portion 2494b.

  The shaft portion 2494b is protruded longer than the thickness of the case member 2491 formed in a box-like body, and a restricting portion 2494c bulging in the radial direction is formed at the protruding tip portion. Accordingly, the shaft member 2494b is fitted inside the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491 and the concave portion 2493a1 of the outer edge member 2493 is provided from the back side, so that the rotating member 2494 can be rotated with respect to the case member 2491. In addition to the axial support, the restricting portion 2494c can restrict the rotation member 2494 from displacing in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491.

  The shaft support hole 2494a is an opening through which the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 is inserted. The shaft support hole 2494a is formed in a circular shape, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b. Thus, the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 in a state where the retaining ring E1 is removed is inserted into the shaft support hole 2494a, and then the retaining ring E1 is externally fitted to the shaft portion 492b, so that the roller member 492 can be rotated. Can be disposed on the rotating member 2494.

  The regulation unit 2490 configured as described above is assembled as follows.

  First, the shaft 492b of the roller member 492 is inserted into the shaft support hole 2494a of the pair of rotating members 2494, and the roller member 492 is supported by the rotating member 2494. Thus, two roller members 492 can be arranged in a vertically arranged state between the rotating members 2494 arranged in a pair.

  Next, a torsion spring (not shown) is provided on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494, and after fitting inside the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491, the outer edge member 2493 is provided from the back side to rotate. The member 2494 can be disposed so as to be rotatable about the shaft portion 2494b with respect to the case member 2491. Thus, the position of the roller member 492 disposed on the rotating member 2494 can be displaced by rotating and displacing the rotating member 2494. Also, a state in which the roller member 492 disposed above the roller members 492 disposed vertically is urged to the front side (the left side in FIG. 49 (c)) by the torsion spring disposed on the shaft portion 2494b. It can be.

  Next, referring to FIG. 50, a description will be given of a state of contact between the decoration member 450 and the regulating unit 2490 when the decoration member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position. (A) to (c) of FIG. 50 are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG. 50 (a) corresponds to FIG. 24 (a), FIG. 50 corresponds to FIG. 24 (b), and FIG. 21 (c) corresponds to FIG. 18 (c).

  As shown in FIG. 50A, when the decorative member 450 is positioned above the regulating unit 2490, the rotating member 2494 is provided by a torsion spring (not shown) disposed on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494. Is rotated, and the roller member 492 disposed above the roller member 492 disposed below is positioned on the front side.

  As a result, the decorative member 450 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 21A, and the lower end surface of the decorative member 450 shown in FIG. When the roller 492a of the roller member 492 disposed on the upper side is displaced to the vertical position, the pressure of the roller 492a which abuts on the decoration member 450 and suppresses the decoration member 450 is lower than that of the regulating unit 2490 of the first embodiment. Can be smaller. In this case, the rotating member 2494 is in contact with a projection (not shown) formed inside the case member 2491, and the roller member 492 disposed on the upper side is not displaced to the front side (the rotating member 2494 is not rotated). The upper side does not rotate to the front side).

  Therefore, when the decorative member 450 is further displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 21B to the first position shown in FIG. 50C, a driving force is applied to the decorative member 450. Increase of the energy consumption of the driving motor 441 can be suppressed.

  When the decoration member 450 is displaced to the first position shown in FIG. 50 (c), the roller 492a disposed below is in contact with the decoration member 450. As a result, the lower roller member 492 is pressed to the rear side and is displaced to the rear side, and the upper roller 492a is displaced to the front side. Thus, the pressing force of the roller 492a disposed on the upper side against the decoration member 450 can be increased. As a result, when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position, the decorative member 450 can be firmly held by the pressing force of the roller members 492 arranged vertically. On the other hand, when the decoration member 450 is located in the middle of the displacement, the pressing force acting on the decoration member 450 can be reduced to make it easier to displace. That is, with the displacement of the decoration member 450, the pressing force applied to the decoration member 450 from the regulating unit 2490 can be changed.

  Next, a distribution device 700 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the sorting device 3700 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device 3700 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 3700. FIG. 53 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 3700 along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 52, and FIG. 53 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 3700 along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 52 (b). .

  As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, in the sorting device 3700 in the third embodiment, the opening of the second winning opening 640 is connected to the sorting device 3700.

  The distribution device 3700 is disposed below the center frame 600 of the game board 13 and is disposed on the front side with respect to the base plate 60, and is disposed on the rear side with respect to the base plate 60. And a front side forming portion 3710 to be formed.

  The front side forming portion 3710 is formed mainly including a winning member 3730 attached to the base plate 60, and a bending member 3740 disposed on the front side of the winning member 3730.

  The rear side forming portion 3720 includes an interposition member 3750 attached to the base plate 60, a distribution member 760 disposed on the back side of the interposition member 3750, and an interposition member located below the distribution member 760. And a second throwing path 3770 disposed on the back side of the 3750.

  The winning member 3730 is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the first winning opening 64 described above at the upper center in the left-right direction, a first electric accessory 640a below the first winning opening 64, and a first electric winning member. A through-hole 731 formed in the front-rear direction on both sides in the left-right direction of the accessory 640a, a second through-hole 3733 formed in the front-rear direction below the through-hole 731, and a second through-hole 3733 below the second through-hole 3733. And a lower insertion hole 732 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The second through hole 3733 is an opening through which a sphere passes, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape as viewed from the front, which is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. The second through-hole 3733 is formed below the second winning opening 640, and a second protruding wall 3733a is formed on the lower surface and protrudes upward from the back side to the front side. .

  The two second protruding walls 3733a are symmetrically arranged side by side with respect to the center line in the left-right direction of the second through hole 3733 when viewed from the front, and the protruding distance is set to be smaller from the back side to the front side. Therefore, when a sphere passes through the inside of the second through hole 3733 by the intervening member 3750 and the second ball feeding path to be described later, the sphere can be guided to the left-right center position of the two second projecting walls 3733a, and It can be rolled from the back side to the front side.

  The bending member 3740 is a member disposed on the front side of the through-hole 731, the second through-hole 3733, and the lower insertion hole 732 of the above-described winning member 3730. The pair of outer shapes are formed symmetrically.

  The bending member 3740 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate-like body as viewed from the front, and has an upper protruding portion 741 protruding from the back side thereof, an intermediate protruding portion 3745 protruding from below the upper protruding portion 741, and an intermediate protruding portion thereof. And a lower protrusion 743 projecting from below 3745.

  The intermediate protruding portion 3745 is a wall portion that is formed to be long in the up-down direction (vertical direction in FIG. 53B) when viewed from the rear, is formed at the left and right sides of the second through hole 3733, and the upper side surface is The two through holes 3733 are formed at the same height as a substantially middle position in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the lower side surface of the intermediate projecting portion 3745 is formed below the bottom surface of the second through hole 3733.

  In addition, a second opening 3746 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate protruding portion 3745 and the upper protruding portion 741. On the other hand, an opening 744 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate protruding portion 3745 and the lower protruding portion 743.

  The second opening 3746 is formed in a substantially U-shape that is open on the back side in side view, and has an inner shape larger than the outer shape of the sphere. That is, the second opening 3746 is set to a size that allows the ball to pass. The detailed description of the second opening 3746 will be described later.

  The second throwing path 3770 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape in a front view, and has a substantially box-like shape having a constant thickness with an open front side. The second throwing path 3770 is a throwing path for throwing a ball entering the inside of the second winning opening 640 into the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730, and is disposed on the back side of the interposition member 3750. A ball feeding path for feeding a ball can be formed between the inside of the second ball feeding path 3770 and the interposition member 3750.

  In addition, the second throwing path 3770 is disposed such that the left end in front view is located behind the second winning opening 640 of the winning member 3730, and the right end is the second through hole of the winning member 3730. It is arranged on the back side of 3733. That is, the second throwing path 3770 is disposed on the interposition member 3750 in such a manner that the left end in the front view is located above the right end, and is inclined downward toward the right end.

  Further, the second throwing path 3770 has a left end in front view connected to the second winning opening 640 and a right end connected to the second connection hole 3753 of the interposition member 3750. As a result, the ball that has entered the inside of the second winning opening 640 is thrown into the second throwing path 3770, and then rolls through the inside of the second throwing path 3770 from the left end to the right end. The ball is sent to the second connection hole 3753 of the installation member 3750.

  The interposition member 3750 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the above-described variable prize device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction, and a communication hole 751 located on both left and right sides of the variable prize device 65 and formed through the front and rear direction. And a collection hole 752 located below the communication hole 751 and formed in the front-rear direction, and a second connection hole 3753 formed between the communication hole 751 and the collection hole 752 on the right side and formed in the front-rear direction. And is formed.

  The second connection hole 3753 is formed to penetrate in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, the inner shape thereof is set to be larger than the outer shape of the sphere, and is formed at a position on the back side of the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 730. . As a result, the ball rolled inside the above-described second ball feeding path 3770 passes through the inside of the second connection hole 3753 and is sent to the second through hole 3733 of the interposition member 750.

  The sorting device 3700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. The ball entering from the first winning opening 64 is sent to the sorting member 760 and is alternately sent to the inclined surface 761 in one of the left and right directions by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760. When the ball rolling on the inclined surface 761 is thrown to the end of the inclined surface 761, the ball passes through the inside of the communication hole 751 of the interposition member 3750 arranged on the front side and is placed on the back side of the bending member 740. It is thrown. The ball thrown to the back side of the bending members 740 and 3740 is guided along the protruding distal end surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending members 740 and 3740, and falls downward, and drops in the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730. After passing through the inside of the sensor SE after passing through the inside, the ball is sent to the collection hole 752 of the interposition member 3750.

  The ball entering from the second winning opening 640 is sent to the second throwing path 3770, and is sent from the left end to the right end inside the second throwing path 3770. The ball thrown to the right end of the second throwing path 3770 passes through the inside of the second connection hole 3753 of the interposition member 3750 disposed on the front side, and passes through the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730. Later, while being guided along the projecting distal end surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 3740, it falls downward, passes through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730, and passes through the inside of the sensor SE. The ball is sent to the collection hole 752 of the installation member 3750.

  Therefore, in the sorting device 3700, a ball entering from the second winning opening 640 can be detected by the sensor SE disposed on the right side of the winning member 3730 in a front view, so that the ball is newly added to the throwing path from the second winning opening 640. There is no need to provide a sensor SE. That is, the sensor SE that detects a ball entering from the first winning opening 64 can also serve as a sensor SE that detects a ball entering the second winning opening 640, so that the cost of the product can be reduced accordingly. it can.

  Next, the second opening 3746 of the bending member 3740 will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting device 3700. FIG. 54 (a) corresponds to FIG. 53 (a), and FIG. 54 (b) corresponds to FIG. 53 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 54, a ball enters from the first winning opening 64 and is thrown, and is sent to the back side of the bending member 3740, and a ball enters from the second winning opening 640 and is sent, and the bending member 3740 If the ball sent to the back side is sent to the back side of the bending member 3740 at substantially the same timing, the balls on the back side of the bending member 740 may contact each other and the ball may be clogged.

  That is, a ball (hereinafter, referred to as a “lower ball”) sent from the second winning opening 640 and sent from the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730 to the bending member 3740 is transmitted from the first winning opening 64. The ball is thrown, is thrown from the through hole 731 of the winning member 3730 to the back side of the bending member 3740, and collides with a ball (hereinafter, referred to as an “upper ball”) that falls from above the bending member 3740 to below. If the ball is caught on the front end of the second through hole 3733, the ball may be stuck and clogged.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, since the second opening 3746 is formed in the bending member 3740, the lower ball is discharged by discharging the upper sphere from the second opening 3746 or escaping between the opposing surfaces of the second opening 3746. It is possible to eliminate the state of equilibrium between the ball and the upper ball and suppress the ball from being clogged in the ball feeding path of the bending member 3740.

  That is, when the upper sphere rides on the lower sphere to form a balanced state, the second opening 3746 is formed in the left-right side surface where the upper sphere is located, and the upper spheres Since the ball is leaned to the left or right due to the spherical shape, the upper sphere is sent into the left or right second opening 3744. This makes it possible to eliminate the balance between the lower ball and the upper ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball from being clogged in the ball feeding path of the bending member 3740.

  Next, a sorting device 4700 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 55 (a) is a front view of the sorting device 4700 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 4700 along the line LVb-LVb in FIG. 55 (a). FIG. 55C is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 4700 along the line LVc-LVc in FIG. In FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c), the path through which the sphere passes is schematically illustrated by broken lines.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a) to FIG. 55 (c), the sorting device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment has a prize port located below the opening 744 of the bending member 740 in the left and right direction (left and right direction in FIG. 55 (a)). 4063 is provided.

  The winning opening 4063 is an opening through which a ball flowing down the game area can pass, and is provided on the front side of the game board 13. The winning opening 4063 has a rear side connected to a third connecting hole 4754a of an interposing member 4750, which will be described later, and the ball that has entered the inside of the winning opening 4063 is guided to the third communication hole 54752a.

  The collection hole 752 of the interposition member 4750 is formed to be bent downward at the tip of the second throwing path KR2, and a path through which the ball passes and is thrown downward (sixth throwing path KR6) is formed. You. That is, the sixth throwing route KR6 and the second throwing route KR2 are connected.

  A third connection hole 4752a protruding to the left and right sides is formed in the sixth throwing path KR6, and a sensor SE for detecting passage of a sphere is provided below the third connection hole 4752a.

  The third connection hole 4752a is connected to an open portion on the back side of the winning opening 4063. Thus, the ball that has entered the winning opening 4063 is thrown into the third connection hole 4752a, and is sent to the sixth throwing path.

  Further, a sensor SE2 different from the sensor SE provided in the sixth throwing path KR6 is provided on the passage of the third connection hole 4752a. Thus, a sphere that has entered the inside of the third connection hole 4752a can be detected.

  Thus, the ball discharged from the opening 744 of the bending member 740 can be made to win the winning opening 4063. That is, not only the form in which the ball guided by the bending member 740 passes through the sensor SE, but also the form in which the ball flows out of the opening 744 into the game area, and further, the outflowing ball enters the winning opening 4063, and the sensor SE2 is moved. A passing form can be formed, and amusement can be given to the game.

  The winning opening 4063 may be arranged at a position capable of receiving all of the balls flowing out of the opening 744 into the game area, or may be partially arranged depending on the state of the ball flowing out of the opening 744 into the game area. Some balls may be arranged in a position where they can be received and some balls are not.

  In addition, since the opening 744 is formed at a connection portion between the first ball-throwing passage KR1 and the second ball-throwing passage KR2, the ball that is likely to be clogged is paid out from the opening to the game area, so that the first ball-throwing path KR1 is formed. The ball can be prevented from being clogged at the connection between the ball and the second throwing route KR2.

  Furthermore, since the bending member 740 in which the winning opening 4063 and the opening 744 are formed is arranged on the front side of the game board 13, a mode in which a ball is paid out from the opening 744 and enters the winning opening 4063 can be visually recognized by the player. Yes, it can be interesting and easy to give to the player.

  Since the third connection hole 4752a is connected above the sensor SE arranged in the sixth throwing path KR6, the ball entering from the winning opening 4063 only passes through the sensor SE2 arranged in the third connection hole 4752a. Without passing through the sensor SE arranged in the sixth throwing route KR6. Therefore, since the ball coming from the winning opening 4063 can pass the two sensors, it is possible to give the player an interest.

  Further, since the balls sent to the bending member 740 are sorted left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760, the balls are continuously connected to the connecting portion between the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2. Can be suppressed from being thrown. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball from being clogged at the connecting portion between the first throwing route KR1 and the second throwing route KR2.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining some or all of one embodiment with some or all of other one or more embodiments.

  In the first embodiment, the case where one sensor 630 is provided on the center frame 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, two sensors 630 may be arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line in the left-right direction of the center frame 600. Three or more sensors 630 may be provided.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the sensor 630 is provided on the frame body 610 of the center frame 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sensor 630 may be disposed on the front cover 460 of the vertical displacement unit 400. In this case, since the irradiation range of the sensor 630 can be widened, the detection area of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 is formed as a curved surface having a convex front surface is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent in a substantially V-shaped cross section at the front center portion. Further, it may be formed as a convex curved surface on the back side. Alternatively, a curved surface may be partially formed. At least, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the cover member 630 so that an object in front of the game board 13 can be detected.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 is made to have the player visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 provided on the back side and also serves as the light emitted from the sensor 630 is used. Although described above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the area of the cover member 621 may be an area where the third symbol display device 81 is visually recognized by a player and an area where light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected. The area may be divided into two. This modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of a center frame 600 as a modification. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 56 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 40B, and only the cross-section of the center cover 620 is schematically illustrated. Further, in FIG. 56, the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side of the center frame 600 is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 includes a second region R2 at both ends in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 56), and a center side (the third symbol display device) of the second region R2 at both ends. 81 front side) and a first region R1.

  The first region R1 is a region where the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side of the cover member 621 is visible to a player, and is formed of a light-transmissive material having relatively high transparency. The second region R2 is a region that reflects light emitted from the sensor 630 to the front side (the player side) of the gaming machine 13. Note that the boundary position between the first region R1 and the second region R2 only needs to be visible from a player located on the front side of the gaming machine 13, and is substantially the same as the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view. The same position is preferred. Further, in this modified example, a description will be given of a mode in which sensors 630 are provided at both left and right ends for easy understanding.

  In this case, for example, a member having high reflectivity such as silver halide may be coated on the back side or the front side of the second region R2. Alternatively, a silver seal may be attached to the rear side or the front side of the second region R2. In this case, since the light emitted from the sensor 630 can be easily reflected, an object on the front side of the game board 13 can be more reliably detected.

  Alternatively, the portion of the second region R2 may have a curved shape that is convex toward the back side, or the portion of the second region R2 may be a flat surface. In this case, the range in which the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the second region R2 and emitted to the front side can be widened, so that the detection range of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the sensor 630 is disposed in front of the cover member 621 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sensor 630 may be disposed rearward of the cover member 621. May be provided. In this case, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is transmitted through the cover member 621, so that an object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected. Further, in this case, since the cover member 620 has a curved shape that is convex toward the front side, when light emitted from the sensor 630 enters the cover member 630, the irradiation angle can be changed. That is, by transmitting the cover member 630 having a curved shape convex to the front side, the irradiation range of the sensor 630 emitted to the front side of the game board 13 can be widened.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the two inclined surfaces 761 (third throwing path KR3) of the sorting member 760 are formed with the same length has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 761 (the third throwing route KR3) may have different lengths. In this case, the time required for each of the balls distributed to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 720 to be detected by the sensor SE can be made different between the left and right paths, so that the player can be given an interest.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the roller 492a may be formed of a material having a lower elastic modulus than rubber or urethane, and an elastic member such as rubber or urethane may be fitted on the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a. In this case, since the volume of the elastic body can be reduced, the manufacturing cost of the roller member 492 can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the thickness of the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 is formed constant has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the thickness of the cover member 621 may be changed. For example, the cross-sectional shape of the cover member 621 may be substantially D-shaped. In this case, since the cover member 621 is a convex lens, the third symbol display device 81 and the decorative member 450 arranged on the back side of the cover member 621 can be displayed in a large size.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 by using the elastic deformation of the roller 492a has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may use the displacement of the roller 492a. For example, even if the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is formed to be displaceable, the roller 492a is displaced, and the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. Good.

  In this case, the roller 492a can be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 without using the elastic deformation of the roller 492a. It is not necessary to form with a material having a high modulus of elasticity. For example, it can be formed with a resin having a lower modulus of elasticity than rubber or urethane, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the above-described third embodiment, the case where the roller 492a disposed on the upper side comes into contact with the decorative member 450 before the roller 492a disposed on the lower side has been described. The roller 492a may be in contact with the decorative member 450 after the roller 492a disposed below.

  For example, the roller 492a disposed above the regulating unit 490 at the initial position (the position where the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 is separated from the roller 492a) is moved in the front-rear direction with the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (FIG. 50). (A) in the left-right direction). In this case, when the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position, the time until the decorative member 450 abuts on the roller 492a is delayed as compared with the first and third embodiments. The time during which the load (resistance) increases can be shortened.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the irradiation control unit 544 and the LED 532 are arranged in contact with each other has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined distance may be set between the irradiation control unit 544 and the LED. A gap may be formed. In this case, since both ends of the irradiation hole 543 can be in an open state, it is possible to suppress the air from staying (stagnating) inside the irradiation hole 543. That is, since a flow of air can be generated inside the irradiation hole 543, the heat generated by the operation of the LED 532 can be efficiently cooled.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the rough surface processing is formed into an uneven shape has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rough surface processing may be a surface including only protrusions (projections). Alternatively, the surface may be composed of only concave portions (dents). Further, the rough surface processing may be extended as a strip or a groove. Furthermore, the concave and convex cross-sectional shapes may be any of a circle, a keypress, a polygon diameter, and a combination thereof. That is, as long as a portion higher and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (surfaces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and irregular reflection is possible, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary.

  In each of the above embodiments, the smoke generating device (smoke generating means) for generating smoke is provided on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60), and the smoke generated from the smoke generating device is transferred to the displacement area of the rotary unit 500. (Rotational region). That is, an atmosphere filled with smoke may be formed in the space between the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 600 (center cover 620). Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be visually recognized by the player while passing the smoke, and the blinking of the LED 532 can be emphasized. In addition, it is possible to make only the blinking of the LED 532 visible while hiding the rotating unit 500 or the member on the back side thereof (making it difficult for a player to visually recognize) with the smoke. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect produced by the LED 532 (light).

  In the conventional product, the smoke is pushed out to the outer peripheral side with the rotation of the rotating unit, and it is difficult to fill the above-mentioned space with the smoke. Therefore, it was difficult to obtain the effect of smoke. On the other hand, according to the rotating unit 500 in each of the above-described embodiments, the ventilation holes 512 and 522 are opened in the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, and the rear surface of the structure in which the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are assembled. Since the side is opened, the outside air taken in from the ventilation holes 512 and 522 can be exhausted from the back side and circulated. Therefore, it is possible to fill the above-mentioned space with smoke (leave around the rotating unit 500). As a result, the LED 532 can be turned on and off in an atmosphere filled with smoke, and the above-described effects can be obtained.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the center cover 620 as an example>
A game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and the liquid crystal display device emitting light and receiving light reflected by the light object A sensor device for detecting the presence of the object on the front side of the game machine, wherein the light transmission material is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, at least the front is formed as a convex curved surface. A gaming machine A1 comprising a front member made of:

  Here, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device that is disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and an object that emits light and emits the light (eg, a player's hand) 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine equipped with a sensor device (motion sensor) that detects the presence of an object on the front side of a liquid crystal display device by receiving reflected light is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-208139). In this case, if the sensor device is exposed so as to be visible to the player, the interest of the player is impaired. For this reason, the sensor device is arranged on the back side of the decorative member, and is difficult to be visually recognized by a player. When the sensor device emits light and detects the presence of an object by receiving light reflected by the object through the opening portion on the side of the decoration member, the sensor device detects the presence of the object on the side of the decoration member. The further away from the part (retreating to the back side), the more difficult it is for the player to see, but the range in which the object can be detected becomes narrower, and the sensor device is opened to the side of the decorative member. The closer the object is, the wider the range in which the object can be detected, but the easier it is for the player to visually recognize the object. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for a player to visually recognize the sensor device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the sensor device emits light from the sensor device because it is provided on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, and has at least the front surface formed as a convex curved surface and the front member made of a light transmitting material. The reflected light can be reflected by the front member to reach the object, and the light reflected by the object can be reflected by the front member to reach the sensor device. Therefore, since the sensor device can be disposed apart from the opening portion on the side of the decorative member (retracted to the back side), the sensor device is hardly visually recognized by the player, and the object is removed. A detectable range can be secured. In addition, since the front member is made of a light-transmitting material, visibility of a symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be secured.

  Further, since the front surface is a convex curved surface, when light emitted from the sensor device is reflected at the front of the front member, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) is set to be more acute at a position close to the sensor device. On the other hand, at a position far from the sensor device, the angle of reflection (each reflection) can be made more obtuse, and the range in which an object can be detected can be increased accordingly. The same applies to the case where the light reflected by the object is reflected at the front of the front member.

  The gaming machine A2, wherein in the gaming machine A1, the thickness of at least a portion of the front member formed as the curved surface is set to a substantially constant value.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the thickness of at least the portion formed as the curved surface of the front member is set to a substantially constant value, so that the front member acts as a convex lens. And the visibility of the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be ensured. In addition, since a space can be formed on the back side of the front member, a space for displacing another member (a displaceable member) can be secured accordingly.

  The gaming machine A2 includes a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between the liquid crystal display device and the front member, wherein the front member has a first portion of a peripheral edge of the front member closer to the front than a second portion. A gaming machine A3, wherein the gaming machine A3 is disposed at a position where:

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A2, the front member is disposed at a position where the first part of the peripheral edge of the front member is closer to the front than the second part, so that the game is played. The first portion can be used as a passage when the displacement member is displaced between the back side of the board and the back side of the front member. On the other hand, since the second portion of the peripheral edge of the front member is located on the back side of the first portion, the curvature of the front member can be increased in a limited space accordingly.

  The first portion of the front member is disposed substantially at the same position as the back of the game board or at a position closer to the front than the back of the game board, and the second portion of the front member is located at a position higher than the back of the game board. A gaming machine A4, which is provided at a position on the back side.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A3, the first portion of the front member is disposed substantially at the same position as the rear surface of the game board or at a position closer to the front side than the rear surface of the game board. Interference of the displacement member with the first portion can be more reliably suppressed, and the size of the displacement member can be increased accordingly. In addition, since the second portion of the front member is disposed at a position on the back side of the back of the game board, the curvature of the front member can be further increased, and accordingly, the front of the front member is exposed to light. It can be easily used as a reflective surface. That is, it is possible to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making the sensor device hard to be visually recognized by a player.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, a center frame is provided at an inner edge of an opening of the gaming board, and the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable between a back side of the gaming board and a back side of the front member. A gaming machine A5, comprising: a main body member, and a rotating member rotatably disposed on the main body member, wherein a second portion of the front member is connected to the center frame.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3 or A4, the second portion is connected to the center frame, so that the displacement member (main body member) is displaced to the back side of the front member and the rotating member is rotated. The wind generated by this can be blocked by the second portion (front member). As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of the sphere from being affected by the action of the wind. Further, even when wind is generated by the rotation of the rotating member and dust or dust is blown off by the wind, the dust or dust can be blocked by the second portion (front member). -It is possible to suppress the occurrence of soaring on the optical path of the received light and a decrease in detection accuracy.

  In the gaming machine A5, the center frame includes a stage on which a ball is formed to be rollable, and a second portion of the front member is connected to a range including at least the stage of the center frame. Gaming machine A6.

  Here, there is conventionally known a stage of a center frame in which a back wall is erected so that a ball rolling on the stage does not fall to the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating member wraps around the front end from the standing end of the back wall erected from the stage, or is folded back by the glass plate on the front side of the game board. Influence the ball rolling on the stage. On the other hand, in order to prevent the ball rolling on the stage from being affected by the wind, the rear wall is curved to the front side so as to cover the periphery of the stage ball (that is, a closed passage is formed). Since it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the stage, the interest of the game is spoiled.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A5, the second portion of the front member is connected to at least the area including the stage of the center frame, so that the rotating member is rotated. The wind generated by this can be blocked by the second portion (front member). As a result, since there is no need to cover the periphery of the stage, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the stage and to suppress the influence of the wind from affecting the flow of the ball.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the first portion of the front member is disposed at a predetermined interval from an inner edge of the opening of the gaming board or a center frame.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in any one of the gaming machines A5 and A6, the first portion of the front member is disposed at a predetermined interval from the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board or the center frame. Further, the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member can be communicated with each other via the predetermined interval. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat generated from the displacement member (the main body member or the rotating member) from being trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of a peripheral edge of the front member.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in the vertically upper region of the periphery of the front member, so that the rotating member is rotated. Can be caused to flow toward an upper region (a region above the opening of the game board) of the game area, and it is possible to suppress the influence of the wind from affecting the flow of the ball. That is, the ball that flows down the upper area of the game area is an initial ball that has been fired from the firing device and flowed into the game area, and has a relatively high speed. Less susceptible to wind than a moving ball. In other words, the wind can flow toward an area where the ball is less likely to be affected by the wind. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotating member can be increased accordingly, and the effect can be improved.

  Here, when heat is generated from the displacement member (the main body member or the rotating member), the air heated by the heat is raised, and the first portion of the front member is located on the upper side in the vertical direction of the peripheral edge of the front member. The gap (predetermined interval) formed in the region, that is, the communication between the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member can be formed more upward. As a result, heat generated from the displacement member (the main body member or the rotating member) is easily flowed to the front side of the game board and the front member through the gap, and the heat is trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member. Can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine A9 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, wherein a front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed at least below the horizontal direction.

  Here, since the front member is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, it is almost faced to the face of the player (facing directly in front). Therefore, when the front of the front member is formed as a convex curved surface, light from fluorescent lights and other gaming machines installed on the ceiling in the store is reflected toward the player, and the player feels dazzling, The visibility of the liquid crystal display device may be degraded (the liquid crystal display device may be difficult to see due to the reflection of fluorescent lights and other game machines on the front member).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines A1 to A8, the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed at least below the horizontal direction. The light incident on the front of the front member can be reflected downward. That is, when light from a fluorescent lamp or another gaming machine installed on the ceiling in the store is incident on the front of the front member, such light can be suppressed from being reflected toward the player, and as a result, It is possible to suppress that the player feels dazzling and that the visibility of the liquid crystal display device is deteriorated.

  In the gaming machine A9, a first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of a peripheral edge of the front member, and the front member has a thickness dimension of at least a portion formed as the curved surface. The gaming machine A10, wherein the gaming machine A10 is set to a constant value, and the horizontal component increases as the front is positioned vertically upward.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, the first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of the periphery of the front member, and the front member is formed at least as a curved surface. The thickness dimension of the portion is set to a substantially constant value, and the horizontal component increases as the front is positioned vertically upward, so that the air heated by the heat generated from the displacement member (the main body member or the rotating member) Can be raised along the back surface of the front member, and the raised air (heat) can be transferred to a first portion of the front member (a gap (predetermined space) that allows the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member to communicate with each other. Of the game board and the front side of the front member. As a result, it is possible to suppress the heat from being trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the sorting device 700 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass, and a bent portion formed in a part of the passage member, the passage member includes an opening formed in a side wall of the bent portion. A gaming machine B1 characterized by the following.

  Here, a game machine provided with a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-97764). In this case, a bent portion may be formed in a part of the passage member. By forming the bent portion, the direction in which the ball is thrown (the position at which the ball flows out from the passage to the game area) can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, when a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the flow of the ball in the bent portion is likely to be delayed. Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass through the bent portion in a continuous state, the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, and the following ball presses the preceding ball against the side wall, so that both cannot roll. However, there is a problem that ball clogging may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the passage member has the opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, when a plurality of balls pass through the bent portion in a state where a plurality of balls are connected in series, the passage member is placed behind the preceding ball. Even if the running ball catches up, the preceding ball can be hardly pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion connected to the downstream side of the first portion and having the first portion and the sphere passing in different directions. Means the range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a passage extending linearly, a passage extending curvedly curved, or May be combined.

  In the gaming machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member includes a vertical passage extending in a substantially vertical direction, and an extension passage extending downward and inclined from the vertical passage, and the opening is formed in the vertical direction. A gaming machine B2 formed in a region where a passage and the extension passage intersect.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member has a vertical passage extending in a substantially vertical direction, and an extending passage extending downward and inclined from the vertical passage. The opening is formed in a region where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect, so that occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In other words, the area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is a position where the ball that has flowed down (falled) down the vertical passage changes direction and starts rolling in the extending direction of the extended passage, The ball following the ball is easy to catch up. Therefore, when the following ball presses the preceding ball against the side wall, the two cannot roll and the ball tends to be clogged. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, since the opening is formed in the area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball remains on the side wall. Pressing can be made difficult, and rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B2, the opening is an area where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, and are formed on left and right side walls when the ball rolls along the extension direction of the extension passage. A gaming machine B3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the opening is an area where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect, and when the ball rolls along the extending direction of the extending passage. Are formed on the left and right side walls, even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball can be hardly pressed against the left and right side walls, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B3, an area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, and a back side when a ball rolls along a bottom wall serving as a rolling surface and an extending direction of the extended passage. A gaming machine B4, characterized in that an inclined surface descending at an angle larger than the descending inclination of the extension passage is formed on a side wall of the gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect with each other, along the bottom wall serving as a rolling surface and the extending direction of the extended passage. When the ball rolls, a slope is formed on the rear side wall that is inclined downward at an angle greater than the downward inclination of the extension passage, so that the ball flowing down (falling) in the vertical passage changes direction. When the rolling is started in the extending direction of the extending passage, the ball can be quickly rolled by utilizing the downward inclination of the inclined surface. This makes it easy for the preceding ball to roll before the following ball catches up, and the preceding ball rolls behind the ball (the ball rolls along the extension direction of the extension passage). It can be suppressed from being pressed against the side wall on the rear side), so that the rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In addition, the inclination of the inclined surface may be any one of a linear inclination, a curved inclination, and a combination thereof. Also, the angle of the descending slope of the inclined surface does not need to be larger than the angle of the descending inclination of the extension passage over the entire area of the inclined surface, and the angle of the descending inclination of at least a part of the inclined surface is extended. It is sufficient if the angle is larger than the angle of the downward slope of the passage.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, a game board having a game area formed on a front side is provided, and at least a region of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage intersects with the extended passage is the game. A gaming machine B5 provided on the front side of the board.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, at least the region where the vertical passage and the extended passage of the bent portion of the passage member intersect (that is, the portion where the opening is formed). ) Is disposed on the front side of the game board, so that if the ball is clogged at the bent portion of the passage member, the glass plate is opened to open the ball on the front side of the game board. Can be accessed from the opening. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging.

  In any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in a region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect, and a height position corresponding to a radius of a sphere from a bottom wall serving as a rolling surface. A gaming machine B6 formed in a range including:

  According to the gaming machine B6, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in a region where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, and corresponds to a radius of a sphere from a bottom wall serving as a rolling surface. When the ball that flows down (falls) in the vertical passage reaches the bottom wall of the extension passage, the ball can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball can be hardly pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B6, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and at least an area of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is the game. A gaming machine B7 disposed on the front side of the board, wherein the opening is formed to have a size that allows a ball to pass through.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in any one of the gaming machines B2 to B6, at least a region of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage intersects with the extended passage (ie, a portion where an opening is formed) is a game. Since the opening is provided on the front side of the board and has a size that allows a ball to pass through, the occurrence of ball clogging can be easily suppressed.

  That is, when the size of the opening is such that the ball cannot pass, the opening can usually be used to make it difficult for the preceding ball to be pressed against the side wall. There is a case where a form in which the preceding ball is pressed against the center of the opening is formed, and the preceding ball is internally fitted (fitted) into the opening. In this case, the following rolling of the ball is hindered by the ball fitted into the opening, and ball clogging occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B7, even when a form in which the following ball presses the preceding ball toward the center of the opening is formed, the preceding ball is placed outside the passage member through the opening (on the front side of the game board). (The game area), and the preceding ball can be prevented from being fitted (fitted) into the opening. As a result, the rolling of the following ball can be continued, and the occurrence of clogging of the ball can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, the opening is formed in such a size that the ball can pass through, and the opening is disposed on the front side of the game board (that is, the game area), so that the ball flowing down the game area can be formed. The fluid can flow into the passage member from the opening. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, when a sensor that detects a winning ball is provided downstream of the bent portion, in addition to the ball that has flowed into the passage member from upstream of the bent portion, the ball that has flowed into the passage member from the opening also serves as a winning port. Can be detected. In particular, in this case, the opening (the area where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect) is disposed on the front side of the game board, so that the player can visually recognize the ball flowing into the passage member from the opening. be able to.

  The gaming machine B8, wherein in the gaming machine 7, the lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated from the bottom wall of the extension passage by a predetermined distance.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7, the lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated by a predetermined distance from the bottom wall of the extension passage, so that the lower end of the inner edge of the opening and the extension passage Side wall can be left (formed) with the bottom wall. Therefore, even when the opening is formed in a size that allows the ball to pass through, it is possible to suppress the ball from unnecessarily flowing out of the passage member to the outside (game area) through the opening.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B8, the passage member is formed to be inclined downward toward the bent portion, is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion, and extends substantially linearly along the width direction of the game area. A pair of the passage members are arranged in such a position that the upstream side of the inclined passage is located at the center in the width direction of the game area and the bent portion is located outside the width direction of the game area. A gaming machine B9, wherein a winning device is located between the bent portions of the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, the passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the bent portion, is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion, and extends substantially linearly along the width direction of the game area. A pair of passage members are arranged in such a manner that the upstream side of the inclined passage is located at the center in the width direction of the game area and the bent part is located outside the width direction of the game area, and the bent parts of the pair of passage members are provided. The winning device is located during the period.

  In this case, if the angle of the descending inclination of the inclined passage is made small (the descending inclination is gradual), the falling velocity of the ball becomes low, and the ball is easily clogged at the bent portion. On the other hand, when the angle of the descending inclination of the inclined passage is increased (the descending inclination is steep), the falling velocity of the ball can be increased to prevent the ball from being clogged at the bent portion. The required space in the height direction is increased, and it is difficult to arrange the winning device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B9, since an opening is formed in the side wall of the bent portion, it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged at the bent portion, and accordingly, the angle of the descending inclination of the inclined passage is reduced accordingly ( The descending slope can be made gentler). As a result, the space in the height direction necessary for disposing the inclined passage can be suppressed, and the arrangement of the winning device can be made possible. That is, the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine B9 is an arrangement that is impossible with a conventional product, and is only possible by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion as described above. .

  In the gaming machine B9, a game board in which a game area is formed on the front side is provided, and at least a region of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect is provided on the front side of the game board. A gap through which at least a ball can pass is formed between a portion of the bent portion of the passage member disposed on the front side of the game board and a lower edge portion of the game area. A gaming machine B10 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  Here, an opening is formed in the center of the game board, and the player can visually recognize the liquid crystal display device through the opening. In recent years, with an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device, the opening at the center of the game board is also enlarged, so that the space between the lower edge of the opening at the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area is reduced. Therefore, in the conventional product, it is difficult to arrange a member corresponding to the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine 9 in a space between the lower edge of the opening at the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area. there were. That is, as described above, when the angle of the descending inclination of the inclined passage is small (the descending inclination is gentle), the falling velocity of the ball becomes low, and the ball is easily clogged at the bent portion. On the other hand, when the angle of the descending inclination of the inclined passage is increased (the descending inclination is steep), the falling velocity of the ball can be increased to prevent the ball from being clogged at the bent portion. The required space in the height direction is increased, and it is difficult to arrange the winning device. Further, since the arrangement position of the bent portion in the vertical direction is lowered (lowered), it is difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area, and It is necessary to provide out ports on both sides.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B9, since the opening is formed in the side wall of the bent portion, it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged at the bent portion, and accordingly, the inclination is increased. The angle of the descending inclination of the passage can be reduced (the descending inclination is made gentler). As a result, the position of the bent portion in the vertical direction can be raised (increased), so that a gap through which the ball can pass can be secured between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the out ports on both sides of the bent portion. That is, in the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine B9, the arrangement described in the gaming machine B10 is further provided (an arrangement in which a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area). Is an arrangement that is impossible with conventional products, and has only become possible by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion as described above.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the rotating unit 500 as an example>
In a gaming machine having a plurality of light emitting means, and a rotating display device for performing afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position, the rotating display device includes the plurality of light emitting units. A substrate, a main body member accommodating the substrate, and a base member rotatably supporting the main body member, wherein the main body member transmits light of the light emitting means, A gaming machine C1 comprising a plurality of through holes formed through a side wall facing in the rotation direction.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine having a plurality of light-emitting units (LEDs) and a rotary display device that performs after-image display by an after-image effect by blinking the light-emitting units according to the rotational position (for example, JP-A-2015-100385, JP-A-2005-053968, etc.).

  In this case, in the technique disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385, the light-emitting means is exposed, so that the appearance is impaired. On the other hand, in the technique of JP-A-2005-053968, the light of the light-emitting means is visually recognized through a light-transmitting member (push button). Therefore, the light emitting means is not exposed. However, in this case, even if the member (reel) on which the light emitting means is disposed is rotated, the rotation is not visually recognized, and there is no point in displaying the afterimage by the afterimage effect. That is, the same display can be performed by arranging a plurality of light emitting units vertically and horizontally in a matrix and controlling blinking of each of the light emitting units.

  Therefore, the applicant of the present application has devised a rotary display device in which a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged is accommodated in a main body member, and the main body member is rotatably supported by a base member. Publicly known). According to this, since the light emitting means is housed in the main body member, the light emitting means is hardly visually recognized, and the appearance is not impaired. Further, since the afterimage display caused by the blinking of the light emitting means is visually recognized in a state where the rotation of the main body member can be visually recognized, the interest can be enhanced. However, in this case, since the light emitting means is housed in the main body member, it has been newly found that the cooling of the light emitting means is difficult. The light emitting means (LED) and the ICs / capacitors that control the light emitting means are soldered to the board. If the heat generated when these light emitting means or the IC / capacitors cannot be sufficiently cooled, the solder melts. May cause poor contact.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the main body member is provided with the plurality of through holes formed through the side wall facing in the rotation direction. Outside air can be taken into the interior of the vehicle. Therefore, heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled.

  In the gaming machine C1, the main body member is formed in a container-like shape with an open back side.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the main body member is formed in a container shape with the back side opened, so that the outside air taken in from the through hole in the side wall can be efficiently used from the back side. Can be exhausted. Therefore, heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In addition, by exhausting air from the back side of the main body member in this way, it is possible to suppress the exhaust from affecting the sphere flowing down (or rolling the stage) in the game area.

  In the gaming machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, which has a long shape along a diametrical direction in a rotation plane of the main body member, and a front wall forming a front side is closer to an end in a longitudinal direction. A gaming machine C3 formed in a curved shape receding to the side.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view (that is, in the rotation axis direction), which has a long shape along the diametric direction on the rotation plane of the main body member. Therefore, using the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation of the main body member, the air inside the main body member can be caused to flow to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) and exhausted from the back side. Therefore, with the flow of the air, the outside air can be taken into the main body member from the rear side at and near the rotation shaft. That is, since the rotation speed is low in the rotation axis and its vicinity, the efficiency of taking in the outside air from the through hole in the side wall is low (or cannot be taken in), and the air circulation using the centrifugal force (the back surface in the rotation axis and its vicinity) The outside air is taken in from the side, and the taken-in outside air flows to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by centrifugal force to form a flow of air exhausted from the rear side in the radially outward side. be able to. As a result, heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In particular, it is possible to achieve the cooling of the light emitting means disposed on the rotating shaft and its vicinity.

  In this case, if the front wall forming the front side of the main body member has a shape parallel to the rotation plane of the main body member (that is, if the main body member has a rectangular parallelepiped shape), the longitudinal end portion (during rotation) (In the radial direction outward), the angle of the portion where the air changes direction toward the rear side is substantially a right angle, and thus a vortex is easily formed in such a portion. Therefore, the flow of air is hindered, and it becomes difficult to smoothly exhaust air from the rear side.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, since the front wall forming the front side is formed in a curved shape that recedes toward the rear side toward the longitudinal end side, the longitudinal end side (during rotation) due to centrifugal force. The air flowing to the outside (radially outward) can gradually flow to the back side, and the angle of the portion where the air flowing to the longitudinal end (radial outside) changes direction toward the back side Can be made larger than a substantially right angle, so that the formation of a vortex in such a portion can be suppressed and the flow of air can be made smooth. Therefore, the exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, it is possible to more reliably achieve cooling of the light emitting means disposed on the rotating shaft and the vicinity thereof.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open area on the back side near the rotating shaft is larger than an open area on the back side at the longitudinal end side. Machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2 or C3, the main body member has a rotation axis and an open area on the back side near the rotation axis is larger than an open area on the back side at the longitudinal end. The air inside the main body member is caused to flow toward the longitudinal end (outward in the radial direction during rotation) by using the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation, and from the rear side in the radially outward direction. By exhausting, when taking in outside air from the rotating shaft and the back side in the vicinity thereof, the taking in can be performed efficiently.

  In the gaming machine C4, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open portion on the back side near the rotating shaft formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotating shaft.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C4, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open portion on the back side near the rotating shaft formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotating shaft. With the rotation of, the external air on the rotating shaft and the rear side near the rotating shaft can be suppressed from being disturbed (flow in the rotating direction is formed). As a result, outside air can be efficiently taken in from the rotating shaft and the rear side in the vicinity thereof.

  In any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the base member may include a shaft member rotatably supporting the main body member, and the shaft member may be reduced in diameter from a back side to a back side of the main body member. A gaming machine C6.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the shaft member rotatably supporting the main body member on the base member is reduced in diameter from the back side to the back side of the main body member. Therefore, when the outside air is taken in from the rear side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft with the rotation of the main body member, the flow of the outside air along the outer peripheral surface of the shaft member can be made smooth, and the flow resistance can be reduced. As a result, the outside air can be efficiently taken in from the rear side in the vicinity of the rotation shaft and the vicinity thereof, so that the cooling of the light emitting means disposed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft and the vicinity can be more reliably achieved.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the substrate may be housed in the main body member in a posture in which a surface on which the light emitting unit is mounted or a surface on the opposite side faces a side wall of the main body member. Gaming machine C7 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the substrate is mounted on the main body in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted or the surface on the opposite side faces the side wall of the main body member. Since it is housed in the member, the outside air introduced from the through-hole formed through the side wall can be efficiently blown to the light emitting means or the IC / capacitor to enhance the heat radiation effect. As a result, heat generated when the light emitting means or the IC / capacitor operates can be effectively cooled. Further, the posture in which the substrate is accommodated in the main body member is such that the front surface or the back surface of the substrate faces the side wall of the main body member, so that the width dimension of the main body member in a front view (the dimension in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction) ) Can be reduced. As a result, in a state where the main body member (rotary display device) is stopped, visibility of the members and devices disposed on the back side thereof can be secured.

  A gaming machine C8 comprising any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, further comprising smoke generating means for generating smoke in a displacement area of the main body member of the rotary display device.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, since the smoke generating means for generating smoke is provided in the displacement area of the main body member of the rotary display device, the flashing of the light emitting means is emphasized. Can be. Also, while the rotary display device is hidden by smoke, only the blinking of the light emitting means can be visually recognized, and the effect by the light can be enhanced.

  In the conventional rotary display device, it was difficult to obtain the effect of smoke because the smoke was pushed out to the outer peripheral side with the rotation of the main body member. However, according to the present invention, the through hole was formed in the main body member. Is formed and the outside air can be circulated, so that the smoke can stay around the main body member. As a result, the light emitting means can be flickered in an atmosphere filled with smoke, and the above-described effects can be obtained.

  As a smoke generating device, for example, a type in which an aqueous or oily oil (liquid) is heated and vaporized to generate smoke (smoke), a liquid (aqueous or oily) is pressurized and diffused by a compressor, and is diffused into the air. Examples include a type in which fine particles are retained, a type in which carbon dioxide gas is ejected, and the like.

  In the gaming machine C8, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and a display panel disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and protruding forward. And a front member formed of a light transmissive material, wherein at least a main body member of the rotary display member is located between the liquid crystal display device and the front member. Machine C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C8, a gaming board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the gaming board, and a front face of the liquid crystal display device And a front member formed of a light-transmissive material and formed to be convexly curved to the front side, and at least a main body member of the rotary display member is located between the liquid crystal display device and the front member. Therefore, smoke generated from the smoke generator can be easily retained (contained) in the displacement region of the main body member. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the light-emitting means blink in an atmosphere filled with smoke to make the blinking stand out, or to make only the blinking of the light-emitting means visible while hiding the rotary display device with smoke. As a result, the effect produced by light can be enhanced. In particular, since the front member is convexly curved toward the front, smoke can be easily retained in the space on the rear side of the front member. As a result, it is possible to easily enhance the light effect using the smoke described above.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the rotating unit 500 as an example>
A base member, a main body member displaced between a first position and a second position with respect to the base member, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the main body member, wherein the main body member has at least the In a gaming machine in which the displacement member is displaced in a state where the displacement member is disposed at a first position, a rotation member rotatably supported by one of the base member or the main body member, and the main body member is disposed at the first position. And a contact member disposed on the other of the base member and the main body member so as to be able to come into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member in a state in which the main body member is disposed at the first position. The gaming machine D1 wherein the direction of displacement at the time and the direction of rotation of the rotating member are set substantially parallel.

  Here, a base member, a main body member displaced between a first position and a second position with respect to the base member, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the main body member, wherein the main body member is 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine in which a displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable in a state where it is arranged at a first position is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-162990).

  In this case, when the main body member is disposed at the first position and the displacement member is displaced, the main body member may rattle with respect to the base member with the displacement of the displacement member. In view of this, there is an apparatus in which engagement means for engaging the main body member and the base member is provided to suppress rattling. The engaging means is provided on one of the main body member or the base member and urged by the urging means, and is formed so as to be engageable with the engaging member, and is provided on the other of the main body member and the base member. An engaging member disposed, and using the displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member (displacement toward the first position), the engaging member is retracted while resisting the urging force of the urging means; When the member is located at the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the urging force of the urging means to engage the engaged member. Accordingly, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is regulated by the engagement of the engagement means, and the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

  However, in such a conventional engaging means, in order to bring the engaging means into the engaged state (position the main body member at the first position), the engaging member is pressed against the urging force of the urging means. Not only does it need to be retracted, but also when releasing the engagement state of the engagement means (displacing the main body member from the first position to the second position) against the urging force of the urging means. It is necessary to retreat the engaging member, and there is a problem that a driving force required for displacing the main body member with respect to the base member increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the rotating member rotatably supported by one of the base member and the main body member and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member in a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position. And a contact member disposed on the other of the base member and the main body member, so that the contact member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, so that the relative position of the main body member with respect to the base member is increased. The displacement of the main body member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed by restricting the mechanical displacement. In this case, the displacement direction when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the rotation direction of the rotating member are set to be substantially parallel, so that when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the second direction from the first position. When displacing to the position, the rotating member can be rotated in accordance with the displacement, so that the driving force required for displacing the main body member with respect to the base member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D1, the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that is elastically deformable at least on an outer peripheral surface side.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that is elastically deformable at least on the outer peripheral surface side, so that the contact member abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. In this case, the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member is elastically deformed, so that the rotating member can be easily held by the contact member. This makes it difficult for the rotating member to rotate, thereby restricting the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member, thereby suppressing the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member.

  The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body exemplified by rubber, urethane, and the like. In this case, the vibration damping effect can perform a vibration damping function or a vibration insulating function of attenuating and insulating the vibration input from the main body member to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member. This is because it is possible to suppress wear and failure of various devices to be installed, loosening of a fastening portion, and the like. In particular, when the displacement member is periodically displaced (for example, when it is rotated at a relatively high speed in order to function as a versa lighter), relatively small amplitude and high frequency vibrations are generated from the main body member to the base member. Therefore, it is particularly effective to employ a viscoelastic body.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed so as to be displaceable in a radial direction, and one of the base member or the main body member is configured to move the rotating member in a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position. A gaming machine D3 comprising: an opposing member disposed so as to oppose the abutting member so as to be in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed so as to be displaceable in the radial direction, and one of the base member or the main body member has the main body member disposed at the first position. In this state, the rotating member is disposed so as to face the contact member, and the facing member is provided so as to be able to contact the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. When the contact member comes into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the outer peripheral surface on the opposite side of the rotating member can be brought into contact with the opposing member. That is, the rotating member can be sandwiched between the contact member and the facing member. This makes it difficult for the rotating member to rotate, thereby restricting the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member, thereby suppressing the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member.

  Examples of the form in which the rotating member can be displaced in the radial direction include, for example, a form in which a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member is formed so as to be displaceable in the radial direction, and a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member. The outer diameter of the shaft is smaller than the inner diameter of the insertion hole of the rotating member that receives the shaft, the outer diameter of the shaft fixed to the rotating member is smaller than the insertion hole of one of the main body member or the base member that receives the shaft. And the like.

  In the gaming machine D3, a shaft fixed to one of the base member or the main body member is provided, and the rotating member is formed of an elastic body in a ring-shaped cross section including a shaft support hole on an inner peripheral side through which the shaft is inserted. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the radial displacement of the rotating member is formed by elastically deforming the elastic body.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D3, the radial displacement of the rotating member is formed by elastically deforming the elastic body, so that the base of the main body member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is formed. When the rotating member is sandwiched between the contact member and the opposing member due to the play of the member, the contact member and the opposing member are rotated by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the rotating member (elastic body). The member can be more firmly held. This makes it difficult for the rotating member to rotate, thereby restricting the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member, thereby suppressing the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member.

  In addition, by adopting a configuration in which the radial displacement of the rotating member is performed by utilizing the elastic deformation of the elastic body, the shaft inserted through the shaft support hole of the rotating member can be moved in the radial direction. It does not need to be formed as a shaft, and can be formed as a shaft fixed to one of the base member and the main body member. Thereby, the structure can be simplified, and the durability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, one of the base member or the main body member is provided with a pair of the rotation members, and the pair of rotation members is used when the main body member is disposed at the first position. A gaming machine D5 which is arranged side by side at a predetermined interval in a displacement direction.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, one of the base member and the main body member is provided with a pair of rotating members, and the pair of rotating members is the main body member. Since it is arranged side by side at a predetermined interval in the displacement direction when it is arranged at one position, it is possible to suppress the driving force required when displacing the main body member with respect to the base member, and to reduce the driving force required by the displacement of the displacement member. The rattling of the member with respect to the base member can be effectively suppressed.

  That is, when the contact member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is regulated. However, only one rotating member is brought into contact with the contact member. In this case, there is a possibility that the rotating member is rotated and the contact member is tilted, and the tilting of the contact member due to the rotation of the rotating member is a cause of the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member. Become.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, since the pair of rotating members are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval, the abutting members contact the pair of rotating members at two locations at a predetermined interval. Therefore, it is possible to make contact without rotating the rotating member, and it is possible to suppress the contact member from tilting. As a result, rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the contact member may be a contact surface on a side that receives the rotating member when the main body member of the contact surface with which the rotating member is contacted is disposed at the first position. A gaming machine D6, wherein an inclined surface is formed at an end portion so as to be inclined downward as the distance from the contact surface increases.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the contact member is used when the main body member of the contact surface with which the rotating member is contacted is disposed at the first position. Since the inclined surface is formed to be inclined downward as the distance from the contact surface is increased at the end on the side that receives the rotating member, when the main body member is disposed at the first position, the inclined surface is utilized. The rotating member can be guided to the contact surface of the contact member. Thereby, the driving force required when disposing the main body member at the first position can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the rotating member is provided on the base member, and the contact member is provided on the main body member.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, since the rotating member is provided on the base member and the contact member is provided on the main body member, the weight is relatively large. Since there is no need to provide a bulky rotating member, the weight of the main body member can be reduced, and the driving force required for displacement of the main body member can be suppressed. Further, when the rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed, the main body member on the vibration source side can be reduced in weight, so that the rattling can be easily suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the main body member, and a rotation plane of the displacement member has a contact surface that is in contact with the rotation member of the contact member. A gaming machine D8 substantially parallel to the rotating shaft of the rotating member.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the main body member, and the rotation plane of the displacement member corresponds to the rotation member of the contact member. The driving force required for disposing the main body member at the first position and displacing the main body member from the first position to the second position is substantially parallel to the contact surface to be contacted and the rotation axis of the rotating member. , And wobble of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

  That is, since the displacement form of the displacement member is rotation, the main body member tilts the rotation plane of the displacement member due to the precession movement of the displacement member (movement in which the rotation axis of the displacement member swings like a circle). Vibration is performed in a mode (mode) for causing the vibration. Therefore, since the rotation plane of the displacement member is substantially parallel to the contact surface of the contact member and the rotation axis of the rotation member, the contact surface of the contact member is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation member. It can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member from the direction. As a result, when the main body member is arranged at the first position and when the main body member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the rotating member is rotated, thereby suppressing the driving force required for the displacement of the main body member. By the contact of the contact member with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the game machine includes: a driving unit that generates a driving force; and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force to the main body member and displaces the driving force between the first position and the second position. A transmission member, a crank member having a rotating body that is rotated about a first axis by a driving force of the driving means, and a pin portion that is eccentric from the first axis of the rotating body and protrudes from the rotating body; The crank member has a guide groove in which a pin portion slides, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove to rotate about the second axis as a rotation center and to rotate the main body member with the rotation. An arm member to be displaced, and in a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position, a straight line connecting a first axis of the crank member and an axis of a pin portion is aligned with a second axis of the arm member. Pin of the crank member Gaming machine D9, characterized in that it is substantially orthogonal to the straight line connecting the axis of.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the play of the main body member can be effectively suppressed.

  Here, in the present invention, the direction of displacement when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the direction of rotation of the rotating member are set substantially parallel. Therefore, if the rattling direction of the main body member at the first position is a direction from the first position to the second position or the opposite direction, the rotating member easily rotates in such a direction. It is difficult for the rotating member to exert the effect of suppressing rattling.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D9, when the main body member is located at the first position, the straight line connecting the first shaft of the crank member and the axis of the pin portion is formed by the second shaft of the arm member and the crank shaft. Since it is substantially perpendicular to the straight line connecting the axis of the pin portion of the member, even if the main body member attempts to rotate the arm member by its displacement, no force component in the direction of rotating the crank member is formed ( That is, a dead point can be formed. That is, it is possible to suppress rattling of the main body member in the direction from the first position to the second position or in the opposite direction. Thereby, even if the direction of the backlash of the main body member is from the first position to the second position or the opposite direction (that is, the direction in which the rotating member is easy to rotate), the crank member and the arm member are at the dead center. Is formed, the backlash of the main body member can be effectively suppressed.

<Regarding the concept of the invention, taking the regulation unit 490 as an example>
In a gaming machine having a plurality of light emitting means, and a rotating display device for performing afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position, the rotating display device includes the plurality of light emitting units. A substrate, a main body member accommodating the substrate, and a base member rotatably supporting the main body member, wherein the substrate has a surface on which the light emitting means is mounted, of the main body member. A gaming machine E1 wherein the gaming machine E1 is accommodated in the main body member in a posture substantially parallel to a rotation axis.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine having a plurality of light-emitting units (LEDs) and a rotary display device that performs after-image display by an after-image effect by blinking the light-emitting units according to the rotational position (for example, JP-A-2015-100385, JP-A-2005-053968, etc.). However, in the above-described conventional technology, the posture of the substrate is such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, the rotation plane in which the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is directed toward the front side (player side)). (Parallel posture), the outer shape in a front view (viewed in the rotation axis direction) becomes large. Therefore, when the rotation of the rotary display device is stopped, there is a problem that the visibility on the back side of the rotary display device is hindered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the rotary display device includes a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting units are arranged, a main body member for accommodating the substrate, and a base member for rotatably supporting the main body member. The substrate is accommodated in the main body member in such a manner that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member, so that the outer shape of the main body member in front view (in the rotation axis direction) is suppressed. be able to. As a result, in the state where the rotation of the rotary display device (main body member) is stopped, the visibility of the back side of the main body member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1, the rotating display device includes an opposing member disposed to oppose a surface of the substrate on which the light emitting unit is mounted.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the rotary display device includes the opposing member disposed on the surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is opposed to the rotating member. The light can be reflected by the member and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. Therefore, even when the posture of the substrate is such that the surface on which the light-emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis, the light (flashing) of the light-emitting means can be visually recognized by the player, and the afterimage is displayed by the afterimage effect. Can be.

  In the gaming machine E2, the facing member includes a plurality of recesses that are recessed in a surface facing the substrate and extend in a groove shape substantially parallel to a rotation axis of the main body member. A gaming machine E3, wherein the plurality of light emitting means are respectively faced.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine E2, the opposing member has a plurality of recesses which are recessed on the surface facing the substrate and extend in a groove shape substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member. Since the plurality of light emitting means face each other in the plurality of recesses, the light emitted from each of the plurality of light emitting means passes through the plurality of recesses of the opposing member, respectively, and the front side of the rotary display device (game To the user). That is, since the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted in a state partitioned by each concave portion, the division of the light of each light emitting means can be made clear. As a result, the outer shape of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  The gaming machine E3, wherein the concave portion of the facing member includes an end partition wall for partitioning an end of the rotating display device opposite to the front side.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E3, the concave portion of the facing member has an end partition wall for partitioning the end on the opposite side to the front side of the rotary display device. The light applied to the concave portion of the opposing member can be reflected by the end partition wall and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect.

  In the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting unit toward the front side of the rotary display device, and the light emitting unit is located at a position facing the end partition wall of the recess. A gaming machine E5, which is provided.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting means toward the front side of the rotary display device, and the light emitting means is provided with the end partition of the recess. Since it is arranged at the position facing the wall, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be applied to the end partition wall, so that stronger light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotating display device. it can. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect.

  The gaming machine E6 according to any one of the gaming machines E3 to E5, wherein a part of the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member is formed as an uneven surface.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E3 to E5, the concave portion of the facing member has a part of the inner surface formed as an uneven surface. The light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device in a state of being irregularly reflected by the uneven surface and uniformly dispersed. That is, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the opening of the concave portion from being visually recognized in a state where the light is biased to a part of the opening.

  In addition, the unevenness of the uneven surface may be a surface consisting only of protrusions (projections) or a surface consisting only of recesses (dents). The projections or depressions may extend as stripes or grooves. Further, the cross-sectional shapes of the convex and concave portions may be any of a circle, an ellipse, a polygon, and a combination thereof. That is, as long as a portion higher and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (surfaces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and irregular reflection is possible, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary.

  In the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the front end of the rotary display device on the inner surface of the concave portion of the opposing member, and the inner surface of the predetermined range is A gaming machine E7 formed as a surface that is smoother than the uneven surface.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the front end of the rotary display device on the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member, Since the inner surface in the predetermined range is formed as a surface that is smoother than the uneven surface, light can be easily emitted toward the front side (the player side) of the rotary display device, and the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be achieved. The light intensity can be increased. That is, when an uneven surface is formed within a predetermined range from the front end of the rotary display device on the inner surface of the concave portion of the opposing member, light is irregularly reflected on the uneven surface, and the front surface of the rotary display device ( Where the light emitted toward the player side is reduced, the inner surface in such a predetermined range is made smoother than the uneven surface, so that irregular reflection is suppressed and the front side of the rotary display device is reduced. The light traveling toward the (player side) can be increased.

  In the gaming machine E7, the predetermined area in which the uneven surface is not formed is such that the cross-sectional area of the inner surface increases toward the front end of the rotary display device. E8.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E7, in a predetermined range where the uneven surface is not formed, the cross-sectional area of the inner surface is increased toward the front end of the rotary display device. (Ie, the diameter is increased), the light emitted toward the front side (the player side) of the rotary display device can have a wider range. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be larger than the area of the light emitting surface (irradiation surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the light emitting means can be downsized.

  In any of the gaming machines E6 to E8, the concave portions of the opposing member are arranged in a row, and the concave and convex surface arranged radially outward from the rotation axis of the main body member, The gaming machine E9, wherein a length dimension of the main body member in a direction along a rotation axis is increased.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E6 to E8, the concave portion of the opposing member is formed such that the concave and convex surfaces arranged radially outwardly from the rotation axis of the main body member increase the degree of the main body. Since the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the member is increased, the brightness (brightness of light) of each of the plurality of recesses can be made uniform.

  That is, in the rotary display device, the displacement speed (peripheral speed) becomes higher outward in the radial direction from the rotation axis (rotation center). The light of the light emitting means closer to the axis looks higher (brighter) than the light of the light emitting means farther (radially outward) from the rotation axis.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E9, the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the main body member becomes larger as the uneven surface is arranged radially outwardly from the rotation axis of the main body member. The more the concave portion (light emitting means) is separated radially outward from the rotation axis of the main body member, the more the irregular reflection by the uneven surface becomes stronger (that is, the smaller the ratio of the light which can be visually recognized by the player directly from the light emitting means). , Can be visually recognized as light of high brightness. As a result, it is possible to suppress a difference in brightness as viewed at the radially arranged position and to make the brightness (brightness of light) uniform.

  In any one of the gaming machines E3 to E9, a cover member is provided, which is covered with a front end of the rotary display device in a concave portion of the facing member and is formed of a light-transmitting material. A gaming machine E10, wherein an uneven surface is formed at least in a region facing an end of the concave portion.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E3 to E9, a cover formed of a light-transmitting material and covered by the front end of the rotary display device in the recess of the facing member. The cover member has an uneven surface at least in a region facing the end of the concave portion. Therefore, after irregularly reflecting light by the uneven surface, the front side (the player side) of the rotary display device is provided. ). That is, since the emitted light can be made wider, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be larger than the area of the light emitting surface (irradiation surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the light emitting means can be downsized.

  In any of the gaming machines E3 to E10, a plate-shaped interposed member interposed between the substrate and the opposing member is provided, and the interposed member includes the plurality of light emitting units, the plurality of recesses, A gaming machine E11 comprising a through hole formed at a position through which the game machine passes.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E3 to E10, the gaming machine E11 includes a plate-shaped interposed member interposed between the substrate and the facing member, and the interposed member includes a plurality of interposed members. Since a through-hole is formed at a position where the light-emitting means and the plurality of recesses are made to pass through, the light of each light-emitting means is surely made incident on the corresponding recess, and is prevented from being incident (leaked) on the adjacent recess. it can. As a result, the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted only from the corresponding concave portion, and the outline of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  Further, according to the gaming machine E11, since the structure for allowing the light of the light emitting means to enter the corresponding concave portion through the through hole is formed from the two members, the facing member and the interposed member, the structure is one. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where it is constituted by members. Therefore, it is possible to reduce product cost.

  In the gaming machine E11, the interposing member includes a seat portion that comes into contact with the light emitting unit, and the through hole is formed in the seat portion.

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E11, the interposed member includes a seat portion that comes into contact with the light emitting unit, and the through hole is formed in the seat portion. Can easily be made to enter the through hole, and leakage to the outside of the through hole can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect. Further, since the light of the adjacent light emitting means can be prevented from being incident on the through hole by contacting the seat with the light emitting means, the outer shape of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  In the gaming machine E12, the illuminated surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape in a front view, and the through-hole is formed in a circular cross section having an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the illuminated surface. Are arranged concentrically. A gaming machine E13.

  According to the gaming machine E13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E12, the illumination surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape in a front view, and the through-hole has a circular cross section having an inner diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the illuminating surface. Since the irradiation surface and the through hole are formed concentrically, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be efficiently made incident on the concave portion through the through hole.

  In the gaming machine E13, the inner diameter of the through hole is increased from the substrate side to the facing member.

  According to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E13, the through hole has an inner diameter that is increased from the substrate side to the facing member, so that light emitted from the light emitting means is transmitted through the through hole. The light can be efficiently made incident on the concave portion through the through hole. In addition, since the area in contact with the light emitting means can be secured, it is possible to suppress the light of each light emitting means from leaking out of the through hole. As a result, it is possible to increase the light intensity of the afterimage display due to the afterimage effect.

  The gaming machine E15, wherein in any of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the seat is formed to protrude from a surface of the interposition member facing the substrate.

  According to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the seat is formed so as to protrude from the surface of the interposed member facing the substrate. A space can be formed between the member and the member, and heat generated by the operation of the light emitting means can be radiated.

  The gaming machine E16, wherein the interposed member is provided with a groove-shaped groove that is recessed in a surface facing the substrate and extends along a base of the seat.

  According to the gaming machine E16, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E15, the facing member is provided with a groove-shaped groove that is recessed in the surface facing the substrate and extends along the base of the seat. The heat radiation effect can be enhanced while securing the rigidity of the interposed member. That is, by forming a groove-like groove extending along the base of the seat, the area recessed in the interposed member is minimized, and the rigidity of the interposed member is ensured while the light emitting means A space can be enlarged for a portion where heat generated by the operation is particularly concentrated, and a heat radiation effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine E17, wherein in the gaming machine E15 or E16, the seat is connected to an adjacent seat and an outer peripheral surface of each other.

  According to the gaming machine E17, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E15 or E16, the seats are connected to the adjacent seats and the outer peripheral surfaces of each other, so that the rigidity of the interposed member can be increased.

  In this case, the outer peripheral surface of the seat portion may be formed in a circular shape so that the adjacent outer peripheral surfaces of the seat portions are connected to each other. As a result, the group in which the plurality of seats are connected to each other is formed with an irregular shape, so that the rigidity of the interposed member is improved by using the irregularities of the shape while securing a space and improving the heat radiation effect. Can grow.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the sorting device 4700 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising: a passage member forming a passage through which a ball can pass; and a first privilege granting unit disposed downstream of the passage member and granting a predetermined privilege as the ball passes. An opening formed on the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting unit so as to allow a ball to pass therethrough, and a ball flowing out of the opening to the game area is formed so as to pass therethrough; A second privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege with the passing of the game machine F1.

  Here, a game machine provided with a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-97764). A sensor device for detecting passage of a ball by the passage member is provided downstream of such a passage member, and when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor device, a predetermined privilege is given. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the passage member only has a function of guiding the ball toward the downstream side (sensor device), and the space required for disposition is increased, while adding interest to the game. There was a problem that it was difficult to do.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, when the ball guided to the passage member passes through the first privilege providing means, a predetermined privilege is provided by the first privilege providing means. In this case, an opening is formed on the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege providing means so as to allow the ball to pass therethrough, and the ball flowing out of the opening to the game area is formed so as to pass therethrough. Since there is provided the second privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege along with the passage of the ball, it is possible to form a form in which the ball flows out of the opening into the game area while being guided through the passage member, and the outflowing ball can be formed. When has passed through the second privilege providing means, the predetermined privilege can be provided by the second privilege providing means. Thereby, not only the form in which the ball guided to the passage member passes through the first privilege providing means, but also the form in which the ball flows out of the opening to the game area, and further, the released ball passes through the second privilege providing means. A form can be formed, and an interest can be given to the game.

  The second privilege granting means may be arranged at a position capable of receiving all of the balls flowing out of the opening into the game area, or may be arranged in accordance with the state of the ball flowing out of the opening into the game area. Some of the balls may be arranged so as to receive some of the balls and not to receive some of them.

  The privilege given by the first privilege granting unit and the privilege given by the second privilege granting unit may be the same privilege or different benefits.

  In the gaming machine F1, the passage member includes a bent portion formed in a part of the passage member, and the opening is formed in a side wall of the bent portion.

  Here, by forming a bent portion in a part of the passage member, the direction in which the ball is thrown can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, when a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the flow of the sphere in the bent portion is likely to be stagnant. Therefore, when a plurality of balls pass through the bent portion in a continuous state, the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, and the following ball presses the preceding ball against the side wall, so that both cannot roll. However, there is a problem that ball clogging occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F2, since the passage member has the opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, when a plurality of balls pass through the bent portion in a continuous state, the passage member has Even if the running ball catches up, the preceding ball can be hardly pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion connected to the downstream side of the first portion and having the first portion and the sphere passing in different directions. Means the range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a passage extending linearly, a passage extending curvedly curved, or May be combined.

  In the gaming machine F2, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member where the opening is formed is disposed on the front side of the game board. A gaming machine F3 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member where the opening is formed is disposed on the front side of the game board. When the ball is clogged, the ball can be accessed from the opening on the front side of the game board by opening the glass plate. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging. Further, when the game ball flows out of the opening of the passage member into the game area, the outflow mode can be visually recognized by the player, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine F4 is characterized in that at least the entrance of the second privilege granting means is disposed on the front side of the gaming board.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F3, since at least the entrance of the second privilege means is disposed on the front side of the gaming board, the gaming ball flows out of the opening of the passage member to the gaming area. In doing so, the mode in which the outflowed ball enters the entrance of the second privilege granting means can be visually recognized by the player, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the second privilege providing means is connected to the passage member, and a connection path for guiding a ball passing through the second privilege providing means to the passage member is provided. A gaming machine F5 connected to the passage member upstream of the first privilege providing means.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines F1 to F4, a connection passage is provided for connecting the second privilege granting means to the passage member and guiding the ball passing through the second privilege granting means to the passage member. Since the connection passage is connected to the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting means, the ball flows out of the opening into the game area while being guided by the passage member, and the ball that flows out is the first ball. When the ball has passed through the two privilege granting means, the ball can be guided to the passage member through the connection passage so as to pass through the first privilege granting means. Therefore, in addition to the grant of the privilege by the second privilege granting means, the privilege can be granted by the first privilege granting means, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, a distributing means for alternately distributing the entered ball to one and the other is provided, and the pair of passage members are provided in a pair, and one of the pair of passage members is provided with the vibration member. A gaming machine F6 connected to one of the distributing means and the other connected to the other of the distributing means.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the game machine F6 further includes a distributing means for alternately distributing the entered ball to one and the other, and a pair of passage members are provided. Since one of the passage members is connected to one of the distribution means and the other is connected to the other of the distribution means, the balls can enter the passage member one by one. That is, it is possible to suppress a plurality of balls from continuously entering the passage member, so that clogging of the balls in the passage member can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine K1 wherein any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17 and F1 to F6 is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17, and F1 to F6, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17 and F1 to F6, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Gaming machine K3 characterized by the following. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a base member, a main body member that is displaced between a first position and a second position with respect to the base member, and a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member. There has been known a gaming machine provided with a displacement member that is displaceable in a state where a main body member is disposed at a first position (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-162990).
However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that a driving force required for displacing the main body member with respect to the base member increases.
SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a driving force required when displacing a main body member with respect to a base member. And
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in the technical concept 1 includes a base member, a main body member displaced between the first position and the second position with respect to the base member, and a displaceable main body member. And the displacement member is displaced in a state where the main body member is disposed at least in the first position, and is rotatably mounted on one of the base member or the main body member. A rotating member that is supported, and a rotating member that is disposed on the other of the base member and the main body member while facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member in a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position. A contact member, and a displacement direction when the main body member is arranged at the first position and a rotation direction of the rotating member are set substantially parallel to each other.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that is elastically deformable at least on an outer peripheral surface side.
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the rotating member is formed so as to be displaceable in a radial direction, and one of the base member or the main body member is the main body member. Is provided at the first position, facing the contact member with the rotating member interposed therebetween, and includes an opposing member facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to be able to contact the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the driving force required for displacing the main body member with respect to the base member can be suppressed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to suppress the backlash of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the play of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 81 3rd design display device (liquid crystal display device)
416 shaft support (second shaft)
417 Projection (1st axis)
430 Displacement member (arm member)
431 Sliding hole on drive side (sliding groove)
441 Drive motor (drive means)
443 Transmission gear (crank member)
443a Projection (pin part)
450 Decoration member (displacement member)
452 front base (body member)
452h Contact surface (contact member)
491c bulge (opposite member)
492 Roller member (rotating member)
492b Shaft (shaft)
500 rotation unit (rotation display device)
510 Top base (part of body member)
512, 522 Blow hole (through hole)
520 Lower surface base (part of body member)
531 Base material (base)
532 LED (light emitting means)
540 Intermediate plate (interposed member)
543 Irradiation hole (through hole)
544 Irradiation regulation part (seat part)
546 Groove 550 Front cover (transmission part, cover member)
560 Reflector (opposite member)
563a Inclined surface (opposing member)
570 Rotation transmission unit (base member, shaft member)
610 frame (center frame)
621 Cover member (front member)
621a First part 621b Second part 630 Sensor (sensor device)
640a Second winning device (winning device)
740 Passage member (bending member)
742 Guide (Slope)
743 Lower protruding part (bent part)
744 opening KR1 first throwing path (vertical path)
KR2 Second throwing path (extended passage)
KR3 Third throwing path (part of the inclined passage)
KR4 4th throwing path (part of inclined path)

Claims (3)

A base member, a main body member displaced between a first position and a second position with respect to the base member, and a displacement member displaceably disposed on the main body member, wherein the main body member has at least the In a gaming machine in which the displacement member is displaced in a state where the displacement member is disposed at the first position,
A rotating member rotatably supported by one of the base member or the main body member, and the main body member facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member in a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position, and A contact member disposed on the other of the base member and the main body member, wherein a displacement direction when the main body member is disposed at the first position and a rotation direction of the rotating member are set substantially parallel to each other. A gaming machine characterized by the following.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein at least the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that can be elastically deformed.   The rotating member is formed so as to be displaceable in a radial direction, and one of the base member or the main body member and the contact member sandwiching the rotating member in a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: an opposing member that is disposed so as to oppose, and that faces the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to be able to come into contact with the rotating member.

Images